EIMissue15

AUGUST / SEPTEMBER 2011 ISSN 2043-0140

SUSTAINABLE CITIES IAN WAKELIN TIMBER EXPO PREVIEW SARAH BUTLER-SLOSS VULTURE CONSERVATION SOLAR ENERGY

SUPPORTED BY:

INTRODUCTION FROM THE EDITOR Welcome to the latest issue of

Environment Industry Magazine, the interest in environment industry magazine and the demand for editorial coverage has surprised us all here. This issue is the biggest so far – we have increased the number of editorials and news pages in the magazine to accommodate the surge in demand, in truth we could has filled it twice over. The beauty of this increase is that we have not had to compromise on quality; the calibre of editorial writers is as strong as it has ever been with the likes of Kulveer Ranger, Environmental advisor to Boris Johnson and Paul Everitt, Chief Executive of SMMT discussing sustainable transport. Ian Wakelin CEO BIFFA on the Future of Waste, Richard Benyon MP explaining the Natural England Whitepaper as well as the illustrious Jemima Parry Jones MBE director of the International Centre for Birds of Prey (ICBP) and globally important Raptor expert talking about vulture conservation projects in India.

The ICBP is a fantastic centre and needs as much funding and support as possible, over the next few months we hope to make it the official charity for Environment Industry Magazine and we would like to encourage all our readers to, at the very least, pop down to beautiful Newent in Gloucestershire and pay a Jemima and team a visit. All the information you need to get there or to support the centre is available at http:// www.icbp.org .

As we are now receiving so many queries for editorial and news stories and we only have a finite amount of space to include them all, (and producing a monthly magazine would be suicide or at least would definitely cause a mental and physical breakdown) and being a bi-monthly magazine often means we cannot use some of the amazing stories we are sent. Therefore we have finally decided to utilise our web presence as an extension of the magazine for news, events and features. We aim to be able to offer visitors to our website a far more engaging product; we can react to breaking news stories such as policy changes or Government reviews and be able to publish some of the many expert opinions we are offered but are often unable to use. We can also keep you up to date with the

plethora of conferences and exhibitions across the environmental sector.

We are also starting a weekly newsletter which will enable us to keep our readers up to date with future features and editorial focuses as well as allowing a forum to offer a more proactive news service. It will also help to increase visitors to our e-version of the magazine hopefully giving our advertisers greater impact.

Our website should be up and running before the next issue of Environment Industry Magazine is published and the news letter should start in mid-August so keep your eyes peeled for them.

You can keep in touch with us as usual by email alex@eimag.co.uk and on Linkedin, Twitter and Facebook....welcome to the 21st century.

Enjoy what is left of the summer

Alex Stacey Managing Editor

CONTENTS NEWS: PAGE 4 - 35

FOCUS: PAGE 36 - 43 SUSTAINABLE CITIES

Page 4-35 - News Page 34 - Steve Grant Column

Page 37 - 39 - The Noble Savage Turns Urbanite James Moore, Ph.D., Senior Vice President, HDR Inc. and Emma Stewart, Ph.D., Senior Manager of AEC Sustainability, Autodesk

TIMBER: PAGE 44 - 61 Page 46 - 55 - Timber Expo Show Preview Page 56 - 58 - Trust in Timber - Alun Watkins, PEFC Page 60 - 61 - Sustainability On A Red Grandis® Scale - Simon Fineman, Ceo Timbmet

GREEN BUILDING: PAGE 62 - 73

Page 66 - 69 - The Green Roof Code of Best Practice for

the UK 2011: Why? What? … and How Simon Poe, Alumasc

Page 72 - 73 - Green Walls - Zac Ribak, MD, Watermatic Irrigation Ltd

Page 42 - 43 - Sustainability and the City Marco Marijewycz, Advocacy and Stakeholder Manager, E.ON

ENERGY: PAGE 74-89

Page 64 - Adding Quality to the Green Roof Market - Dusty Gedge, President of the European Federation of Green Roof Associations

Page 70 - 71 - How Green is YOUR roof? Richard Storey, Hertalan

Page 40 - 41 - Partnership and Collaboration: Building a Model for Sustainable Cities - Dave Morgan, Head of Cities, E.ON Sustainable Energy Business

Page 76 - 78 -

Will Government Recognise The Potential For Solar Pv In The Uk? Howard Johns, MD, Southern Solar And Chairman Of The Solar Trade Association

Page 80 - 81

Tackling The Next Barriers To The Imple Mentation Of Photovoltaics (Pv) Bruce Cross, Founder And Managing Director, Gb-Sol Ltd.

Page 82 - 84 Accrediting The Green Deal: Building Confidence And Enabling Business Jon Murthy, Ukas Page 85 - 86 Biomass Heating – The Uk’s Hottest Opportunity! - Neil Turner Res Group Page 88 - 89 - Standards Needed In Green Tech Gold Rush - Micael Pullan, Powerperfector

EnviroMedia Limited, 254a Bury New Road, Whitefield, Manchester, M45 8QN

Alex Stacey Tel: 0161 3410158 Fax: 0161 7668997 Email: alex@enviromedia.ltd.uk

Environment Industry Magazine is proud to be the official media partner for the UK Sustainable Development Association.

Every effort is made to verify all information published, but Environment Industry Magazine cannot accept responsibility for any errors or omissions or for any losses that may arise as a result. Opinions expressed in articles do not necessarily reflect those of EnviroMedia Ltd. Environment Industry Magazine welcomes contributions for publication. Submissions are accepted on the basis of full assignment of copyright to EnviroMedia Ltd unless otherwise agreed in advance and in writing. We reserve the right to edit items for reasons of space, clarity or legality. |2| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

STNETNOC CONTENTS WATER: PAGE 90 - 99 Page 92 - 95 - Energy Factories - Richard Ratcliff,

Water Sector Director for MWH Europe

& Africa Page 96 - 97 - All Water Is Not Equal - Nick Reeves,

Executive Director, CIWEM Page 98 - 99 - Sustainability Is Crucial - BMA

WASTE MANAGEMENT: PAGE 132 -143 Page 134 - 136 - RWM Show Preview Page 137 - 138 - The Future Of Waste Management Ian Wakelin, CEO, Biffa Page 139 - 141 - An Honourable History - Mark Anthony, Editor, Demolition News Page 142 - 143 - Source Segregation to Recycling Charlotte Morton, Chief Executive, ADBA

LAND MANAGEMENT: PAGE 100 - 111 Page 102 - 105 -

A Client’s Guide to Professional Indemnity Insurance - The Association of Geotechnical & Geoenvironmental Specialists

Page 106 - 111 -

Stabilisation and Solidification of Contaminated Soil and Waste Part 3: Treatment of Inorganic Contaminants - Dr Colin Hills, Director, Centre for Contaminated Land Remediation, University of Greenwich

LABS AND TESTING: PAGE 112-119 Page 114 - 117 - The End For The Environmental Testing Laboratory? - Ian Rippin, Commercial Director, NLS

Page 118 - 119 - Air Quality Monitoring - Dr Melanie Williams, National Physical Laboratory

CONSERVATION: PAGE 144 - 153

TRANSPORT: PAGE 120-131

Page 146 - 147 - Natural Environment White Paper Richard Benyon

Page 122 - 123 - The Clean Air Act; Catching Up! Kulveer Ranger, Mayor of London’s Director of Environment.

Page 127 - The Automotive Industry’s Approach To Climate Change Low Carbon Vehicles - Paul Everitt, Chief Executive, Society Of Motor Manufacturers And Traders

Page 148-149 - Crisis For Vultures Jemima Parry-Jones Mbe,

Director, International Centre For Birds

Of Prey Page 150 - 153 - Japanese Knotweed: Problem or Knot? Mike Clough, Chief Executive, Japanese Knotweed Solutions

Page 128 - 131 - Achieving Culture Change Through Technology - John Lennox, European Fleet Manager, G4s

MISCELLANY: PAGE 154 - 188 Page 155 - Environment Prosecutions Page 156 - 157 - Finance, Neil Ackroyd, Group Chairman, Precision Corporate Finance Page 158 - 160 - Mapping - Mike Williams, Principal Data Scientist, and Guy Collins, Business Analyst, Landmark Promap Page 161 - 162 - Education - Keith Marshall OBE, chief executive at SummitSkills Page 164 - 165 - “achieving zero carbon target” - Terry Nash, Director, UK Sustainable Development Association “ Page 166 - Product Guide Page 167 - 186 - Case Studies Page 187 - 188 - Famous Last Words - Sarah Butler-Sloss, Founder Director of the Ashden Awards for Sustainable Energy ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |3|

Brit has ain m woo dlan ore d th Grea an it t Br thou g itain than h t has pre

acco

vio m rdin g to us estim ore woo dla p The ates sate r ov Nati p llite indic nd onal isional ima rovision ated re Fore Com gery an al res The st In sults fro , ults y sh miss d ot v m th ento of a her ow t ion p e ry. n s hat a o 13 p l r y u ojec sis o rces ther er c t f t e h o co ent mpi ave bee high-te of B are 2,98 ch a le th ritai n pu 2 , 0 e 0 e ne n's l xt N blished rial pho and 0 hecta res atio togr a area sp nal of w . Th Fore art of a aphy, o i o s The d i s la area st In maj diffe o vent estim 225,000 nd acro renc ory r Fores ss E ha, o ate e in try ( N n r for 2 g FI). re inclu 010 8 per ce land, Sc sion ported of 2, n o of sm areas 757, t, more tland a is m all w 0 t 0 h 0 an t nd Wal ha. ostl oods he p e y d in to u revio s, repre wns e to im for t se u s wo p he f odla nting irst and citi roved t es in time nd echn . o the stat logy an istic d th s e

CA GROUP TO INSTALL WORLD’S LARGEST SOLARWALL® Leading metal roofing and cladding system manufacturer and installer, CA Group, has been awarded the contract to supply and install the latest 80,000m2 distribution centre for a high street retail giant, in Castle Donnington. The development will incorporate the world’s largest Transpired Solar Collector, or SolarWall®, installation on a single building. SolarWall® is widely recognised as one of the most efficient and cost effective renewable systems available.

The Transpired Solar Collector technology uses solar radiation to deliver naturally warmed fresh air into buildings and has the highest known efficiency of any active solar technology in the world, generating up to 500 Watts of thermal energy per square metre of collector.

Andrew Brewster leads the Renewables Design Team at CA Group, he explained: “We have seen a significant uptake in solar air heating mainly because of the very tangible results which the technology delivers. As a direct result of the work undertaken by CA Group, SolarWall® is now recognised on the iSBEM calculator.

The 4,500m2 installation at the Castle Donnington distribution centre, being delivered for First Industrial development, will result in a 30% saving in heating requirement for the warehouse. The main contractor for the development is Winvic Construction. Alongside the SolarWall® installation, the East Midlands project will feature CA Group’s Twin-Therm built up roof and wall system which is CarbonNeutral

|4| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Machinery fuel consumption reduced by half

Researchers at Aalto University in Finland have found a way to cut the amount of fuel consumed by non-road mobile machinery by half. This new technology captures energy, which up to now has been lost by the machinery when working, and uses it instead of fuel. The fuel consumption of construction and mining machines, agricultural machines and material handling machines is reduced significantly. − These heavy duty machines are operated for long periods of time, so by the end of the day emissions and fuel consumption have added up. Being able to target them is a significant improvement, says Professor Jussi Suomela, who is in charge of the project at Aalto University’s HybLab research network in Finland.

The researchers have added an electric power transmission system into the machines. The machines then become hybrids with both combustion and electric engines. Similar technology has already proven successful in personal cars; however, hybrid cars only capture energy from wheels during deceleration, whereas work machines create most of the extra energy during work tasks. This energy has not been captured until now. |6| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

The researchers at the Finnish Aalto University are now analyzing the work cycles of different types of machinery in order to find out which work tasks allow energy to be captured. Deceleration and lowering a load are typical examples. This technology enables short-term energy storage, making it possible to store energy for later use during a peak in power demand. The electric transmission generates other side benefits such as better controllability, operator comfort, efficiency and more freedom in the machine structure.

The goal is to reduce fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions. Another benefit of hybridization is that it leads to lower operation costs as well. With electric power transmission, the machines may even be connected to normal wall sockets. − Electricity from the power grid is very cost-efficient and creates no local emissions. If the machine can be plugged in, that is usually the best option. The future is likely to make fuel cells available, too, says Suomela. And the benefits do not stop here: the machines are even able to release stored electrical energy back into the grid.

Free Electricity EOS Energy announce a radical £20-million scheme to install free solar photovoltaic (PV) panels on rooftops Too good to be true? Not a bit of it: EOS Energy, the award-winning Warwickshirebased renewable energy company, is offering to install PV (photovoltaic) panels on the roofs of houses, small businesses, local authority buildings and community centres for free – and the electricity generated won’t cost a penny.

So what’s the catch? Quite frankly, there isn’t one, assures Lee Summers, director of EOS, who explained that the company has managed to acquire funding of £20-million to enable a scheme for customers who could otherwise not afford a PV system. Rooftop arrays capable of generating solar power for homes and small buildings cost in the region of £15,000.

“Our scheme includes free fitting, maintenance and insurance of the rooftop PV system, with the building occupants receiving all the electricity generated by the system free of charge for the duration of the 25 year period of operation. The occupants also receive a ‘roof rental’ payment if the yield is suitable,” said Mr Summers.

The reason EOS is able to offer the “free” scheme is because of the Government’s Feed in Tariff (FiT). Those who purchase their own PV system would normally receive the FiT (44p per kilowatt) themselves, but by taking advantage of the free scheme the building occupants forfeit the FiT to the funder, although they will receive the electricity generated for free.

Mr Summers stressed that EOS Energy would not be receiving the Feed in Tariff itself – this would be harvested by the funder of the scheme. “We are merely trying to help people that can’t afford a PV system to protect themselves from the anticipated increases in electricity prices, and, of course, to encourage the use of renewable energy,” he said.

Mr Summers said EOS would have to assess all applications for the free rooftop arrays to ensure the premises were suitable. In accordance with the REAL (Renewable Energy Assurance) Scheme EOS will also supply a quotation, explaining what it would cost to buy the system, what the FiT would be, and offering the free system as an alternative.

“We are delighted to be able to offer this exceptional deal, which is not only generating clean energy and saving people a great deal of money, but also means we are expanding our workforce, providing at least 50 more jobs, in order to cope with demand,” said Mr Summers.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |7|

Methane gas from cows – the proof is in the poo!

Scientists could have a revolutionary new way of measuring how much of the potent greenhouse gas methane is produced by cows and other ruminants, thanks to a surprising discovery in their poo.

Researchers from the University of Bristol and the Teagasc Animal and Grassland Research Centre in Ireland, have found a link between methane production and levels of a compound called archaeol in the faeces of several fore-gut fermenting animals including cows, sheep and deer.

The compound could potentially be developed as a biomarker to estimate the methane production from domestic and wild animals, allowing scientists to more accurately assess the contribution that ruminants make to global greenhouse gas emissions.

Co-author Dr Fiona Gill, who conducted the work as a postdoctoral researcher at Bristol and is now in the University of Leeds School of Earth and Environment, said: “When it comes to calculating carbon budgets there is currently a lot of uncertainty surrounding animal methane contributions, particularly from wild ruminants.

“We’re quite good at measuring man-made CO2 emissions, but techniques to measure the animal production of methane – a much more potent greenhouse gas – have serious limitations.

“If we can identify a simple biomarker for methane production in animal stools, then we can use this along with information on diet and animal population numbers to estimate their total contribution to global methane levels.”

Cows, sheep and other ruminants are thought to be

|8| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

responsible for around one-fifth of global methane production but the precise amount has proved difficult to quantify. Methane production from animals is often measured using respiration chambers, which can be laborious and are unsuitable for grazing animals.

Archaeol is thought to come from organisms called archaea, which are symbiotic or ‘friendly’ microbes that live in the foregut of ruminant animals. These microbes produce methane as a by-product of their metabolism and this is then released by the animal as burping and flatulence.

Principal investigator, Dr Ian Bull of Bristol’s School of Chemistry said: “We initially detected archaeol in the faeces of several foregut fermenters including camels, cows, giraffes, sheep and llamas. We then expanded the study to evaluate the quantities of this compound in the faeces of cows with different diets.

“Two groups of cows were fed on different diets and then their methane production and faecal archaeol concentration were measured. The animals that were allowed to graze on as much silage as they wanted emitted significantly more methane and produced faeces with higher concentrations of archaeol than those given a fixed amount of silage, supplemented by concentrate feed.

“This confirms that manipulating the diet of domestic livestock could also be an important way of controlling methane gas emissions.”

New battery design could give electric vehicles a jolt

Old Eurostar Uniforms & Seat Covers Upcycled into new Bags

Significant advance in battery architecture could be breakthrough for electric vehicles and grid storage A radically new approach to the design of batteries, developed by researchers at MIT, could provide a lightweight and inexpensive alternative to existing batteries for electric vehicles and the power grid.

The technology could even make “refueling” such batteries as quick and easy as pumping gas into a conventional car.

Eurostar, the high-speed passenger service linking London, Paris and Brussels is issuing its train managers with a world’s first bags created entirely from recycled Eurostar staff uniforms and antimacassars.

The new battery relies on an innovative architecture called a semi-solid flow cell, in which solid particles are suspended in a carrier liquid and pumped through the system. In this design, the battery’s active components — the positive and negative electrodes, or cathodes and anodes — are composed of particles suspended in a liquid electrolyte. These two different suspensions are pumped through systems separated by a filter, such as a thin porous membrane.

One important characteristic of the new design is that it separates the two functions of the battery — storing energy until it is needed, and discharging that energy when it needs to be used — into separate physical structures. (In conventional batteries, the storage and discharge both take place in the same structure.) Separating these functions means that batteries can be designed more efficiently.

The new design should make it possible to reduce the size and the cost of a complete battery system, including all of its structural support and connectors, to about half the current levels. That dramatic reduction could be the key to making electric vehicles fully competitive with conventional gas- or diesel-powered vehicles.

Another potential advantage is that in vehicle applications, such a system would permit the possibility of simply “refueling” the battery by pumping out the liquid slurry and pumping in a fresh, fully charged replacement, or by swapping out the tanks like tyres at a pit stop, while still preserving the option of simply recharging the existing material when time permits.

In addition to potential applications in vehicles, the new battery system could be scaled up to very large sizes at low cost. This would make it particularly well-suited for large-scale electricity storage for utilities, potentially making intermittent, unpredictable sources such as wind and solar energy practical for powering the electric grid. |10| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Working with Upcycling company, Worn Again, which specialises in creating new products from disused materials, the bags were created using old Eurostar raincoats, lining material from old suit jackets and antimacassars (headrest covers).

Created by award-winning designer, Benjamin Shine, a prototype of the bag was displayed last year in the ‘Sustainable Futures’ exhibition at the British Design Museum in London. From July, passengers will be able to spot the bags when they travel on Eurostar as they are distributed to over 250 train managers in the UK, France and Belgium.

Peter Bragg, Head of Environment and Energy for Eurostar said: “Our work with Worn Again is part of our commitment to reduce our impact on the environment. We don’t just talk about policies and practices we do everything we can to bring them to life.” “Eurostar train managers were involved in every stage of the design process and their contribution has helped us create a completely recycled product, that not only meets their needs but is worthy of appearing at the British Design Museum.”

Cyndi Rhoades, CEO of Worn Again said: “Eurostar is a forward thinking company which delivers on its sustainable objectives. The bags have been a big project and it’s exciting that from next month, Eurostar train managers will be literally wearing the brands commitment to sustainability.”

The bags were made in the UK by Barrow and Gale, a traditional bags manufacturer in Woolwich. The company was established in 1750 and holds the royal warrant to manufacture Royal Maundy purses for HM The Queen.

Recycling and upcycling uniforms and train parts are key elements of Eurostar’s Tread Lightly programme and the commitment across the business to reduce its overall impact on the environment. This includes reducing usage wherever possible, sourcing supplies responsibly and recycling what is used or produced.

Recycling uniforms has helped contribute towards Eurostar reaching its target of zero waste being disposed to landfill and 80% of all waste being recycled.

Advanced Plasma Power and Group Machiels announce landmark waste management joint venture - Innovative British technology company is the first to provide viable and sustainable waste-toenergy solution –

Advanced Plasma Power (APP), the UK-based wasteto-energy company and Group Machiels, the global waste management firm, today announce a major joint venture in order to undertake the first enhanced landfill mining project in the world - involving an investment of hundreds of millions of euros.

Process and product development to make efficient use of all phases of a product’s life cycle, thereby closing the materials loop, are indispensable tools to overcome depletion of raw materials, shortage of energy and CO2 accumulation in the atmosphere.

The mining of existing landfills are an exceptional example of closing the material’s loop. Hence, the Closing the Circle concept, an enhanced landfill mining concept, has been developed by Group Machiels in collaboration with a consortium of academic partners (KULeuven, VITO, UHasselt), extracting the maximum value from historic waste streams as materials and energy, as well as CO2 sequestration or offsetting.

The Closing the Circle concept is being implemented in the project at the landfill site of Remo Milieubeheer NV in Houthalen-Hechteren, Belgium, a subsidiary of Group Machiels. More than 16 million tons of waste is stored at that landfill site. The type, amount and location of the waste stored is well documented, allowing its effective and efficient mining. Around 45% of the stored waste can be recycled as material. The recycling residue can be processed through APP’s patented Gasplasma® technology, Europe’s first truly sustainable waste-toenergy application of this kind.

The joint venture aims to construct an energy plant using up to five Gasplasma® units, with a net electrical power of 75 to 100 MW - this is equivalent to the energy required to power 100,000 homes. The energy produced by the units will be fed into the national electricity grid in Flanders. It combines two existing and proven technologies to produce a highly efficient wasteto-energy process meeting all European emissions requirements with virtually no residual wastes.

The Gasplasma® process is a gasification and plasma conversion technology that converts the waste stream into a clean hydrogen-rich syngas and a vitrified recyclate product called Plasmarok® that can be used as a building material or replacement aggregate. The Gasplasma® process destroys harmful gases leaving the high quality syngas to be used to generate clean, renewable, local energy.

Therefore the Gasplasma® process is perfectly suited for the Closing the Circle project, which will see the Remo landfill site that has been in use since the 1970s returned to its original state with green spaces to be enjoyed by the community.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |11|

New waste contract is a national first A new joint waste contract forged between East Hampshire District Council and Winchester City Council is a national first. The two councils have joined forces to provide bin collections and environmental services in a partnership which could net more than £2 million of savings across the two councils.

WYG, who evaluated the tenders, has also been involved in similar ground-breaking partnerships in the past. In 2007 they handled the first cross-boundary contract, between two councils in Suffolk, which focused solely on bin collections.

Len Attrill, Project Director, WYG, one of the top environmental contract procurement specialists in the country, believes the complexity and scale of the contract makes it one of a kind in the UK. Len commented: “We believe this is the first contract of this scope in the country. For all the talk about cross boundary working between councils there are precious few real examples out there and this, in terms of its scope, is more wide-reaching than anything else. There are only a few cross-border contracts for refuse collections in existence and we believe that this is the first contract which covers refuse and recycling, street cleaning and grounds maintenance at the same time. It’s a more complex project than anything that has gone before and it is brave because it is the first time anyone has tried to do it this way. East Hampshire District Council (EHDC) and Winchester City Council (WCC) have been rewarded for their ambition and their innovation. They should be proud of what they have achieved,” Patrick Burridge, Leader of EHDC said: “This contract is the stuff that dreams are made of. Combining the services has taken two years of hard work and perseverance but will now result in the two councils making huge savings for the benefit of council tax payers.

In terms of recycling rates Hampshire is the best in the country and, over a period of many years East Hampshire has been the best in Hampshire. That’s a testament to both our pioneering attitude and to the residents of East Hampshire who have been so effective in separating their waste and their recyclables.”

The contract, which took more than two years to draw up, will come in to effect in October and is expected to save EHDC £846,000 and WCC more than £1.4m annually.

Brian Turner, Client Team Manager, EHDC said: “WYG has extensive knowledge in this field which gives us great reassurance. Throughout the tender evaluation we |12| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

developed a strong partnership with the consultancy and were pleased with the way they were able to work to our requirements and in a professional and reliable manner.”

Biffa Waste Services Ltd will take over the collection of refuse and recycling bins and The Landscape Group will work on street cleaning and ground maintenance.

ETI to invest £23.5m in project to develop next generation carbon capture technology Development of the next generation of carbon capture technologies, seen as crucial to helping the UK meet its 2050 climate change targets, is to receive a major boost from the Energy Technologies Institute (ETI), The ETI is working with Costain to deliver the project which will see a carbon capture pilot plant capable of capturing up to 95% of carbon dioxide emissions designed, built, operated and tested by the middle of 2015.

The project will be aimed at pre-combustion carbon capture applications, involving CO2 removal by physical separation and will be split into two parts.

The first lasting 16 months and costing £3.5m will provide the front end engineering design for the demonstration unit. Costain will work with the University of Edinburgh, and Imperial College, London on the first stage, to help understand and optimise performance of the technology.

The ETI expects to invest £20m in the second stage, as the pilot plant is built, demonstrated and the results analysed. Demonstration is a key element to building user group confidence in the capture element.

Durrell instrumental in saving the orange-tailed skink from extinction

In 2007 plans were revealed to develop Flat Island for the enhancement of tourism. Many concerns were raised over this, particularly the risk of introducing invasive shrews and, or wolf snakes, both thought to be responsible for decimating small terrestrial reptile communities in Mauritius.

In February 2008 to mitigate the predicted threat of predator introduction, Durrell’s team, along with staff from the Mauritian Wildlife Foundation and the Mauritius National Parks and Conservation Service, translocated 82 orangetailed skinks to the nature reserve, Gunner’s Quoin.

Fears of development on Flat Island were realised in 2010, when shrews were detected on the island. This was a severe blow to conservation in Mauritius, but the on-site teams acted quickly and translocated a further 390 orange-tailed skinks.

On a recent expedition to Flat Island and exactly one year on from the discovery of the shrew, Durrell staff found that despite intensive and lengthy searches of the island using highly sensitive techniques for detecting the secretive orangetailed skink, none were found.

Durrell Wildlife Conservation Trust has received 22 orange-tailed skinks, rescued following the invasion of Flat Island, Mauritius by the predatory Indian musk shrew.

The orange-tailed skink was discovered on Flat Island, the largest of the Mauritian islands in 1995. Since then habitat modification and the introduction of nonnative predators elsewhere in Mauritius has meant that Flat Island became the last refuge for this Critically Endangered reptile.

|14| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Commenting on the project Dr Nik Cole of Durrell said “Had the reptile team not reacted to the threat of development and the arrival of the shrew, the orange-tailed skink would now be extinct. However, it may be years before we can confirm that the translocations have been a success. The skinks will be maintained at Durrell until we are certain that the translocated populations have established or we manage to find a way to tackle the shrew problem.”

Discussing the restoration of Mauritius’ endemic reptile communities which is one of Durrell’s core conservation projects he continued “Another vulnerable reptile species lost from the Flat Island has been the Vulnerable endemic lesser night gecko, which is restricted to just a couple of other islands. Fortunately, we have been working with this species both here and at the Herpetological Department at our Jersey Headquarters to improve its conservation status.”

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |15|

GREEN DEAL TO BE BEST DEAL FOR CONSUMER • New Green Deal Code outlined • Green Deal advice line to be set up • Independent body formally appointed to ensure Green Deal assessors and installers meet robust new standards. Climate Change Minister Greg Barker has set out plans to ensure the Green Deal won’t rip off consumers.

The Green Deal is the government’s flagship energy saving plan to transform the country’s homes to make them warmer and cheaper to run. From next year, people will be able to access up to £10,000 upfront to pay for energy efficiency work, repaying the costs through savings on energy bills. Similar support will be available through the Green Deal for businesses and there will be extra help for vulnerable people or those living in homes which need more work than Green Deal finance alone will stretch to.

The legal framework is currently progressing through Parliament under the Energy Bill Greg Barker said:“The Green Deal will be the biggest home improvement programme since the Second World War shifting our outdated draughty homes from the past into the future, so it’s vital people can trust it. I have heard too many cases of shoddy workmanship or dodgy technology from Government schemes in the past so from day one there will be strict rules about standards, information will be readily available and there will be a proper route for

complaints. We’ve already started putting in place the foundations for this and I am pleased the United Kingdom Accreditation Service has been formally appointed to ensure that installers and assessors will meet the necessary standards when the Green Deal starts next year.”

In a new document entitled ‘Consumer Protection in the Green Deal’, DECC has set out its plans for consumer protection and redress.

The document includes: • Plans to set up a new Green Deal Code – to protect customers at every stage of the Green Deal from initial assessment to installation.

• Plans to set up a new Green Deal advice line – this will provide impartial advice and referral to accredited Green Deal assessors, installers and providers as well as a route for any complaints.

• The formal appointment of the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) – which will ensure assessors and installers adhere to robust standards in order to participate in the Green Deal.

Solar energy to take the heat off nation’s electricity bills Pro5, a partnership between five of the UK’s largest formally constituted public sector buying organisations (PSBO) have already established energy contracts for liquid fuel, gas and electricity. Now, the group announce the contract that local government and the wider public sector have been waiting for: free renewable energy. Photovoltaic (PV) solar systems provide the technology behind the free source of energy and will be available to all local authorities and other public bodies nationally as part of Pro5’s new fully compliant Microgeneration Technologies contract.

The contract is estimated to be worth more than £250m over the next four years based on the current and potential interest shown. Users will be able to choose from a wide range of the latest renewable products including: photovoltaic (PV) solar systems, wind turbines, air source heat pumps and biomass boilers to maximise the benefit of on-site renewable energy.

Tom James, Category Manager for Energy at Pro5 member YPO said: “Cutting costs is now essential for local government organisations and the wider public sector. Our new contract offers customers the opportunity to generate their own, renewable energy in line with helping to meet the CO2 reduction targets agreed through the Kyoto Protocol.”

As part of the Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC) Microgeneration Strategy, certain schemes will attract Feed-in Tariff (FIT) and Renewable Heat Incentive (RHI) which will give consumers a fixed price for each unit of energy generated.

Deadline for supplier applications has now closed. |16| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Toyota Motor Manufacturing UK is set to be the first UK car manufacturer to install a large scale solar panel array after the scheme gained approval from its local planning authority. Work has started on installing the ground-mounted system at Toyota’s vehicle plant in Derbyshire, where Auris hybrid, Auris and Avensis cars are built for the UK and export markets.

The solar array is located on 90,000m2 of industrial land within the plant and consists of around 17,000 panels – enough to cover almost four and a half football pitches – all of which will be manufactured in the UK. Generating electricity for use on site, the project will help reduce the plant’s carbon footprint, support energy security and cut its power bills.

The scheme will save up to 2,000 tonnes of CO2 emissions a year and the saving in energy will be equivalent to 4,600,000 kWh. When fully operational it will be capable of supplying enough energy to build approximately 7,000 cars a year.

The solar panels will cost more than £10 million and will be installed and paid for by British Gas. The development is a key part of Toyota’s ‘Sustainable Plant’ vision in which manufacturing operations are designed to work in harmony with their local community and surrounding environment. The UK is one of just five Toyota plants worldwide to be designated a Sustainable Plant with first-rate environmental credentials.

Tony Walker, Toyota Manufacturing UK Deputy Managing Director said: “We are already making a significant contribution to the UK’s low carbon economy with production of Auris hybrid – the first European built full hybrid car.

Generating solar power on-site to supply electricity to the plant underlines our commitment to do even more to further reduce our carbon footprint and is yet another example of our environmental leadership. We are delighted to be working in partnership with British Gas to achieve this.”

Jon Kimber, Managing Director of British Gas New Energy, said: “With energy costs increasing and a tough financial climate, all businesses are looking at ways to cut their bills as well as reduce their carbon emissions. Solar power has the potential to make this happen and really revolutionise the way Britain’s homes and businesses generate energy. Toyota is a real beacon for green business throughout the UK.” ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |17|

Government under fire over circuses

Image bottom: © Born Free Foundation

In a Parliamentary Adjournment Debate secured by Robert Flello MP, speaker after speaker called on the Government to bring about, without delay, a ban on the use of wild animals in circuses. They cited the overwhelming public support for such a measure, widespread support from Members of Parliament across all Parties, the expert opinion of animal welfare groups including Born Free Foundation, RSPCA, British Veterinary Association, Captive Animal Protection Society (CAPS) and Animal Defenders International and they sought to persuade the Government that it was time to bring this sorry circus to a close.

Answering for the Government, James Paice MP, repeatedly pointed out his concerns about legal challenges to a ban quoting from legal advice provided to him by Defra (Department for Food and Rural Affairs). However, referring to an internal Parliamentary convention, he said he was unwilling to publish this legal advice, much to the frustration of MPs attending the Debate and observers in the Gallery including Will Travers from the Born Free Foundation.

Reporting from the Debate, Will Travers said, “The Minister commented that, in his view, a more effective way forward was to licence and regulate and to set standards so high, that it would be most unlikely that certain species, particularly large mammals such as lions and tigers, would continue to be a feature in circuses in England. However, he then described the timetable for such regulation which he stated would involve a further consultative period with stakeholders in 2011, draft regulations to be published and again subjected to consultation at the end of the year and into 2012, and the regulations themselves coming into force sometime next year. Undoubtedly, there would also then be a “grace period” to allow circuses to meet the new standards. Clearly, we could be looking at 2013 or even later before such a system takes full effect.

Will members of Parliament and the public be satisfied with this? I doubt it.”

There is a potential opportunity later this month for a full debate leading to a vote in the House of Commons and, should this take place – and the motion before the House be worded sufficiently strongly - and provided that the Government does not apply the Whip and allows members to vote according to their conscience, there is a chance that a ban could still become a reality (although even such a vote may not be binding).

Something seems very badly wrong with our parliamentary system when matters of ethics and morality can no longer be the basis for legislation. Because the expert report submitted to the previous administration in 2007 did not come down conclusively one way or the other as to whether the welfare of wild animals is compromised in the circus (an outcome welfare organisations such as the Born Free Foundation, RSPCA, Animal Defenders International and others predicted, since video evidence of cruel treatment was deemed inadmissible as was evidence relating to training and performance!) apparently a ban based on morality and ethics would be regarded as disproportionate and politically unacceptable. When do we get to make the right decisions for the right reasons?

On leaving Westminster Hall, Will said, “Meanwhile, wild animals are still in circuses, still on the road, still in beast-wagons, still in the ring, still being trained, still performing – welcome to the 21st Century.”

|18| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

The House of Lords EU Agriculture, Fisheries and Environment Committee invite contributions to its new inquiry into EU Freshwater Policy.

The European Commission plans to publish a “Blueprint to Safeguard Europe’s Water” towards the end of 2012, which will have a dual purpose: • to evaluate the EU’s current freshwater policies and identify any gaps • to identify any measures and tools that could help ensure a sustainable, good quality water supply in the long-term.

The Committee sees this as a critical time to examine the EU’s role in the sustainable management of freshwater. It has launched its inquiry in order to provide a substantive input to the discussions in 2012 which will lead up to the Blueprint.

The Committee will examine a range of questions including the following; •

•

•

•

•

How relevant and useful do you think the current policy framework is?

What challenges should be addressed by EU freshwater policy to ensure the sustainable use of good quality water in the longer term?

How can other EU policy areas – most notably the Common Agricultural Policy – be adapted to help manage Europe’s sustainable freshwater supplies?

What aspects of EU policy are best managed by Member States or regionally, rather than at an EU level?

What should the EU do to promote innovative responses to the demands of water management?

Committee Chairman, Lord Carter of Coles, said: “Fresh water is a finite resource that is vital to our survival. In the last 18 months, the Committee has reported on adapting EU agriculture to climate change, and on innovation in EU agriculture. Both these reports have shone a light on the strains on our freshwater supply in Europe, and the demands that this finite source will be facing in the future.

“If we are to ensure the sustainable use of good quality water, we must look for new ways of protecting, preserving and improving our water supplies.

“We hope that the report we publish at the end of this inquiry will contribute to a very important debate that must be had about the future of freshwater policy in Europe. We would encourage anyone who has an interest to contribute to this vitally important debate.”

For the full call for evidence, list of questions, and information about how to submit evidence, please see http://www.parliament.uk/business/committees/ committees-a-z/lords-select/eu-environment-andagriculture-sub-committee-d/news/eu-freshwaterpolicy-/ Evidence should be submitted by 5 September, preferably by email, to Paul Bristow at bristowpn@parliament.uk

Lords from All Parties Champion Solar Lords from all sides of the House championed solar yesterday, as motions put down by Lord Lucas and Baroness Smith were debated. .

The Solar Trade Association had briefed Lords that the motion provided a good opportunity to draw attention to the benefits and huge potential of solar power in the UK and the dramatic cost reductions taking place.

Lords who spoke in the debate expressed frustration that key questions about solar had not been answered by Lord Marland, who spoke for the Government.

Ray Noble, PV adviser to the STA said: "Solar did not even feature in the top ten technologies in the Renewables Roadmap launched this week. Yet it will be a major contributor to 2020 electricity in key EU countries. Parliamentary time spent discussing solar energy is precious, and the STA believes every opportunity should be taken to raise awareness and show it is a serious mistake to marginalise this technology."

The issue will go to the Commons shortly.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |19|

In an effort to draw the world’s attention to the impact of poaching on Africa’s elephants, the Lusaka Agreement Task Force destroyed 5 tonnes of seized ivory in Tsavo National Park.

The ivory, which originated in Malawi, Zambia, and Tanzania, was confiscated during a notorious 2002 seizure in Singapore.

Bonfire of the Vanities

Ivory to go up in smoke: Elephant poaching escalates

Will Travers, CEO of the Born Free Foundation, explained the importance of the ivory burn: "Reports of elephant poaching and ivory seizures are becoming an almost daily occurrence. The bloody, corrupt and merciless ivory trade that precipitated the slaughter of 600,000 African elephants during the 1970s and 1980s is sadly booming across Africa again.”

Data collated by Born Free reveals that in the last six months more than 10,500 kilogrammes of ivory has been seized by customs and police officials. That's the last mortal remains of more than 1,700 elephants. Seizures have been made in Thailand, Vietnam, Mozambique, China, Kenya and Portugal. One seizure in Guangxi Province, China in April 2011, for instance, included 707 elephant tusks, 32 ivory bracelets, and a rhino horn.

Born Free Foundation Wildlife Trade Specialist Shelley Waterland has flown from England to Kenya to witness the ivory burn first-hand, along with co-hosts the Kenya Wildlife Service. Ms. Waterland declared: “Let the fire shine a spotlight on this growing crisis and motivate us to take action against the bloody ivory trade – no more sales of stockpiled ivory; no more tusks sold for a staggering $1,500 a kilo; no more rangers and wardens killed by poachers trying to protect wild elephants; no more ivory orphans.”

She continued: “The last major ivory burn in Kenya marked the beginning of the ivory trade ban (in 1989). Poaching is now so bad because that life-saving ban has been eroded by ‘one-off’ sales and the development of trading mechanisms, both of which send entirely the wrong message to poaching networks and the organised crime syndicates that operate them. Having consulted with many range States, my message from Kenya is clear - the ivory ban must be reinstated in full and we must increase our wildlife law-enforcement effort.”

The global trade in elephant ivory is regulated by the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES) and is monitored specifically by its Standing Committee. Travers concluded: “Born Free is calling on the UK and other members of the CITES Standing Committee to withdraw ‘approved ivory trading nation’ status from China and Japan and to re-impose a full global ivory trade ban. Only then will the message be clear, will the poachers realise they have nowhere to hide, will the enforcement agencies and customs authorities be able to act with certainty… and will the world’s wild elephants stand a fighting chance.”

The Standing Committee next meets in Geneva 15-19 August 2011.

With an estimated 35,000 elephants a year killed for their ivory, and between 400,000 and 500,000 elephants left across the African Continent, the Born Free Foundation has declared the situation critical and is concerned that without immediate and resolute action, elephants face a bleak future.

|20| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

New Industry Standard Launched for SMEs Business leaders, academics and councillors came together for the official launch of The Responsible Business Standard at Anglia Ruskin University.

Developed by the Organisation for Responsible Businesses (ORB), and validated through collaborative Partnership with Dr. Beatriz Acevedo, lecturer in Sustainable Management at the Lord Ashcroft International Business School, The Responsible Business Standard aims to give small to medium sized enterprises a welcome advantage in securing procurement and government contracts as well as leading them towards a more socially responsible business. It has been specifically developed for SMEs to encompass a range of attributes businesses need to aspire to in the changing economy. It is quite different to any existing forms of certification such as an ISO although, as this new standard is much broader, can either sit neatly beside them or used as a stepping stone towards them.

Image: Julie-Ann March, Jenny Little and Dr Beatriz Acevedo (Anglia Ruskin University), Cllr Kevin Bentley, Jill Poet (ORB), Ian Wicks (FSB) and Mike Wilson (ORB)

The nationally recognised Standard has been designed to be both affordable and attainable, with progressive levels and entry costs including professional auditing of less than £500.

bronze, silver and gold. A Certified ORB Consultant conducts the audit which covers a wide remit looking at everything from best practice and management systems to social and environmental compliance.

Jill Poet, Managing Director of ORB explains: “This isn’t just about being accountable and socially responsible. Many UK SMEs are already working hard towards best practice but don’t have anything tangible to demonstrate that. We developed The Responsible Business Standard because there wasn't anything that is affordable, realistic and of value for the majority of SMEs for whom ISO accreditation can often involve too much time and too much money. It can also be daunting for SMEs to go down the ISO route and yet the lack of appropriate certification has often meant businesses have been unable to obtain valuable contracts. Historically, central and local government have always asked for ISO9001, but they are now accepting that it isn't always necessary or appropriate.

They do nonetheless require some sort of validation and The Responsible Business Standard will evidence what a business is doing and fill the breach to meet public and private sector requirements.”

Ian Wicks, Essex Regional Chairman of the Federation of Small Businesses (FSB) says: “Many smaller businesses, even if they have supplied an organisation for many years, are suddenly being asked to evidence their social and environmental credentials. Businesses need to be aware that this type of enquiry within the supply chain is likely to increase rapidly: they should be ready for it if they wish to maintain existing contracts and gain new ones. This new standard has been designed specifically for SMEs, businesses that typify the FSB membership. We believe The Standard is going to be a very useful tool for these businesses, particularly in the supply chain and procurement arena”.

The Standard is available at three progressive levels:

Jill concludes, “The demands of customers, both in the public and private sector are changing, and there is a clear message that those businesses that embrace social and environmental considerations will thrive in coming decades. We want to engage with those businesses to guide them towards not just a competitive advantage but reduced overheads, a more productive workforce and a better reputation.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |21|

ALL-ENERGY - UK’S LEADING ALTERNATIVE ENERGY EXHIBITION & CONFERENCE ACQUIRED BY REED EXHIBITIONS Reed Exhibitions adds to its growing global portfolio of alternative energy events

establishing a new attendance record. The growth mirrors the investment in the industry both in the UK and globally.

Reed Exhibitions is delighted to announce that it has acquired Media Generation Events Ltd (MGE), the organisers of All-Energy, the UK's largest alternative energy exhibition and conference, held annually each May in Aberdeen.

Reed Exhibitions’ Divisional Managing Director, Justin Tadman said: “Acquiring All-Energy is an important step in securing our position in the UK’s alternative energy market, and is a key strategic element in our global renewable energy strategy. We are looking forward to working closely with All-Energy exhibitors, visitors, sponsors and supporters to deliver an excellent 12th edition of the show in Aberdeen between 23-24 May 2012.”

The All-Energy Exhibition & Conference has been held in Aberdeen, ‘The Energy City’, since 2001, and is the UK's largest event devoted to all forms of clean and renewable energy. The show has experienced rapid growth over recent years, with the 2011 edition increasing in size by 35% from 2010, welcoming 580 exhibitors from 20 countries, and staging nearly 50 conference sessions in seven free-to-attend parallel streams. Close to 8,000 participants from more than 50 countries attended the show at Aberdeen Exhibition and Conference Centre during two exceptionally busy days (18-19 May 2011),

Paul Stott, Managing Director of Media Generation Group plc added: “We would like to thank all our sponsoring and endorsing organisations, exhibitors, speakers and a host of individuals for their strong support and enthusiasm for All-Energy that has enabled us to grow the show from its 2001 beginnings with fewer than 50 exhibiting companies and total attendance of 350, to its role as the major event in the renewable energy industry calendar."

Ordnance Survey becomes part of Department for Business Innovation and Skills The Prime Minister has announced that Ministerial responsibility for Ordnance Survey, alongside Land Registry and the Met Office, will pass to the Department for Business Innovation and Skills (BIS).

The Government shareholding of Ordnance Survey and the Government’s customer functions both move from the Department for Communities and Local Government.

The BIS Permanent Secretary, Martin Donnelly, welcomed the move, which marks a step towards establishment of a Public Data Corporation (PDC), plans for which were announced by the Government in January this year.

Martin Donnelly said: “It is good to welcome Ordnance Survey, the Land Registry and Met Office to the BIS family. The talents and abilities of their staff will be a welcome addition to the Department’s teamwork to ensure sustainable economic growth across the UK. “Staff and customers should know that these organisations will continue to deliver a high level of service going forward.”

Dr Vanessa Lawrence CB, Ordnance Survey Director General and Chief Executive, added: “Bringing Ordnance Survey together with some of the other major data providers in government under BIS will provide an excellent opportunity to share best practice and strengthen our existing relationships.”

Final decisions on membership, structure and commercial strategy of the Public Data Corporation will be taken later this year, following a consultation on PDC data policy, due to launch over the summer.

In the meantime, BIS Minister Edward Davey MP will jointly chair with the Minister for the Cabinet Office, Francis Maude MP a PDC Transition Board, which will consider membership, structure and governance for the PDC. |22| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

SmartestEnergy powering a city’s streets The streets of the City of Salford in Greater Manchester are now being lit by renewable

UK’s largest solar roof installation goes live at Beccles, Suffolk

Promens Manufacturing facility will use almost 100% of the energy generated by its 1.65MW roof-top solar plant.

Lightsource Renewable Energy and Octopus Investments are proud to announce that the country’s largest solar farm will go live on a Promens warehouse roof-top at Beccles in Suffolk. The installation was developed by Lightsource, built

by Grupotec, and funded by hundreds of small investors throughout the UK, through funds managed by Octopus.

energy following the first contract win of its kind by SmartestEnergy.

Under the two year agreement SmartestEnergy will supply more than 29 million kilowatt hours of energy to the city which is home to 220,000 people. The contract is worth around £1.4 million a year and covers approximately 30,000 street lamps across the city where attractions include Salford Quays, one of the largest urban regeneration projects in the UK. The BBC is currently relocating a number of its departments from London to a new ‘Media City’ development at the former Manchester docks site.

The Salford City Council contract is the first for local authority street lighting to be won by SmartestEnergy which supplies electricity to a rapidly growing number of large energy users from its portfolio of independent generation projects.

“We believe there is significant potential for street lighting across the UK to be powered by renewable electricity,” said Geoff Curtis, SmartestEnergy Key Account Manager.

“Local authorities are under considerable pressure to cut costs but don’t want to reduce lighting because of its role in preventing crime and accidents.

“By supplying renewable energy without a premium we are able to help councils maintain services within their budget and also reduce carbon footprint.”

The 7,000 solar panels give the site a capacity of 1.65MW, making it the largest roof-top project in the UK to date. The Government has dramatically reduced the subsidies available for any solar scheme over 50KW coming online after the 1st August, so it is likely that this will be the UK’s largest roof-top installation ever.

The on-site link between the energy source and consumption removes the need for new substations or land-based grid connections because close to 100% of the power generated will be used on site. The site is a perfect demonstration of embedded generation because the power production is matched to the on-site load.

Lightsource is one of the few developers to have successfully met the August 1st deadline, ensuring its installations are eligible to receive the Government’s current Feed in Tariff for larger (+50Kw) sites. It has been a race against time for the construction companies involved, with some having only five weeks on site to complete their work.

CARLUCCIO’S AIMS FOR A CARBON SAVING OF 92.7 TONNES BY CONVERTING WASTE COOKING OIL WITH CONVERT2GREEN Convert2Green has concluded an agreement to work with ‘restaurant’ group Carluccio's to collect and convert waste cooking oil into biodiesel as part of the company’s wider sustainability strategy.

Convert2Green will collect waste oil from Carluccio’s 54 cafès in the UK and recycle it in to high quality bio-fuel which will be used to fuel delivery trucks, reducing carbon emissions by up to 90%.

“Carluccio’s is a founding member of the Sustainable Restaurant Association so we take our recycling, waste management and carbon savings very seriously – recycling our waste cooking oil into bio-diesel is a big part of our overall sustainability strategy,” explains Steve Kaddish, development manager, Carluccio’s.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |23|

Largest Population of Critically Endangered Gibbon Discovered in Vietnam Conservation International scientists urge high priority protection for “global stronghold” of threatened primates; only known viable population left worldwide.

Conservation International (CI) has discovered the largest known remaining population of the critically endangered northern white-cheeked crested gibbon (Nomascus leucogenys) in Vietnam. Through auditory surveying, a technique which uses the species loud morning calls for identification, CI has confirmed a substantial population of 130 groups (455 animals), making this the highest priority for conservation action for the species globally.

This newly censused population represents over two-thirds of the total population of the northern white-cheeked crested gibbon in Vietnam and is the only confirmed viable population of this species left worldwide. Historically distributed in China, Vietnam and Laos, this highly threatened primate is believed to be functionally extinct in China and the species situation is largely unknown in Laos, due to a lack of research, although significant numbers may still persist.

Dr. Russell A. Mittermeier, Chair of the IUCN/SSC Primate Specialist Group and President of Conservation International, said: “All of the world’s 25 different gibbons are threatened, and none more so than the Indochinese crested gibbons, eight of which, including the northern whitecheeked gibbon, are now on the brink of extinction. This is an extraordinarily significant find, and underscores the immense importance of protected areas in providing the last refuges for the region’s decimated wildlife”.

Work carried out by CI over the past three years within the species fragmented distribution in north-central Vietnam had until now returned sobering results, with no population larger than a dozen groups found. In 2010, the area of focus was changed to Pu Mat National Park, where CI and the park staff, with support from Fauna & Flora International, Arcus Foundation and Sprague-Nowak SE Asia Biodiversity Initiative, used auditory sampling techniques to research this area.

Gibbons are territorial and communicate their boundaries

|24| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

with loud, elaborate and prolonged vocalisations. By recording these songs, data was gathered on the gibbon groups in the surveyed area and used to determine group numbers across the park. This relict population was discovered in remote, dense forest, at high altitudes on the VietnamLaos border, where they have been isolated from human populations. This latest discovery gives great hope for the future of this beautiful and unique primate.

However, road development in this area poses a serious threat to the gibbon’s future, as this global stronghold has persisted because of the remoteness of the habitat.

These roads, designed to increase border patrols between Vietnam and Laos, will cut directly through the gibbon’s habitat. This could have catastrophic effects on this population, as the roads will fragment the habitat and provide access for illegal and harmful activities such as hunting and logging. Without protection this will inevitably lead to a decline in this last option for this species to exist in the wild in Vietnam.

Ben Rawson, regional primate expert for Conservation International, who has led the gibbon research project, explained: "We are extremely excited about this discovery.

Pu Mat was already important for its great diversity of species and for its benefits to the surrounding communities, and now it is a top priority for global gibbon conservation.”

Rawson continued, “The fact that we are excited about the discovery of only 130 groups of northern whitecheeked crested gibbons is indicative of the state of this species and crested gibbons generally; they are some of the most endangered species in the world. It’s important to remember though that conservation in Pu Mat National Park is vital not just for biodiversity, but for its benefits to people also as this is a watershed which provides water for 50,000 people vital for drinking and agriculture.”

Primatologist Luu Tuong Bach, a consultant to CI, who led field surveys, added: “‘We don’t think we can stop the roads, so the best solution is targeted gibbon protection in key areas for this population. The major issue will be the hunting of these gibbons that were previously protected by the harsh terrain; so gun control will be vital. Without direct protection in Pu Mat National Park, it is likely that Vietnam will lose this species in the near future.”

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |25|

Hanson responsibly sourced across whole business Hanson UK has been certified with the Responsible Sourcing of Materials (RSM) standard across all of its product lines.

Hanson’s cement range and its Regen™ ground granulated blastfurnace slag were the final products to receive BES 6001 (RSM) with a rating of ‘very good’. The company already has certification for asphalt, bricks, Thermalite blocks, ready-mixed concrete and aggregates.

Responsible sourcing is recognised within the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) and BRE Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM), counting towards the credits required to assess the code level of a building.

Martin Crow, Hanson UK’s head of sustainability, said: We are delighted that we have achieved the standard for all our product lines. It demonstrates to clients, specifiers, distributors and end-users our continuing commitment to high environmental and sustainability standards.”

The BRE Environmental and Sustainability Standard (BES) 6001: 2008 covers the environmental and social issues for organisational management and supply chain management, including all the processes from the origin of raw materials, through all stages of the manufacturing process to point of sale.

Lufthansa launches scheduled flights using biofuel Active climate protection: Lufthansa first airline worldwide to use biosynthetic kerosene in scheduled flight operations

ENWORKS NAMED GREEN NGO OF THE YEAR

ENWORKS, the leading provider of environmental business support to companies across the Northwest of England, has won gold at the BusinessGreen Leaders Award 2011 in London - The organisation was named NGO of the Year.

Judges were won over by ENWORKS hands on support for Northwest businesses that has helped to achieve nearly £3m savings within the year (with almost £1m requiring zero capital investment), plus over 10,000t of CO2e savings.

In the last twelve months ENWORKS identified more than 5,600 projects for improving resource efficiency in Northwest businesses with the potential of delivering annual cost savings of over £34m.

These environmental improvements have also helped businesses to safeguard or create over 60 jobs in the last 12 months and to retain/ secure sales contracts worth £1.3m.

Lufthansa has launched a six-month biofuel trial on regular Clive Memmott, Chair of ENWORKS and Chief scheduled flights. A Lufthansa Airbus A321 with the registration Executive of Greater Manchester Chamber D-AIDG will fly the Hamburg-Frankfurt-Hamburg route four times of Commerce comments: “This auspicious daily. One of its engines will run on a 50/50 mix of regular fuel award will act as an inspiration to ENWORKS. and biosynthetic kerosene. The biofuel for jet engines has been We believe in inspiring businesses to embrace approved by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). sustainability principles and are honoured that Since biokerosene has similar properties to those of conventional our dedication has been recognised by the kerosene it can be used for all aircraft types without any need for judges.” modifications to the aircraft or its engines. During the test run period, the use of biofuel will reduce CO2 emissions by up to 1,500 tonnes. The biosynthetic kerosene used by Lufthansa is derived from pure biomass (biomass to liquids – BtL) and consists of jatropha, camelina and animal fats. In the procurement of biofuel Lufthansa ensures that it originates from a sustainable supply and production process and that the production of its biofuel is not in direct competition with food production and that no rainforests are destroyed. Lufthansa puts the total costs of conducting the biofuel project at about 6.6 million Euros. The German Federal Ministry of Economics and Technology has awarded 2.5 million Euros in funding for this project, which is part of a larger project known as FAIR (Future Aircraft Research) set up to examine other issues besides the compatibility of biofuels, including new propulsion and aircraft concepts and other fuels such as liquefied natural gas (LNG). |26| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

“Lost” Amphibian Stages Amazing Reappearing Act in Borneo after Eluding Scientists for 87 years Herpetologists celebrate incredible rediscovery of one of the world's Top 10 “most wanted” lost amphibians in Malaysian Borneo; First-ever photos reveal long-legged Borneo Rainbow Toad One of the world’s most elusive amphibians has made a surprising reappearance recently in Malaysia’s Sarawak State, providing science with its first-ever photographs of the endangered spindly-legged species and new hope for the region’s biodiversity. Inspired by Conservation International’s (CI) Global Search for Lost Amphibians, scientists with support from University Malaysia Sarawak found three individuals of the missing toad, up a tree during a night time search after months of scouring remote forests.

The Sambas Stream Toad, or Bornean Rainbow Toad as it’s also called (Ansonia latidisca) was previously known from only three individuals, and was last seen in 1924 - the same year Vladimir Lenin died, and Greece declared itself a republic. Prior to the rediscovery, only illustrations of the mysterious and long-legged toad existed, after collection by European explorers in the 1920s.

Three individuals of the missing toad were documented up three different mature trees in an unspecified area of Penrissen, a region outside the protected area system of Sarawak that is listed among the Important Bird Areas of the world by BirdLife

International, and is threatened by resort development, poaching and habitat fragmentation.

They include: an adult female, an adult male, and a juvenile, ranging in size from 51 mm to 30 mm respectively. All three exhibited elongated limbs Because of this, scientists with CI and the International Union for and bright dorsal pigmentation. The species is Conservation of Nature (IUCN) SSC Amphibian Specialist Group listed as endangered in the IUCN Red List, and believed that chances of finding the species alive were slimmer may warrant protection under the Sarawak Wildlife than the toad's unusually slender limbs, so they listed it as one of Ordinance 1998. the 'World's Top 10 Most Wanted Lost Frogs', in a global campaign to seek out amphibians that had not been seen in a decade or Amphibian specialist Dr. Robin Moore of longer. They hoped that the campaign would inspire researchers Conservation International, who launched the around the world to employ local expertise to mobilize targeted Global Search for Lost Amphibians to raise searches. awareness of the serious plight of the world’s declining amphibian populations, expressed Initial searches by Dr. Das and team took place during evenings incredulous disbelief when Das shared the good after dark along the 1,329 m. high rugged ridges of the Gunung news.

Penrissen range of Western Sarawak, a natural boundary between Malaysia’s Sarawak State and Indonesia’s Kalimantan “When I saw an email with the subject ‘Ansonia Barat Province. The team’s first expeditions proved fruitless in latidisca found’ pop into my inbox I could barely their first several months, but the team did not give up. The area believe my eyes. Attached was an image - proof in had barely been explored in the past century, with no concerted the form of the first ever photograph of the colorful efforts to determine whether the species was still alive. So Das and gangly tree-dwelling toad. The species was changed his team’s strategy to include higher elevations and they transformed in my mind from a black and white resumed the search. And then one night, Mr. Pui Yong Min, one illustration to a living, colorful creature.” of Dr Das's graduate students found a small toad 2m up a tree.

Moore added, “To see the first ever pictures of a When he realized it was the long-lost toad, Dr. Das expressed species is a special kind of privilege. To see the relief and near disbelief at the discovery before his eyes. first pictures of a species that has been lost for “Thrilling discoveries like this beautiful toad, and the critical almost 90 years defies belief. It is good to know importance of amphibians to healthy ecosystems, are what that nature can surprise us when we are close fuel us to keep searching for lost species,” said Dr. Das. “They to giving up hope, especially amidst our planet’s remind us that nature still holds precious secrets that we are still escalating extinction crisis. Amphibians are at uncovering, which is why targeted protection and conservation is the forefront of this tragedy, so I hope that these so important. Amphibians are indicators of environmental health, unique species serve as flagships for conservation, with direct implications for human health. Their benefits to people inspiring pride and hope by Malaysians and people should not be underestimated.” everywhere.”

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |27|

MORE THAN 6,500 PEOPLE JOIN CAMPAIGN OPPOSING FACTORY PIG FARM IN U.K. Documentary filmmakers start petition on Change.org asking Derbyshire Planning Authority to vote against proposed, industrial-scale pig farm More than 6,500 people have signed an online petition asking the Derbyshire County Council to vote against a proposed factory pig farm in the village of Foston, Derbyshire. The campaign urges all U.K. residents to sign the petition on Change.org and register their opposition on the Derbyshire County Council’s Web site.

More than 7,500 people have spoken out against the factory farm on the County Council’s Web site.

“Cheap pork is flooding U.K. supermarket shelves from mainland Europe where, according to Compassion in World Farming (CIWF), 90 percent of the farms are not obeying European Union animal welfare legislation,” said Tracy Worcester, director of the documentary Pig Business. “Instead of trying to compete with these cheap imports by building mega farms with a few small improvements in terms of animal welfare and green credentials, our government should be ensuring that our small-scale family farms receive payments that reflect their benefits to society.”

The petition on Change.org, the world’s fastest-growing platform for social change, was started by the makers of Pig Business, a documentary that explores the health, animal welfare and environmental impacts of industrial-scale pig farms. If approved, Midland Pig Producers’ farm would become the third-largest factory farm in all of the U.K., housing more than 25,000 pigs and sending more than 1,000 to slaughter every week. Large-scale factory farms like the proposed operation are quite common throughout the United States, but are still relatively rare in the U.K. “If the Derbyshire County Council approves Midland Pig Producers’ operation, it would open the door for more factory farms in the U.K.,” said Sarah Parsons, Change.org’s Sustainable Food Editor. “The factory farm might bring big business to Midland Pig Producers, but it would devastate the area’s environment and residents’ quality of life.”

As Pig Business highlights, factory farm owners typically feed their animals a daily dose of antibiotics, spawning the growth of drug-resistant bacteria like MRSA ST398, a new disease which passes from pigs to humans.. These industrial-scale agricultural operations also pollute air and waterways, produce noxious odours, decrease property values in the surrounding areas and put small, ecologically minded producers out of business.

Many notable environmentalists and organizations like The Soil Association, local MP Heather Wheeler, and actor Dominic West have all publicly opposed a factory pig farm in Foston. A decision on the Midland Pig Producers’ agricultural operation will likely come as early as September.

|28| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Environmental Waste International Inc announced

that the TR900 Pilot Plant (TR900) has successfully completed a major milestone.

Recent testing of the TR900 resulted in the processing of 20 tyres and fully met EWS' expectations. This test demonstrated the technical viability of a production scaled TR900 system. The TR900 was able to process tyres and successfully separated the majority of the steel, recycled carbon, oil and hydrocarbon gases. The goal of this first processing was to validate the system's design and the EWS Reverse Polymerization(TM) process. This goal was achieved. EWS is testing samples of the recovered products to analyze their composition, to determine the efficiency of the separation process and to identify future improvements to the system. The Company is continuing to work on system programming and adjustments as it moves towards the next production milestone of using the tyre gas to fuel the power generation system. EWS is also focused on completing the work required to allow for continuous operation of the TR900 for extended periods of time.

EWS has also designed processors for the environmentally safe sterilization and disposal of medical, biological, liquid and food waste and for the recovery of usable by-products from other organic sources. EWS continues to explore other applications for its technology.

powerPerfector savings reach a billion kWh The UK’s fastest growing green company has reached a significant milestone, having saved its clients a billion kWh of energy. powerPerfector’s Voltage Power Optimisation (VPO)® saves energy, cost and carbon by optimising the incoming electrical supply voltage in commercial buildings.

A billion kWh is the energy saving equivalent to turning off the power to London for nine days, or a staggering 820 cups of tea for everybody in the UK. The company’s website features their unique ‘green gauge’, a client savings ticker which measures the benefit of VPO. Angus Robertson, CEO of powerPerfector, said: "The billion barrier outlines the pivotal role that energy efficiency can play in delivering a sustainable power supply in the future. We have saved our clients £85 million in energy spend to date, which in the current financial climate is of great benefit.”

Legioblock highly recommended by Roba Metals The UK sales manager for A Jansen B.V. and Legioblock first contacted Roba metals at the end of January 2011 and was invited to our new station in Alcester to view the building and take measurements. He then sent us detailed CAD drawings and a quotation within 48 hours of the site survey.

Despite "shopping around" and fierce competition we decided to place the order with the Legioblock product as the blocks were 800 mm wide as opposed to the competitions 600 mm wide blocks meaning that we could construct to greater heights without the need for buttresses to reinforce the walls. The stability was far greater and the blocks were readily available as the company keeps 10,000 blocks in stock at any one time. They were also the only company that we could source in the UK that will supply, deliver AND construct the blocks for us.

A Jansen B.V. was confident that they could complete the task within the deadline so we put them to the test. The end result is better than we could have possibly imagined. There is absolutely no comparison between the old style A frames or rocket walls which were often damaged beyond repair and constantly needed replacing.

The staff at A Jansen B.V. proved themselves to be professional and efficient. Roba Metals would not hesitate to recommend using the Legioblock system to any company looking to construct retaining walls. It was the right decision to call upon A Jansen B.V. to complete this project from start to finish.

confirming Tuesday evening on ll ca e th ed • Receiv OWEVER d won the order H ha V. B. en ns Ja that A eted by the needs to be compl the whole project day. following Mon (approx ce on Wednesday fi of ad he at ed • Order plac of blocks) 90 lorry loads s on site the and vehicle arrive • Crane engineer ads. with first lorry lo following day d finished h the weekend an • Worked throug ime.

Monday luncht met all delighted that we ly te lu so ab er m • Custo deadlines.

Why use Legioblock?

•

•

•

• •

•

Easily stacked and placed without the need of any fixing material. This way Legioblock constructions can be expanded or modified at any time.

No foundation required, a level and stable surface is the only requirement for the installation of the Legioblocks®.

Quick delivery (from stock) and quick construction (straight off the lorry) Excellent sound-proofing and fire resistant properties.

Standard measurements: 160 x 80 x 40cm, 160 x 80 x 80cm and 160 x 40 x 40cm. Within these ranges various additional sizes and finishes available Weight 160 x 80 x 40cm = 1.200 kg

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |29|

Manitou UK formalise new Strategy for Gehl products in UK & Ireland Manitou Uk of Verwood, Dorset is now fully responsible for the marketing of the Gehl product range in the UK and Ireland. The Gehl skid steer loaders, articulated loaders and tracked dumpers are top quality machinery for the construction and agricultural sectors. Gehl are now fully assimilated into the Manitou Group following the acquisition in 2008 and complement the Manitou materials handling and powered access equipment. The sales, marketing and after sales service and parts in UK and Ireland will now be the responsibility of Manitou UK Limited from the subsidiary’s head office at Verwood.

Ivor Binns, Chief Executive Office of Manitou UK commented: “We have adopted a robust approach to create a new dealer distribution network in the UK and Ireland to maximize the sales potential of the Gehl product, which is well respected in the marketplace for its reliability and performance. We have got the best of both worlds as we have appointed existing Manitou dealers as Gehl dealers and retained the strongest Gehl dealers who have specialist knowledge of the Gehl machinery”

Fire damage destroys learners’ dreams of an Eco-Friendly garden

our learners have put into the allotment has been destroyed by such a pointless and callous act of vandalism.’

In the early hours of Monday 18 July an allotment plot, which Horticulture lecturer Gary Halford said, “Both staff is used by Leicester College students and has an ecoand students are really upset by what has happened, friendly greenhouse, was badly damaged by vandals. as a great deal of hard work and effort has gone into the allotment project. However, we are determined to The attack came as shock to Lecturer Gary Halford and continue the work as our students gain so much from learners who have spent the last three years working to turn the experiences and practical skills learned.” an unused area into a working garden with a shed and an eco-friendly greenhouse made from 1,000 plastic bottles.

Groby Road allotments have suffered vandalism in the past with minor damage and equipment stolen. On this occasion the Leicester College plot was targeted and suffered irreparable fire damage to the garden shed and significant damage to the eco-friendly greenhouse. The allotment is used by students with learning difficulties to build their confidence and develop their skill levels. Students have learnt how to plan a garden and to grow a range of produce including soft fruit and vegetables. The crops and fruit produced at the allotment are then used by catering students.

Learners were also taught how to build their own woodwork structures and after a year of planning, the shed they constructed has now been completely destroyed by fire.

Principal Maggie Galliers said: ‘This is very distressing for everyone involved. It is such a shame that all the work |30| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

FareShare North West take leap to help end food poverty in the North West

Over 100 people leapt off the Imperial War Museum North to support those in need on Saturday 16th July. The Zip Slide was from the 30m high tower, 250m across the Ship Canal and Salford Quays landing at the Lowry.

Lucy Danger – CEO of EMERGE 3Rs and Nicola Milner—EMERGE Volunteer Coordinator sported banana outfits in keeping with the ‘no good food should go to waste’ theme. EMERGE runs FareShare North West; over 10 colleagues also made the leap in aid of the charity.

At the event there were tasty “Love Food Hate Waste” themed cookery demonstrations by Robert Owen Brown (Head Chef, Mark Addy) – who cooked up Tripe, Bone Marrow, Black Pudding and Wood Pigeon; Dave Lythall (Head Chef, Lime) – cooked Sea Bass on Potato and Black Pudding; and representatives from Cracking Good Food – a local charity promoting healthy sustainable eating cooked Risotto and Curry, Lucy Danger commented: “Diverting edible food from landfill and helping to alleviate food poverty is a nobrainer! We’ve run the Zip Slide Challenge to give people an opportunity to have fun whilst helping us to do more to help those in food poverty locally”. Fareshare North West has redistributed over 650 tonnes of food since 2008 contributing to 1.5 million meals for those in need in our region.

Many members of the public, organisations and businesses signed up to Zip slide, including Manchester’s famous pub-restaurant The Mark Addy and Lime on Salford Quays as they concur that FareShare addresses two of the UK’s most urgent issues: waste and food poverty.

Robert Owen Brown, Head Chef of The Mark Addy said: “It’s nonsensical. But the fact is, perfectly good food ends up going in the bin when it doesn’t need to and something needs to be done about it”.

supporting FareShare and raising awareness of what this fantastic charity does, I’m just doing my little bit – everyone should!”

Many communities in the North West have high levels of unemployment and low-income households. Manchester has the highest child poverty statistics with 27%, followed

by Liverpool with 23% and Blackpool with 22%. Dietrelated health problems are responsible for around 10% of deaths in the UK each year. This costs the NHS an estimated £6 billion every year.

Organisations such as Cornerstones providing hot meals to people on very low incomes in Moss Side, Mustard Tree who operate a soup run for the homeless and the George House Trust who help refugees, are typical beneficiaries of FareShare. Other examples include hostels, school breakfast and after school clubs in deprived areas, day centres for the sick, elderly and infirm, organisations helping the vulnerable and those in poverty.

For more info: www.emergemanchester.co.uk

“Being a chef you’re on the front line of food wastage.”

Rob explains, “We’ve all been guilty of it, but by ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |31|

TALES FROM THE Crowcon appoints Mike Ophield as Managing Director Crowcon Detection Instruments has appointed Mike Ophield as its new Managing Director. He takes over from Warren Rees who will be retiring at the end of September 2011.

“This is an exciting time of growth for Crowcon and I believe that my extensive experience in sales, marketing and leading companies will help take Crowcon to a new level,” commented Mike.

BSS industrial names top salesperson for 2011 at an annual award ceremony for its business managers. Stuart Holland crowned as the top performing salesperson of 2011.

Stuart was recognised for his excellent levels of customer service throughout the London and south east area.

Closed Loop Recycling, has scooped a major industry award at the National Recycling Awards. Judges said that the company had “come of age”. The UK’s leading plastic food grade recycler won the Recycling and Waste Management Business category, which recognises business growth, customer service, excellence and innovation.

SLR Consulting has expanded its planning capabilities across the island of Ireland with the appointment of Technical Director Paul Mc Ternan (left), who will work at the Belfast office, and Associate Aislinn O’Brien (right), who will work at the Dublin office. |32| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Paul Harris (right) and Nigel Croad (left) have joined the leading plastics manufacturer, Iplas Mr Harris’ role will be stimulating sales of Zyplex, maintenance-free, engineered, blended polymers, while Mr Croad will be working with distributors to ensure new products will be specified.

SWR, has appointed Joe Rudd as its new Head of Sales as part of the firm’s strategy to continue its industry leading growth in terms of revenue, skill and expertise.

Joe brings more than 13 years experience in the waste and recycling industry to the role,

International management consultancy Happold Consulting is expanding its team and client proposition significantly with the appointment of Dr Jim Coleman to the new role of Head of Economics based in their London office.

Dr Coleman’s appointment consolidates the consultancy’s ability to provide accurate, in-depth analysis and a fully holistic approach to solving complex developmental issues in both UK and international urban environments.

JCB Deputy Chairman John Patterson has been made a Commander of the Most Excellent Order of the British Empire (CBE) in the Queen’s Birthday Honours.

The honour has been awarded to Mr Patterson in recognition of his services to British business development worldwide.

WATERCOOLER....

Environmental geologist gains top cyanide audit accreditation Christine Blackmore, a principal environmental geologist with engineering and environmental consultancy Wardell Armstrong International, has just become one of only a handful of people in the UK – and one of less than a hundred in the world – to be personally accredited as a lead cyanide auditor by the International Cyanide Management Institute (ICMI).

It’s not a job for the faint-hearted. Cyanide is one of the most highly toxic and potentially lethal substances known to man. So making sure that it’s stored, transported and handled safely is extremely important to prevent human and environmental exposure.

Environment Agency lawyer wins MBE An Environment Agency prosecutions team leader, Angus Innes, has received an MBE in the Queen’s Birthday Honours List for services to “the prevention of environmental crime”.

Angus was very surprised to hear that he had received the prestigious award - one of the highest honours a civilian in Great Britain can obtain.

Prestigious award for carbon capture expert A Nottingham academic has received one of the Royal Society of Chemistry’s most prestigious awards in recognition of her work to fight climate change.

Professor Mercedes Maroto-Valer, an engineer at The University of Nottingham, has received the 2011 Environment, Sustainability and Energy Award from the Royal Society of Chemistry (RSC).

Nestlé has been named the winner of the Stockholm Industry Water Award for its leadership and performance to improve water management in its internal operations and throughout its supply chain.

The Award Committee also recognised Nestlé’s work to improve the water management of its suppliers, which includes over 25 million people who are involved in its entire value chain. Nestlé employs 1,000 agronomists and water experts, who work directly with farmers to help them reduce their water requirements, increase crop yields, and minimise pollution.

The honourary award will be presented to the chairman of Nestlé SA, P. Brabeck-Letmathe, at a ceremony on August 24 during the 2011 World Water Week in Stockholm.

Nestlé is the largest food and nutrition company in the world, employing around 280 000 people in over 100 countries. Over the past decade, Nestlé has reduced the total water withdrawals by over 30 percent, more than doubled the water efficiency of their internal operations and made significant reductions in the quantity of wastewater discharged into the environment.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |33|

ON WORLD CUPS, WHALING AND WAFFLE In the week when Mohamed bin Hamman was banned from football for life by FIFA (as tempting a mnemonic as ever there was…) for various and sundry skulduggeries, we learn that the International Whaling Commission’s 2011 forum ended in a walk-out by the pro-whaling nations.

In one body, a guy flies around buying votes and in the other, a guy flies around buying votes. Or more accurately, threatening to deny aid. Allegedly, that is. This is so that the Japanese can continue with an essential and ongoing study of whales which requires that hundreds are hunted and slaughtered each year.

When one considers that Eritrea is a member of the Commission, as are Togo, Benin, the Congo and landlocked Mali – you can see how a nation such as Japan could get quite a few votes together. If they had a mind to, that is.

Now you might think that a walk-out is the kind of action a responsible delegation might take if something absolutely fundamental was being proposed – such as an end to the shabby and transparent pretence of ‘scientific purposes’, or even a ban on all commercial whaling.

Not a bit of it.

They walked out in a no-doubt pre-agreed huff because of a proposal for a new sanctuary in the South Atlantic put forward by Brazil and Argentina. OK, said they. We can’t stop you whaling, but can we at least have another area where they can be left in peace to breed? After all – it means more whales for your scientific study.

There’s another whale sanctuary in the Antarctic, but the Japanese take no notice of it whatsoever, so the hypocrisy involved is breathtaking.

Then, not too far from the IWC’s meeting in Guernsey, the European Commission (I’m developing a deepseated mistrust of that word) had a superb opportunity to sort out the fish stocks of European waters. There was broad support for change, widespread condemnation of ‘discarding’ conditions were reasonably fair for Europe to set a whole new course. So did they? Not a bit of it.

Well – OK – perhaps a bit of it, and there is some good news in that they have at last acknowledged the issue.

Discarding will be ‘phased out’. Not stopped, or banned, outlawed, discontinued or otherwise ceased, but ‘phased out’. The proposals are to ensure catches are within levels that can produce the ‘maximum sustainable yields’ by 2015. Note the language used – not within levels that will protect the species in the long term, but which ‘will produce the maximum sustainable yields’. (Think about it – because they certainly have.) I shall endeavour to translate…

‘Implement an ‘eco-system based approach’ to limit the impact of fishing.’

We agree that we need to limit the impact of fishing, so we shall set up a body –no doubt a ‘commission’ - to look at ways whereby we might develop, in the fullness of time and with full consultation, an eco-system based approach.

Reduce fleet overcapacity through market measures rather than subsidies. We will do nothing at all to reduce the fleet overcapacity which we have encouraged over the last 28 years.

Develop alternative types of fish management techniques.

I have no idea what that means. Suggestions by email, please.

But there is some good news.

The Japanese public are waking up to the fact that their government and authorities are somewhat less than perfect, and even capable of misleading them. When polled on the subject of whaling in the sanctuary and the fact that their tax Yen was subsidising it, the majority said they didn’t support it and 26% thought Japan should stop whaling altogether. Whalemeat sales have fallen by over 30% over the year to January 2011, according to Greenpeace who exposed corruption in the industry resulting in public apologies and ‘disciplinary action’.

As contestants in ‘Endurance’, perhaps? |34| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

EU Maritime and Fisheries Commissioner, Maria Damaniki, said “I want to decentralise... the choice of instrument, or instruments’ mix, is up to member states, co-operating at regional level” I’m buggered if we know how to sort this out, so we’ll simply hand it back and they can get on with it themselves.

Meanwhile of course, the fish stocks continue to decline. steve@stephenmgrant.com

FOCUS: SUSTAINABLE

CITIES Page 37 - 39 - The Noble Savage Turns Urbanite - James Moore, Ph.D., Senior Vice President, HDR Inc. and Emma Stewart, Ph.D., Senior Manager of AEC Sustainability, Autodesk Page 40 - 41 - Partnership and Collaboration: Building a Model for Sustainable Cities - Dave Morgan, Head of Cities, E.ON Sustainable Energy Business Page 42 - 43 - Sustainability and the City - Marco Marijewycz, Advocacy and Stakeholder Manager, E.ON

The Noble Savage Turns Urbanite -- Cities as a route to environmental and economic recovery

By James Moore, Ph.D., Senior Vice President, HDR Inc. and Emma Stewart, Ph.D., Senior Manager of AEC Sustainability, Autodesk

We are now an urban species. For the first time in human history, over 50% of humanity lives in cities and, by all accounts, this percentage will only continue to grow. McKinsey & Co estimates that, by the year 2030, the urban population will have grown from 3.5 to 5 billion people. India and China will experience particularly strong urbanization, with 500 million Indians and Chinese inhabiting urban areas by that year. Edward Glaeser observes that “the real city is made of flesh, not concrete.” Cities are more than merely buildings and infrastructure. They are exciting hubs -- centers of economic growth, innovation and social interaction.

Historically, people have come to cities for opportunities; including jobs, education, culture, and an increased standards of living and quality of life. And such increases are desperately needed. According to the United Nations, nearly two thirds of the world population lives below the “threshold for high human development.” At the same time, the other one-third, primarily the so-called “industrialized” countries, have achieved a relatively high standard of living, yet this is generally accompanied by high consumption of energy and other natural resources.

So the challenge for industrialized countries is to maintain - if not increase - their overall quality of life while, at the same time, reducing the per capita and total demand for nonrenewable resources. The challenge for developing counties is to radically improve the quality of life of their citizens without substantially increasing the per capita and total consumption of non-renewable resources. With respect to this challenge, cities are simultaneously part of the solution and part of the problem.

Part of the Solution In social terms, the move to cities has historically represented an overall improvement in the quality of life over rural conditions. As societies urbanize, their ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |37|

reproduction rates tend to drop and their population becomes better educated, leading to better health statistics from birth all the way to old age.

In resource terms, cities have historically represented an opportunity to do more with less. Urban density leads to efficiencies of scale - economic growth can be produced with less land and basic needs such as food, water, shelter and security can be provided through networks, rather than generated in isolation.

Part of the Problem A transition to urban living does not necessarily lead to more positive outcomes. In social terms, those living in cities in the developing world are often particularly vulnerable to health, security, and environmental risks, with one out of three people living in slums. In industrialized countries, the flight of the wealthy urbanite to the suburbs has led to urban blight in numerous city centers.

In resource terms, cities represent the majority of humankind’s energy and natural resources consumption.

Now home to half the world’s population, today’s cities represent roughly 60-80% of the world’s energy consumption according to Pike Research.

Of course, there is a great deal of variation between cities on this front. European cities such as Copenhagen and Amsterdam which are generally lauded for their high quality of life, consume much less energy per capita than cities in the United States, Canada or Australia. One ingredient in this discrepancy is due to simple geography – some cities can more easily rely on hydropower, wind and solar due to their location. However, much of the variation between cities is not ‘locational’ but rather ‘organizational’ -- choices made by residents and their elected officials regarding the form and operation of their city.

The Role of Technology While the challenges of the urban way of life continue to grow more complex, our knowledge of how cities actually work, our understanding of the amazing complexity of urban systems, and the technologies for planning, designing, developing and running more effective and efficient cities is also developing. Miniaturized sensors now allow us to gather data about almost every aspect of day-to-day urban operations: how efficient water flows through pipes, where there is traffic congestion, the quality of air in a particular location, or whether an asphalt roadbed is wearing out. The list is extensive and growing rapidly. Simultaneously, the capacity to collect, analyze and respond to these data is also advancing, building on tried-and -tested wireless technologies and emerging cloud computing. We now have the ability to visualize complex urban systems on a computer before these systems are constructed; and we can optimize them, not only for construction efficiency but for subsequent operations to continue to advance. The |38| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

application of building information modeling (BIM) to entire segments of urban areas – city information modeling—enables us to visualize the construction of multiple complex horizontal and vertical systems in real-time 3-D, project this into the future (4-D), and incorporate myriad levels of information and data, including financial implications (5-D).

Application of these new technologies and approaches is particularly relevant to the world’s coastal cities. As we experience climate change’s effects, urban areas will need to plan well in advance for the effects of catastrophic storms and sea level rise. Meanwhile, the impacts on agricultural yields will require more efficient and nimble supply chains to feed growing urban centers.

What is Required?

To truly take advantage of humankind’s shift to urban living, we view the following steps as requisite.

1. Clarify what is meant by the term “sustainable city” so that urban planners can utilize the tools they already have to deliver these “cities of the future” (e.g., master planning, siting, permitting, and incentives). [We submit that one of these future cities, a truly sustainable city is one that, at a minimum, is managed as a “system of systems.” It integrates with its regional environmental context, includes resource and energy efficient buildings, emphasizes redevelopment, urban infill, and multimodal transit-oriented development, creates minimal water pollution and solid waste, makes affordable clean energy available through efficient siting and distribution, and provides a high quality of life for all its citizens.]

2. Define key performance metrics for new developments, integrating cultural and historic concerns for contextual appropriateness with the need to be increasingly resource efficient. Data are evermore available to measure and monitor performance of buildings, infrastructure and entire communities.

Appropriate indicators are necessary to measure what is important, relevant metrics are needed to make sure we’re actually measuring what matters, and achievable benchmarks to ensure we’re making progress to improve performance.

3. Dramatically increase the sentient nature of our cities, both increasing the availability of bottom-up data and structuring these data as relevant and perceivable feedback loops. We tend to take seriously that which we measure, and the more we measure the more information we can access as to relative performance and optimization. As we measure, we must adjust our systems and ways of life to adhere to what the data tell us, even if that means a radical shift in the ways things have been done.

4. Ensure “full cost pricing” for goods, through both regulatory and commercial methods. The price for a resource, particularly a non-renewable resource, needs

to include not only the direct costs of production, but all of the associated costs. For example, the cost of a gallon of gasoline should include the health costs associated with air pollution, the societal costs associated with car crashes, the environmental costs associated the extraction processes as well as with the construction of roads, the impacts of associated storm-water runoff and so forth.

5. Focus more effort on rebuilding infrastructure within existing urban environments, rather than building new cities out of whole cloth. This takes advantage of the embodied energy, resources and knowledge represented by these historic settlements, but will also require quicker and cheaper ways of truly understanding the structure and function of our current cities, through emerging tools like laser scanning and satellite imagery.

6. Develop and mandate financing mechanisms that emphasize the full lifecycle costs of projects (perhaps over 50-75 years) and give preference to those that put less burden on our future generations, rather than simply those that have the lowest upfront cost. Morgan Stanley estimates that $41 trillion must be spent between now and 2030 in water, power, road and rail, and air/ seaports, just to serve the growing global population.

Unfortunately, with the exception of China, we do not see evidence of the requisite investments being made. And, even in China, where hundreds of cities have labeled themselves “eco-cities” over the past few years, only Tianjin seems on track to meet its sustainability goals.

7. Reverse the balkanizing tendencies of both public and private bureaucracies, and promote holistic integrated community planning that looks at multiple assets at once (like transit systems and their relationship to utility grids) rather than focus on single assets like a rail line. This will

require that we overcome the ‘silo-ing’ of responsibilities and disciplines, perhaps using communications, visioning and visualization design technologies as key tools for encouraging collaboration.

8. Future-proof urban plans to increase the resilience and adaptability of a city in the face of unforeseen circumstances. Advances in conceptual urban planning design will allow urban planners to model multiple scenarios, adjusting their assumptions to assess the resilience of their current plan to changes in resource availability and demand, a changing climate, and demographic shifts.

9. Finally, we must never lose sight of the qualitative aspects of urbanism that make cities so delightful, so invigorating, and so desirable as places to live. It’s not enough that a city be energy conserving; it must also be stimulating. It’s not enough to use resources efficiently; the resulting community must be a vibrant, joyous place to live, work and play.

After thousands of years learning how to live on the Earth, humankind has determined that our future is in our cities. To ensure a long, productive and harmonious future for all people, we must learn to plan, design, develop and run our cities as effectively and efficiently as possible, while maintaining their roles as the centers of commerce and culture and learning. They should provide inspiration for the arts, be sources of opportunity for leisure-time pursuits, and offer an allencompassing environment that elevates and refines our lives, as individuals and as a collective. The software and hardware technologies and best practices to achieve all this are at hand. Future urbanites will appreciate our responsible forward thinking and stewardship.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |39|

Partnership and collaboration: building a model for sustainable cities The private and public sectors can no longer work independently if we are to create a greener future for our urban communities, writes Dave Morgan (Right), Head of Cities in E.ON's Sustainable Energy business The world’s cities are currently experiencing exponential growth. According to the United Nations Population Fund, “the world is undergoing the largest wave of urban growth in history”: more than half of the world’s population is now living in towns and cities and this number is due to increase to 5 billion by 2030.

In the UK cities still manage to grow against a backdrop of severe national debt, rising unemployment and cuts to public sector services. As the effects of austere times continue to bite, the UK’s urban planners and developers have recognised a real need to lower carbon, reduce fuel poverty and bring affordable, secure energy supply to homes and businesses. Cities across the UK are now required to reduce emissions and improve their energy infrastructure by 2020 – as part of the UK’s commitment to a 34% reduction overall in greenhouse gases in the 2008 Climate Change Act. Britain’s energy industry, those who generate it and those who use it, is entering a period of great change. With targets to be met on fuel use and carbon reduction, local authorities are beginning to take on greater responsibility for reducing the nation’s reliance on fossil fuels through increased generation of renewable heat and power and the rollout of energy efficiency programmes.

But how can these commitments be fulfilled when there is such a dearth of available funds to invest in energy initiatives?

Enabling sustainable growth through partnership In the past the public and private sectors have sometimes operated on the basis of a pseudo “poker game” |40| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

both keeping their cards close to their chests and communicating via tenders and PQQs – both trying to second guess what the other party needs and wants.

It is imperative that this model changes to one of partnership, one of shared expertise and knowledge, so we can come up with sustainable solutions to the real problems we face. This is easy to say but it requires cooperation and understanding from all stakeholders, not just from those who are directly involved. For this reason E.ON is partnering with a coalition of willing UK local authorities to develop a model of a Sustainable City that can be rolled out nationwide.

This model was born from E.ON's involvement in street lighting PFIs. At the time we were tendering for £150m, 25-year contracts to replace, operate and maintain street lights, which are critical to the safe and efficient operation of a city. Energy efficiency measures like remote monitoring, dimming and trimming lighting profiles and LED lights are all part of that efficiency and cost saving. But over and above the pure logistics and technical aspects of lighting, as a long-term strategic partner we identified a need to add value to the communities we were working in.

This is where we became involved in using resources to form a community hub; to invest in schools programmes, aiming to educate children on energy efficiency and generation and work alongside the local community to create jobs and encourage sustainable living. From this the Sustainable City partnership concept was born, moving us from a transactional relationship with a public body towards a much more collaborative partnership.

Partnership in action: Stoke-on-Trent For these partnerships to work, private sector companies should start to think more strategically and look to work as trusted energy partners. Local authorities need to become closer to the private sector to plan infrastructure that will allow sustainable city projects to become a reality. Installing technology such as district heating or solar panels is certainly a powerful step in the right direction – but to deliver the most robust solutions it’s vital that businesses and developers create anchor heat loads which will make such projects commercially viable. Forward-thinking cities like Coventry, Sheffield and Stoke-on-Trent are ahead of the game and have already started to form public-private low carbon task forces that will allow us to share expertise and build on opportunities.

achieving our vision of a ‘Sustainable City’. Schemes like this – working on the ground today – will pave the way for the massive energy efficiency drive that the Government promised to “ruthlessly prioritise” in the Comprehensive Spending Review.

Now more and more councils are realising the same benefits and are following this course. We all need to play our part because there is no single measure the Government can take to ensure we keep energy affordable, reliable and low carbon. As more councils start to embrace the idea and look to create their own version of a Sustainable City, the UK will be in a better position to meet the energy and carbon reduction targets we’ve been set.

In its aim to create the UK’s first truly sustainable city, the city council of Stoke-on-Trent has formed a Low Carbon Regeneration Task Force, with E.ON as a founding member, which aims to deliver millions of pounds of investment to the city whilst reducing its carbon footprint and improving the lives of its people.

As part of this project, E.ON is installing PV panels onto 1,000 council homes via its ‘rent-a–roof’ scheme.

E.ON installs, operates and maintains the panels free of charge, the council gets an annual rental fee for each roof and tenants receive the electricity generated free of charge, saving up to one third on their annual bills.

In return, E.ON takes advantage of the Feed-in Tariff payment over the long term to fund the project.

And we’re also bringing our expertise on a wider scale, investigating the potential for the injection of bio-methane to provide more renewable energy into the gas- grid, air source heat pumps to provide renewable heating and a district heating system to make the most efficient use of the city’s existing infrastructure such as waste-to-energy plans and combined heat and power plants.

Working to support the cities of tomorrow By working at city level, private organisations like E.ON can make a real impact on providing cleaner and better energy. It gives us the opportunity to work with individuals, businesses and the community to help them to become energy fit, by moderating their energy use, insulating their properties and generating power using renewable technologies. Focusing on key forward thinking cities means we can make a real difference as we can sit alongside public sector task forces to provide expert advice on energy projects – that will put people in command of the energy they use.

We firmly believe that working closely with local authorities, such as Stoke-on-Trent City Council, is key to changing the way people view and use energy and ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |41|

Marco Marijewycz, Advocacy and Stakeholder Manager, E.ON. E.ON are a member of the UK Green Building Council.

Sustainability and the City

ytiC eht dna ytilibaniatsuS

|42| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Talk to anyone in a country pub and inform them that you live in a ‘city’ and you can probably expect a range of reactions from ‘how do you like the air’ through to ‘how do you cope with the traffic’ and ‘do you live near any good restaurants’. As a Londoner I have experienced many of these reactions. London, for many is a bit of a divisive word. A bit like Marmite, you either love it or hate it. Although, looking at London today in terms of its size and energy intensity could possibly provide us with a glimpse into the future of the form that many other UK cities may take. In many ways London can be described not as just a city, but a ‘mega-city’. However, an expanding number of UK and world cities face significant energy related challenges now and in the future. One of the most fundamental challenges is how, and in what form, should the energy infrastructure designed to serve a growing population be configured in order to provide sustainable energy supplies?

The rapid urbanisation of the world population is already in train and will be a widespread trend during the next decade. In fact, the World Energy Council predicts that in the next 20 years, the equivalent of seven cities with ten million people will be added every year. Furthermore, as the International Energy Agency points out in their 2010 edition of World Energy Outlook, in 2009 for the first time in history, the world’s urban population was larger than the rural population. The population living in urban areas is projected to grow by 1.9 billion, passing from 3.3 billion in 2008 to 5.2 billion 2035, with most of this increase occurring in non-OECD countries. Most of this growth occurs in cities. Now whlist one’s immediate reaction could be ‘well that’s just going to be down China, Brazil, India etc… isn’t it, so what does that have to do with me living in the UK’?, the growth of megacities not only presents Green House Gas emission challenges, but more importantly it puts a strain on resources. Indeed, it has been postulated by some that if every country in the world were as resource hungry as the USA, we would need three planet Earths worth of resources to meet our needs. It is therefore widely expected that the rapid urbanisation of our populations will push up demand for modern energy services, which are commonly more readily available in towns and cities. However, amid this projected growth in the number of mega-cities, ensuring that access to modern energy for poor urban and rural households will remain an increasingly urgent and pressing challenge.

Therefore, bringing this back to the UK and our own energy and climate change challenges, as our cities grow we not only need to ensure that they do so in a way which is climate friendly and low carbon, but also utilising our resources more efficiently at a community scale. However, making more efficient use of the low carbon/renewable resources which our kingdom is blessed with will require us to think differently about how we design and deploy the infrastructure that serves our conurbations. In simple terms we need to become more integrated in our thinking. We need to look for

ways to unlock synergies between different forms of infrastructure, such as the waste we produce, and the energy we require. Such thinking is not new, in fact cities like Copenhagen and Malmo already link waste management to energy generation, using district heating as an energy carrier. Although, integrating infrastructure is not just about waste and energy, it is important that we consider another key resource – water – something which will become increasingly more precious in the future as populations grow. Finally, overlaying the ICT infrastructure that is required to truly turn Britain into a digital economy, and smarten the relationship between our buildings and the energy generators that supply them (aided by smart metering), is another element of an integrated infrastructure mix. Again this approach is being taken forward in other parts of the world such as in Abu Dhabi in a city called Masdar where a range of innovative approaches are being employed to create a smart, sustainable city.

Sounds great, obvious even, but there is some bad news.

There are some barriers. But there is some good news too. We know where they exist. Indeed a joint task group instigated between the UK Green Building Council (UK-GBC) and the Zero Carbon Hub reported in 2010 on the barriers facing the socially equitable deployment of low carbon, sustainable community infrastructure that linked water, waste, energy and ICT infrastructure as a ‘smart’ package. A key theme that ran through the Task Group’s report is the important role that local authorities can play as an integrating hub, facilitating public/private partnerships with a vision embedded in an ‘opportunity centric’ Local Plan. At a city level, local authorities have a range of options and opportunities available to them to reduce green house gas (GHG) emissions, and create a sustainable infrastructure legacy. For example, they can target emissions over which they have direct control as an organisational entity (e.g. energy used in public buildings, public transport etc…) and use these assets as a basis from which to drive a community wide green revolution, by organically growing an integrated city wide infrastructure. Therefore, put simply, they can use their capacities and policy levers to reduce GHG emissions stemming from those socio-economic activities over which they have an administrative influence. Examples of such areas of local policy influence include land use zoning, natural resource management, building efficiency, waste and water services.

However, even where a local authority has established a vision and has identified and organised the levers it will tug on, to create a suitable planning environment for integrated community infrastructure schemes, a further stumbling block lies in the middle of the greener road ahead. This obstacle relates to the current lack of standardised legal arrangements The lack of standard off-the-shelf legal arrangements means that a well intentioned, strongly supported sustainable infrastructure proposition fails to get off the drawing board and into the ground because of the sheer scale of the costs and

bureaucracy associated with establishing a set of legal arrangements for utility suppliers and project partners to sign up to. Trying to address this issue is a second joint UK-GBC and Zero Carbon Hub task group , which has been formed to bring together a range of legal experts from across the UK-GBC’s membership base to identify the legal issues that need to be overcome to make sustainable community infrastructure a practical reality.

This task group delivered its interim findings in May 2011 with its final report expected in January 2012.

But finally, it is impossible to steer away from the elephant in the room which in most instances is the biggest thing that stands in the way of the deployment of sustainable community/city infrastructure – cold, hard, cash. In a time of fiscal constraints, many local authorities simply lack the funds to deploy ambitious integrated infrastructure programmes to curb emissions and facilitate sustainable growth. Their ability to invest is therefore a key constraint, but there is an opportunity on the horizon which could provide the answer. In July 2011, the Zero Carbon Hub launched its report on Allowable Solutions for New Homes – Towards a workable framework . This report focused on how carbon emission offset payments made by developers from 2016 to reach the ‘zero carbon standard’, could be partnered with senior debt finance and project sponsor equity within either Community Energy Funds or Private Energy Funds. Applying a simple leveraging principle, the report explores a proposed framework which could transform £190m of developer payments into over £1bn of annual funding for carbon saving projects, such as sustainable community infrastructure. This could prove a valuable financing vehicle for local authorities with both the vision and opportunities to develop and grow sustainable community infrastructure packages which in time could be expanded to green an entire city.

So, what of ‘sustainability and the city’? Well let’s look at the facts: (a) we know that a long term trend is that cities will become larger, more densely populated and hungrier for energy; (b) we know that we need to curb emissions and use our resources more efficiently. These facts point to the need for a vision for cities today that creates an infrastructure platform which improves the energy fitness of its communities today, but is both fit for purpose for a ‘megacity’ of tomorrow. Yes there are barriers, yes there are challenges, but not addressing them is not really going to be all that acceptable for future generations who will ask why we didn’t before our cities got too big.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |43|

TIMBER Page 46 - 55 - Timber Expo Show Preview Page 56 - 58 - Trust in Timber - Alun Watkins, PEFC Page 60 - 61 - Sustainability On A Red Grandis速 Scale - Simon Fineman, Ceo Timbmet

|44| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Image: B & K Structures – sharing lessons learned for timber.

Rupert Scott, Marketing Manager of TRADA Technology, explains why Timber Expo 2011 will be the ideal platform to showcase a multi-faceted product which has come of age.

Using timber as a major material on almost any project provides the greatest scope for truly outstanding design.

Its inherent properties ensure good thermal and acoustic performance and, if correctly specified and designed, timber and engineered wood products provide strength where needed –and endless inspiration, both for new build, restoration and refurbishment. As the world’s only truly renewable construction material, it has a special place in the built environment of the future.

Timber Expo, to take place at the Ricoh Arena in Coventry on 27th and 28th September 2011, will create a platform to enhance the profile of timber, gathering together forward-thinking companies, timber commentators and |46| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

business leaders, linking suppliers with specifiers and end users.

And the show has an energy all of its own. Autumn is a key buying time for decision-makers and exhibitions have ‘awesome power’ as a marketing tool. As Austen Hawkins of the Association of Events Organisers told delegates at the Timber Expo exhibitor briefing day earlier this year, ‘Exhibitions are powerful because they are a face-to-face medium, enabling you to converse with customers rather than simply communicating a one-way sales message.’

We understand that in today’s industry individuals want value for money – but they also want to spend their time wisely. Timber Expo will satisfy both needs. Designed to be more than just an exhibition, it will also provide an opportunity for dialogue, for networking, for learning and for inspiration. Its clear aims have appealed to more than 100 manufacturers and suppliers who have already

The company is committed to promoting modern methods of construction through research and development and has invested in new plants, new partnerships and new technology to stay at the forefront of this fast-moving industry.

Major sponsor is the American Hardwood Export Council (AHEC), representing US exporters and all the major US hardwood production trade associations. Its raison d’être is to promote American hardwoods to end users, including architects, designers, engineers and manufacturers around the world, offering practical information for specification and design.

Image: Waingels College by CarbonEng is the UK’s largest solid timber educational building. Photograph Hufton & Crow.

signed up as exhibitors, as well as leading trade bodies, engineers and service providers. Among those who have pledged their support and sponsorship are the Timber Trade Federation, the Builders Merchants Federation, WWF, the American Hardwood Export Council, PEFC (with the Malaysian Timber Council), American Softwoods, Wood for Good (supported by the Forestry Commission) and the Wood Awards.

Exhibitor profile Even a thumbnail sketch of Timber Expo’s leading sponsors reveals what this powerful industry has to offer.

International Timber and sister company Pasquill Timber Engineering are Platinum Sponsors. International Timber is the UK’s largest distributor of timber and has a global supply network to supply the merchant, timber frame, joinery, construction and manufacturing sectors throughout the UK. Its product offering includes softwoods, hardwoods, panel products and engineered timber components. The company is also a specialist in new modified woods such as Thermowood and Accoya.

Central to International Timber’s operating ethos is sustainability and during the past 12 months it has sought to increase its sustainable product range, drive the use of sustainable timber in the construction industry and improve its own environmental performance.

Specialist in engineered timber solutions, Pasquill offers a wide range of innovative systems for roof and floors. |48| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

AHEC are giving out their own clear message about sustainability. The US is proud of its forest management, with regular Forest Service inventories showing a 15% increase in growing stock between 1997 and 2007, despite the strong growth in demand for hardwoods during that period. And in a move towards a more science-based approach, it commissioned last year what is probably the largest ever Life Cycle Assessment Study in the international hardwood sector. The study will conform to the ISO 14000 series of standards for LCAs and will include an assessment of the carbon footprint of American hardwoods as a discrete component. AHEC intends to reveal the initial findings at Timber Expo.

Gold sponsors come from a variety of sectors. B & K Structures is a structural contractor offering a service from drawing board to installation of engineered and structural timber products, as well as hybrid structure.

With experience across several sectors, including education, sports & leisure, retail, commercial and residential, the company offers its own Carbon Calculator, to ensure that the specification of materials is in line with clients’ aspirations.

Grainger Sawmills is a long established family business which has grown organically for almost four decades and is one of Ireland’s leading timber companies. At the centre of its 11-hectare site in Enniskeane, Co Cork, are two high-output sawmills complemented by extensive kilning, specialised wood machining, planing and preservative treatment facilities, primarily processing native softwoods like spruce and larch. The company is proud of its Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certification for every product.

Timbmet, too, is a family-owned business, a timber distributor with almost 70 years’ knowledge and experience. With a global team responsible for legal and sustainable sourcing and the identification and development of new products, Timbmet has strategic partners around the world assisting with material procurement. These strong relationships provide continuity of supply to customers, ensuring efficiency

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |49|

throughout the supply chain. From its purpose-built national distribution centre holding 2,500 product lines, Timbmet offers a full range of FSC, PEFC and other chain of custody-certified products.

‘We are pleased to support Timber Expo and feel it is important to the future growth of the industry,’ said Wendy Trott, Managing Director of Timbmet Core Business. ‘It is important for us to continue to raise the profile of timber to a wider audience and Timber Expo will provide us with a forum to explore new business opportunities.’

Another Gold sponsor with a clear mandate to promote sustainability is the Global Forest & Trade Network (GFTN), a WWF initiative that aims to eliminate illegal logging and drive improvements in forest management.

First established in 1991, GFTN is the world’s longestrunning and largest forest and trade programme of its kind, providing assistance to hundreds of participants around the globe. By putting into practice what WWF has learned from more than 40 years of working in forest regions, GFTN enables businesses to better understand and evaluate the sources of the wood and wood products they buy.

And putting words into actions is equally important for Wood for Good, who in partnership with the Forestry Commission and the Scottish Forest and Timber Technologies Advisory Group, are quick to acknowledge that sustainability is not just a buzz word in construction.

Chairman John Kissock said, ‘The sector is at the heart of the Government’s strategy to mitigate the effects of climate change. The immediate need is for sustainable |50| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

materials that can make sustainable buildings, and this presents a real opportunity for the timber industry.’

And that’s why Wood for Good exists, he stressed. ‘In order to drive the use of timber in the UK, we need to create a regulatory environment that promotes the use of wood, and generates demand amongst audiences such as architects, contractors, engineers and builders merchants. Our presence at this year’s Timber Expo is to raise the profile of timber in Scotland, and all over the UK.’ Similarly Coillte, the Irish forest products company will be joined as Silver sponsors by a wider group of companies to collaborate in promoting Irish timber expertise across a range of disciplines. In co-operation with Enterprise Ireland, Coillte is joined by Murray Timber Group, one of the largest, most progressive and flexible sawmills in Ireland, state-of-the-art timber processing operation Glennon Brothers and Gold sponsor in its own right Grainger Sawmills, already mentioned above.

Coillte is a commercial company operating in forestry, land based businesses, renewable energy and panel products. It owns more than one million acres of land in Ireland, approximately 7% of the total land area of the country – and more than 80% of this is planted with forests. Coillte employs around 1,000 people across its three divisions: Coillte Forest, Coillte Panel Products and Coillte Enterprise.

Wales is represented through Bronze sponsor Coed Cymru, which over the past 25 years has brought about environmental, economic and social benefits through

sustainable woodland management in Wales. More than 400 businesses now regularly use Welsh hardwoods and the Welsh softwood supply chain is being reinvigorated with the success of the innovative Tŷ Unnos (House in one Night) building system. This evolved from an initial concept from Coed Cymru with partners in Bangor University, the Design Research Unit at the Welsh School of Architecture of Cardiff University, Cowley Timber Works and Burroughs engineers. The project was awarded the TRADA 75th Anniversary research funding in 2010.

Other sponsors and exhibitors are equally diverse, bringing together the many-faceted timber industry from the UK and overseas under one roof (see list below). The show is backed by TRADA Technology and sister companies BM TRADA Certification, Chiltern International Fire and FIRA International will be exhibiting.

Information & Inspiration at Timber Expo •

Conference TRADA’s flagship In Touch with Timber Conference is now an integral part of Timber Expo, delivered in four half-day sessions across the two days of the show.

Session 1: Tuesday 27th September 9.30am – 12.30pm Timber – the first choice for excellent design Jim Greaves, Hopkins; Roddy Langmuir, Edward Cullinan; and Simon Knox, Bhavan.

Session 2: Tuesday 27th September 2011 1.30pm 4.30pm Growing the commercial sector Martin Young, Tesco, Martin Wood, Bryden Wood Architects; Nick Milestone, B&K Structures and Clive Pople, Willmott Dixon.

The conference is being sponsored by Wood for Good, AHEC and CarbonEng. For more information or to book visit www.timber-expo.co.uk/Conference • SIPS and timber frame seminar theatres The UK Structural Insulated Panel Association (UKSIPS) will construct one of the 48 sq m show seminar theatres using SIPS technology, mirrored by Frame Wise who will construct the second theatre using advanced timber frame technology. Both offer a packed programme of free seminars over the two days of the show. The SIP theatre will form the heart of a ‘SIP Zone’ with a range of UKSIPS members exhibiting alongside.

The theatres will have a seating capacity of around 50 delegates per session and it is envisaged that some 30 presentations will be delivered over the two days of the show.

UKSIPS Chairman Andrew Orriss, Managing Director of Innovare Systems, said, ‘SIPS technology is making serious advances into the construction arena as developers and contractors realise the benefits this modern method of construction offers as a readily available, low carbon technology, either as a standalone solution or as a hybrid structure in conjunction with engineered wood products. There is a real thirst for knowledge, which we aim to address at Timber Expo.’

Programme 27th September 2011 Session 1 – Introduction to SIPS • What are SIPS? – a beginner’s guide to SIPS technology • SIPS in practice – fast-track examples of SIPS projects

Session 3: Wednesday 28th September 9.30am – 12.30pm

Session 2 – Designing with SIPS • What can be achieved using SIPS technology – an engineer’s perspective • Pushing the SIPS boundaries – examples of extreme SIPS application

Improving processes and performance Peter Cartwright, Cartwright Pickard; Simon Smith, Ramboll; Guy Nevill, Max Fordham; and David Grindley, David Grindley Architects.

Image: Lyptus – sustainable alternative to tropical hardwoods. On show again at Timber Expo.

Session 4: Wednesday 28th September 2011 1.30pm – 4.30pm Inspiration from abroad Henning Kaland, Code Architects (Norway); Daniel Fagerberg, Strombro Building Workshop (Sweden); Harald Proffessner, CREE; Speaker from Canada to be confirmed.

Costs per session TRADA members Non-members 1 ticket £80 £100 2 tickets £130 £150 3 tickets £160 £180 Subsequent tickets £55 £60 |52| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Session 3 – Low Carbon SIPS • Achieving Low Carbon design using SIPS technology- an architect’s perspective • SIPS in practice – examples of SIPS projects delivering low carbon performance Session 4 – PassivSIPS • PassivSIPS – how to design housing to achieve PassivHaus standards • PassivSIPS in practice – examples of SIPS projects delivering PassivHaus standards 28th September 2011 Session 1 – Introduction to SIPS • What are SIPS? – a beginner’s guide to SIPS technology • SIPS in practice – fast-track examples of SIPS projects Session 2 – SIPS Performance • What can be achieved using SIPS technology – structural performance • Fabric first principles – SIPS thermal performance Session 3 – Constructing SIPS • Fast-track construction using SIPS technology – a contractor’s perspective • SIPS in practice – examples of SIPS projects delivering commercial buildings Session 4 – High-rise SIPS • High-rise buildings using SIPS technology – a developer’s perspective • Commercial projects using SIPS – project case studies A similar programme of talks is being finalised for the Frame Wise theatre.

•Chain of custody workshop PEFC UK will be working with BM TRADA Certification to hold a Chain of Custody workshop on Tuesday 27th September 2011.

This interactive event is designed to help attendees fully understand the PEFC programme and the importance of chain of custody certification for anyone manufacturing, trading or procuring timber products.

Two-thirds of the world’s certified forests are managed

by PEFC-endorsed certification systems. As Communications Director Hilary Khawam said, |54| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

‘Understanding chain of custody and what timber certification means is essential to anyone working in the timber industry. And it is also central to growing a successful, sustainable business.’

Delivered by a panel of industry experts, the workshop will explain the factors driving demand for chain of custody-certified products in the UK. Speakers will include Peter Latham, Chairman PEFC UK, Alun Watkins, National Secretary, PEFC UK and BM TRADA’s Product Certification Manager Alasdair McGregor.

Exhibitors by category Associations Advantage Austria American Hardwood Export Council America Softwoods Malaysian Timber Council New Brunswick Forestry Products Association Ontario Wood PEFC UK TRADA Wood for Good WWF/GTFN Suppliers/Distributors A Proctor Group Beaumont Forest Products Coed Cymru Coillte Grainger Sawmills Hoppings Softwood Products International Timber Lathams MBM Specialty Forest Products M H Southern & Co Norbord

Reindeer Wood SWL Tischlerplatten Betriebs Timbmet Vandecasteele Vincent Timber

Rotafix Sherpa Connector Stanley Bostitch SPAX Trelleborg Sealing Profiles UK

Building systems Ante-Holz B&K Structures Carpenter Oak Canadian Timber Group Core Structures Frame UK Frame Wise Getzner Harlow Brothers Innovare Systems Leadon Timber Frame Lime Technology Mayr-Meinhof Kaufman Mosser Leimholz & Seca Pabst – Holz PassiveWall Pasquill Sarum Hardwood Structures SIPCO TradHus Wiehag

Software Anagram Systems Progressive Solutions Equipment & machinery Advanced Machinery Services AMS Bulmor Lancer Combilift Kerridge Commercial Systems OHRA Stakapal Timbermark Testing & Consultancy BM TRADA Certification Chiltern International Fire Duffy Chartered Engineers FIRA International Image: Case study: Olympic Velodrome by Hopkins Architects. Photo: Richard Davies

Specialist products & systems A20 Cladding Ailona JSC Arch Timber Protection Accsys /Accoya Actis Bluwood NexGen Advanced Exterior Decking Getzner Werkstoffe Innovare Systems Knauf Drywall Osmose Timber Technologies Owatrol Pen-y-Coed Insulation SAM Mouldings Senior Architectural Solutions Silva Timber Products Sip Fit SIPS Eco Panels Stones Timber Trade Fabrication Systems UK Flooring Direct Universal Wood Products W Howard Zhejiang Ystar Furniture Fasteners, glues, sealants Aptus Fasteners ATP Adhesive Systems Gang-Nail Macalloy ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |55|

TRADA Technology Wood Awards Timber Expo 2011 will host a number of co-located events, including the prestigious Wood Awards 2011, Britain’s premier architecture and furniture competition. A record number of 348 entries flooded in and the important shortlist was announced in June. The winners will be unveiled at Timber Expo on 27th September.

Furniture

Conservation/ Restoration

Structural

Private/ Best Small Project

Commercial & Public Access

|56| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Project Title

Entrant Company

Suent Superlight Chair

Sebastian Cox Furniture

Volumptuous

EJ Bespoke Furniture

Alter Hall Table

Ollie Clark Furniture

Woodland Trust HQ Reception Desk

Benchmark

Spring Benches

Angus Ross Ltd

Grace

Black Dog studio

The Manolo Lounger

John Galvin Design

Windsor Rocker

Katie Walker Furniture

The Long Table, The Queen’s College, Oxford

Berman Guedes Stretton Architects

NNLS SACRED OBJECTS

Francesco Draisci Studio Ltd

Project Title

Entrant Company

Dovecote, Stables & Barn Restoration at Chillington Hall

Horsley Huber Architects Ltd

Nailsea Tithe Barn

Architecton

Diamond Hall, University of Ulster

Samuel Stevenson & Sons

Project Title

Entrant company

Far Moor Bridge

Yorkshire Dales National Park Authority

The Open Academy

Sheppard Robson

Aylesbury Theatre

Ramboll UK

Tex-Tonic House 1

Paul McAneary Architects Ltd

Project Title

Entrant company

Bavent House

Claire Curtice Publicists

Shingle House

NORD Architecture

Strange House

Hugh Strange Architects

The Watson House

John Pardey Architects

Emmanuel College Library

Kilburn Nightingale Architects

Connearn Studio

Studio Callaghan Ltd

081 -23MR - Stairs

Atmos Studio Ltd

Project Title

Entrant company

Windmill Hill

Stephen Marshall Architects

Wales Institute for Sustainable Education (WISE)

Pat Borer Architect

Sandal Magna Community Primary School

Sarah Wigglesworth Architects

The Olympic Velodrome

Hopkins Architects

The Apex, Arc, Bury St Edmunds

Hopkins Architects

Brockholes Visitor Centre

Price & Myers

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |57|

Trust in Timber

By Alun Watkins, PEFC

A date that should be indelibly inked into all timberrelated diaries is 3 March 2013, when new EU rules combating illegal timber entering the timber supply chain come into force. For those operating in the UK timber and construction trades doing nothing is not an option.

Alun Watkins, National Secretary of PEFC UK explains…

Back in 2008, the European Commission proposed a regulation to help reduce illegal timber products coming into the EU. In October 2010, the EU Council of Ministers formally adopted the Illegal Timber Regulation (ITR) – now commonly called the EUTR. This will apply to all Member States from the 3 March 2013. As the fourth largest net importer of timber in the world, the UK industry must be responsible to ensure that the timber and wood-based products it uses comes from legal and sustainable sources. So it also now needs to be fully conversant with how the EUTR will affect the supply and sale of these products, especially across the construction sector.

Corporate social responsibility (CSR) policies will be under scrutiny. And it will need to be clearly demonstrated to clients that you and your supply chain are committed to forestry management by sourcing sustainable material for any project involving timber.

One way of meeting most of the requirements of the EUTR, and the most effective way to guarantee that the timber products you sell meet the highest environmental standards, is by procuring them from independently certified forests which are assessed against stringent sustainability benchmarks. |58| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

The EUTR is designed to strengthen efforts to halt illegal logging globally and reduce environmental damage and biodiversity loss across the globe (especially in sensitive areas like Brazil and Indonesia) but crucially to help stem the flow of illegal timber into the EU zone. It is not designed to ensure sustainability of all timber on the UK and EU market. The hope is that it will create an even stronger incentive for suppliers and contractors to ensure that illegal timber is excluded from the supply chain and to make sustainable timber a ‘normality’.

Basic obligations of the EUTR include the ‘prohibition’ on the first placing of illegal timber and timber products on the EU market. So those ‘first placing’ the timber products, need to take important measures to verify the legality of the timber or timber products they are placing on the EU market – either for distribution or use. ‘First placers’ on the EU market will do this through employing effective systems of due diligence. Failure to implement appropriate due diligence systems could result in potential legal action. The due diligence system needs to contain measures and procedures to provide clear access to information on the supply of the timber or wood-based products placed on the market, with appropriate risk assessment procedures in place to evaluate the risk of illegally harvested timber. This may include additional information or documents on the timber or third party verification.

Those trading in timber need to employ basic methods of ‘traceability’ throughout the supply chain. This will include keeping records for five years detailing from

whom they have purchased timber and to whom they have supplied it. PEFC chain of custody meets these requirements. The EUTR applies to the whole range of timber and wood-based products, including solid timber, plywood and board products, furniture, pulp and paper.

PEFC is committed to collaborating with the European Commission, to ensure the EUTR becomes an effective legislative measure which contributes to combating illegal logging while facilitating trade in legal and sustainable wood products.

Transparent and Traceable It is critical to prove that the timber used on your project is sustainably and legally sourced. Third-party certification is one of a few existing tools that can deliver assurances of legality and sustainability measured against robust forest standards and chain of custody documentation. Chain of custody documentation proves that each step of the supply chain has been monitored closely with independent auditing and is the key mechanism for tracing certified material from the forest to the construction site. This unbroken link is transparent proof the timber used is sourced from a legally managed and certified forest.

timber material has been used. Using this method, the sub-contractor does not necessarily need to be certified, although they will need to supply evidence to the project manager or main contractor that they have procured their timber from PEFC-certified sources. This is usually done via delivery documentation.

It is important to remember that the award of this form of certification is very specific and is valid for a particular time and project, rather than for the more familiar on-going chain of custody for PEFC-certified products or material. Project certification enables a business to attain the highest level of certification available, giving the chosen project added environmental value and a ‘solid green’ reputation.

The process behind project certification is also a clearly defined one. It can be applied to virtually any construction concept where timber has been used (or is intending to be used) in any kind of building application. This can include newbuild to retrofit schemes, from timber frame to glulam beams, to flooring, roofing or interior elements such as skirting, architraves and designer panelling. With project certification, the specific project is considered to be the ‘product’ to which the chain of custody process is applied. The claim is based on the total input of PEFCcertified raw material as a percentage of the whole project and enables businesses to make a single claim regarding the timber products or group of products used.

As the world’s largest sustainable forest management certification scheme, PEFC is in the perfect position to help everyone become more aware of the demands of the increasingly environmentally-aware customer base and what can be done to maximise assurances The timber sector and wider construction industry are of sustainability and prove responsible purchasing both experiencing major changes, being fuelled by the power. Understanding chain of custody and what timber delicate economy and reduced budgets, but the adoption certification means is essential knowledge to anyone of a sensible sustainability and green building ethos will working in the timber industry but it is often seen as the reap huge benefits in the future. The economy will make domain of large timber merchants and larger building an inevitable upswing and the construction industry will contractors. It is not always a straightforward process for follow suit with building schemes adopting a fresh vigour. small contractors or sub-contractors to prove a verifiably It is here where the purchase and supply of eco-materials certified supply chain. Often smaller firms will not have will be viewed as industry normality not an expensive implemented and been certified for their own chain of luxury. custody. This may be frustrating for main contractors and larger construction firms as the chain of custody You can learn more about chain of custody and project certification at the has been broken and the exclusive PEFC and BM TRADA Chain of Custody Workshop during Timber Expo. timber products will not This interactive event is designed to help attendees fully understand the PEFC be counted as certified. programme and the importance of chain of custody certification for anyone This problem can be manufacturing, trading or procuring timber products. Speakers will include Peter solved.

Latham, Chairman PEFC UK, Alun Watkins, National Secretary, PEFC UK and Developed in 2007 by PEFC UK in co-operation with the PEFC Council and the PEFC Council Chain of Custody Working Group, a project level of certification is available and covers any specifically defined scheme where PEFCcertified timber, wood products or recycled

Alasdair McGregor from BM TRADA.

The workshop will be held during Timber Expo at the Ricoh Arena, Coventry on Tuesday 27 September 2011 from 1pm to 3pm.

PEFC-certified timber offers the widest choice of sustainable timber available to the construction sector, including Western Red Cedar, European Larch, Douglas Fir, European Redwood, Beech, Cherry, European Oak, American White Oak, American White Ash, Finnish Spruce and Birch with Dark Red Meranti, Majau, Mersawa, Merawan and Gerutu for windows and Balau, Red Balau, Kempas and Keruing for decking.

PEFC will be available throughout Timber Expo on Stand 01-A2 to meet and discuss any issues surrounding forestry certification and sustainable timber.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |59|

Sustainability on a Red Grandis® scale

By Simon Fineman, CEO Timbmet

FSC Pure Red Grandis is also a positive example of how a new plantation-grown species can benefit commercial customers, consumers and the planet in terms of sustainability, natural durability, ease of use and continuity of supply.

What is Red Grandis and how is it used?

A high-grade clear timber delivering consistency of appearance, grain and workability, Red Grandis – or Eucalyptus grandis, to give it its scientific name – is most often used in the production of internal mouldings, including skirting, architrave and thresholds, furniture, cabinets and exterior cladding profiles, as well as within the window and door frame industry.

Simon Fineman is a life-long environmentalist with a passion for sustainability. As CEO of Timbmet, one of Europe’s leading timber distributors, he oversees a company committed to responsible trading and ethical standards.

That’s why Timbmet has recently chosen Red Grandis®, a Forest Stewardship Council certified (FSC®) red hardwood as a legal and sustainable alternative to uncertified Meranti and Sapele, as Fineman explains.

The timber has undergone independent third-party testing by TRADA Technology Limited and Building Research Establishment, achieving impressive results for natural durability and resistance to fungi - key for long-term performance - as well as Class D35 for strength and stiffness, and Class C35 for density to prove its suitability for joinery and structural use.

With nearly 70 years in the timber business, Timbmet owes its strong green credentials in large part to the vision of its founder, Ludwig Kemp, who had a passion for wood as a raw material.

From sourcing, purchasing and kilning to storage, selection and delivery, the company is always on the lookout for timber grown and harvested with the long term health of the environment in mind.

How is Red Grandis grown?

During the plantation growing process, intensive pruning is carried out to provide a knot-free, clear, uniform timber with sapling thinning to enable the trees to reach significant diameters. Because it is easy to machine and shape and because all lengths are identical, there is less waste, substantially limiting potential landfill use and subsequent damage to the environment.

Were he alive today, Kemp would approve of the latest addition to the product portfolio. Given the ever increasing global demands on timber as a natural resource, South American Red Grandis offers an environmentally friendly alternative to Meranti and Sapele, and Timbmet has been appointed exclusive UK distributor. |60| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

With an annual growth rate of 3.4 metres in height and 25mm in diameter, this red hardwood can grow to 60 metres high, with mature trees available after just 23 years, ensuring a reliable continuity of supply for years to come.

What is Timbmet’s source of Red Grandis?

Timbmet works closely with Urufor, a Uruguay-based forestry company, which shares the same ethical and environmental values and which is committed to growing and marketing high quality Eucalyptus grandis. The

company exports its products to over 15 countries in Asia, America and Europe and its corporate mandate is to provide a high quality product based on sustainable forestry management.

Since 2001, the company has been certified to FSC standards: this recognises its exemplary use of forestry resources and its adherence to specific economic, social and environmental regulations in terms of forestry management.

Given its geographical location and smooth topography, Uruguay is ranked among the world’s leading countries in terms of environmental sustainability. Its forestry industry has been growing steadily since the late 1980s, thanks to the introduction and implementation of positive government policies.

The total land area owned by Urufor is 52,000 hectares or 128,000 acres. To date, the planted area covers 27,000 hectares or 67,000 acres, with current demand leading to 1300 hectares being harvested annually.

Where it all begins To guarantee the production of high quality wood, Urufor says the procedure starts at the nursery. Its Tree Improvement Program for Eucalyptus grandis strives to enhance the growth and performance of this species on existing forestry sites, at the same time working to strengthen disease tolerance and develop genetic diversity.

Working in conjunction with its associate company, Cofusa, seeds are carefully selected and improved over several generations, with vegetative reproduction technology cloning outstanding performing trees.

Approximately 1.5 million seedlings are planted on an annual basis, ensuring sustainability on a grand – or perhaps that should be, grandis – scale!

After six months, small plants developed at the nursery are transplanted to land where new forests will be established. Soil preparation, fertilisation and weed control are all closely monitored throughout the process to ensure the development of a satisfactory and sustainable plantation.

This uninterrupted activity paves the way for ongoing reforestation, further benefitting sustainability and environmental protection.

The future is Red, the future is Grandis In the 20-plus years I’ve worked in the timber industry, I’ve learned that although progress often seems frustratingly slow in communicating the imperative need to achieve environmental protection and forest sustainability, the programmes and results that are emerging are very encouraging. In forestry terms, where change is measured in decades, the 20th century witnessed destructive devastation, as the global hardwood industry ravaged environmentally sensitive forests.

In the early 90s, I went on my first overseas mission to investigate what was happening with Brazilian mahogany.

It didn't take long to find out. Forestry management plans were bogus works of fiction and the Amazon forest was being wrecked by loggers interested only in a few valuable trees per hectare. It’s hardly surprising that today we sell little or no Brazilian hardwood.

The story was similar in many other forests of the world, particularly, though by no means exclusively, in tropical developing countries. Thankfully, we’ve learned some valuable lessons from that damaging period in our environmental heritage. The path to change has brought about scrupulous supply chain auditing, stringent certification and the introduction of plantation grown hardwoods.

In the 21st century, more and more organisations, governments, companies and individuals are working to reverse and repair the damage done to the world’s rich landscape. Gradually, we are learning how to protect our ecosystems, while at the same time harvesting timber from environmentally benign sources.

It is timbers such as Red Grandis and companies such as Urufor which are leading the way. The next 20 years will be beneficial for hardwood sourcing, and for an industry and a world - with little to fear and much to gain.

Pruning and thinning techniques are carried out later on in the process to generate a good yield of logs with no defects and large diameters. The first pruning is carried out when the seedling reaches 18 months, the second at three years, and the third after four-and-a-half years. By this time, the trees have already grown to 12 metres in height.

Harvest time With crop development and growth completed, harvesting can begin. Due to the favourable conditions of the soil and the climate, as well as Uruguayan investment in road improvement, harvesting continues throughout the year.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |61|

Green Building Page 64 - Adding Quality to the Green Roof Market - Dusty Gedge, President of the European Federation of Green Roof Associations Page 66 - 69 - The Green Roof Code of Best Practice for the UK 2011: Why? What? … and How - Simon Poe, Alumasc Page 70 - 71 - How Green is YOUR roof? - Richard Storey, Hertalan Page 72 - 73 - Green Walls - Zac Ribak, MD, Watermatic Irrigation Ltd

©limpertsacadamy.com |62| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Adding Quality to the Green Roof Market

By Dusty Gedge, President of the European Federation of Green Roof Associations

Over the last ten years the Green roof market in the UK has grown exponentially. From being a relative fringe activity used on specialist buildings many major new developments are including the technology in their designs. Although this is exciting for green roof advocates, like myself, it is important that we ensure that what is being installed is fit for purpose and has longevity both in terms of appearance and in environmental importance. The development and need for a 'code of practice' has always been something the major players and advocates within the industry have desired. Now the technology is mainstream, it is more important.

The establishment of GRO - the Green Roof Organisation - was established three years ago by sponsored members of livingroofs.org Ltd, the leading UK based green roof organisation. The sole purpose of the group was to work toward a code of practice. GRO was fortunate in that the Green Roof Centre and livingroofs.org had been successful in obtaining funding from the European Life fund to do this. Over the last 12 months the group has worked hand in hand with the Green Roof Centre and major green roof suppliers and installers to arrive at draft guidance on ‘Planning, installing and maintaining green roofs.

Internationally the German Guidance on green roofs, generally referred to as the FLL, has been in existence since the mid-1980s and has been updated several times. The last review and publication was in 2008 and is available from the FLL website [www.fll.de]. This document is the basis of all other codes in both Europe, North America and Asia. The UK code is also based on this exemplar document [that is available in English].

The code focuses on the performance of green roofs in the long term. This is particularly apt, considering spring 2011 has been the driest one on record. Many green roofs, especially lightweight simple extensive green roof systems have suffered, as has much of the landscape at ground level. The code provides and advocates recommended minimum depths and build-ups for green roofs to ensure that in the long term and with the vagaries of a changing climate green roofs last and flourish year on year for building owners and managers.

These are of course guidelines but by following what |64| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

will be laid in the code of practice, designers, project managers and installers will be able to assure and ensure clients that any given green roof will be fit for purpose.

It is unfortunate that I personally have been called out to a few green roofs over the last few months to inspect and provide an assessment of the green roof. Many of these clients have suggested that with any ‘new’ technology things are likely to be experimental and therefore there is a potentialy for failure. I would contend firstly that green roofs do not fail because of the technology, but because of ‘bad’ specification and implementation. Secondly the technology is sound and as the UK systems are based on German and Swiss technologies that have been implemented with great success for over thirty years, this not a new technology. It is a thoroughly researched and understood method of providing landscape within the built environment. Where things go wrong is where corners have been cut in pursuit of margins!

Nobody with an interest in a flourishing green roof market, both from a business and an environmental perspective, should and does not advocate specifications and implementations that compromise what should be a mainstream building technology across the UK. The UK green roof code has now been published and is available at livingroofs.org and should help the green roofs to continue to grow and be implemented across the country.

The Green Roof Code of Best Practice for the UK 2011: Why? What? … and How?

By Simon Poe, Alumasc

Green Roof specialist Alumasc has long been leading the development of the green roof market in the UK. It is therefore natural that Alumasc was at the forefront of the development of the GRO Green Roof Code of Practice, which has gained increased prominence within the UK’s Construction Industry since its publication in January.

Here, Simon Poe, Alumasc’s Technical Manager, and major contributor to the GRO Code, provides a clear and succinct guide to how the code will benefit Green Roofs both now and in the future.

Green roofs have been increasingly heralded as solutions to many of the challenges that face the UK’s built environment in today’s climate. Recent urban regeneration has led to increased population densities in the UK’s major towns and cities. The associated reduction |66| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

in soft landscaped areas has created design issues that require sustainable solutions. Green roofs can counter many of these threats, notably in respect of: 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Energy consumption reduction Climate change mitigation Sustainable drainage and water quality improvement Biological diversity enhancement Air quality improvement and urban heat island effect mitigation Amenity space provision

However, the lack of any credible, independent reference literature that is specific to the design and installation of green roofs in the UK has surely restricted the number of installations within the UK.

Why is a UK code required?

The German FLL guidelines, widely perceived to set the highest standards for green roofs, have long been followed and cited by the quality green roof manufacturers that are operating in the UK market.

However, there are important differences between Germany and the UK, notably in terms of the climate and the drivers for green roof installations: •Climate: The UK’s unique weather patterns have important implications for the green roof build-up, particularly in terms of the planting that can survive (and the subsequent effect upon the substrate and drainage layer to provide the planting with the appropriate air, water and nutrients.

•Drivers: In Germany, there are numerous incentives and local legislations driving green roof installations to derive the communal benefits of green roofs, notably stormwater management. The sustainable drainage potential of green roofs is also a key driver for UK green roof specifications. However, the second of the primary specification objectives for UK green roofs is the recreation or enhancement of habitat lost during the urbanisation process to improve biodiversity. This is an important issue in the UK due to the smaller land mass and highly concentrated population within urban areas; less so in Germany, where the greater land mass permits biodiversity to be managed more easily at ground level.

The Code’s Mission The Code is a clear concise guide that aims to: •

Provide specifiers and installers with the requisite understanding of the key issues that affect the design, installation and maintenance of high quality, flourishing green roofs for the long term;

•

Highlight the implications of different green roof specifications, notably in respect of the design, in-life performance and long-term maintenance requirements;

•

Standardise and clarify the terminology used to describe green roof issues and components through the publication of definitions for key terms;

•

Enable specifiers to comparatively assess the different manufacturers’ systems through the provision of guidance as to the function

|68| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

and relevant performance characteristics of each component within the build-up;

• Guarantee a minimum quality standard for systems that comply with the requirements of the Code; • Promote the benefits of green roofs and highlight how different green roof build-ups can be tailored to prioritise specific objectives; • Highlight important health and safety issues that must be reflected at the early design stages of a project; •

Encourage green roof installers to undergo specialist, structured training courses to gain the expertise that will underpin greater numbers of quality green roof installations;

• Provide for the long-term success of green roof installations by encouraging entry into maintenance contracts with the installing contractor; •

Provide a foundation upon which further iterative developments can, in time, be based; leading to green roof guidelines that are as comprehensive as any available, including the publication of standard procedures for the characterisation of components and of required performance levels, so as to underpin the continuous improvement of green roofs in the UK.

The focus of the initial version of the Code is therefore on providing guidance for the specification, design, manufacture, installation and maintenance of green roofs: a) de-mystifying the technical issues surrounding green roofs to facilitate more informed specifications; and b) increasing the quantity and quality of contractors that can install and maintain green roofs to deliver the specification objectives for the long-term.

criteria, leaving quality manufacturers to follow the German FLL guidelines. However, surely one must question the longer-term merit in having a UK Code that refers to German DIN standards (some of which are not classed as Euro Norms) and bespoke procedures developed by the FLL’s working groups?

Since publication, the Code has been widely disseminated throughout the Construction Industry – amongst the most popular downloads from the NFRC’s website, the Code is also freely available for download from www.greenroofcode.co.uk or from many green roof manufacturers’ websites. However, whilst the GRO Code will serve as an important foundation for the long-term development of the green roof industry in the UK, further iterative development is essential; with the next logical step being for the Code to encompass manufacturing guidance.

Whilst green roofs are a specialised field, most green roof components are used in related applications.

Accordingly, there are existing British Standards and Euro Norms that stipulate procedures for testing and documenting performance of growing media, geotextiles and geo-synthetics. By adopting these standard procedures, not only will it reduce testing costs (due to the use of standard procedures and equipment, and a greater number of available test facilities) but will also allow manufacturers to evaluate the suitability of new components from UK manufacturers, who will typically already possess the relevant test data.

The Code beyond 2011 Research is increasingly highlighting that the green roof’s configuration significantly influences its performance and ability to fulfil the specification objectives. Accordingly, there is an increasing diversity of green roof systems available from an ever-expanding number of suppliers.

The publication of such manufacturing guidance will represent the next step towards a holistic UK green roof guidance document – increasing awareness of the performance and quality of green roof components amongst both specifiers and manufacturers – and will provide the foundation for the final stage: deriving UKspecific acceptable performance levels.

Being able to identify and communicate performance and quality indicators will therefore be important. Consistent quantification of performance will not only benefit specifiers with greater transparency when evaluating systems’ ability to achieve the desired objectives, but will equally inform manufacturers’ product developments.

Alumasc is committed to building upon the foundations laid out in the Code; continuously improving its highlyengineered green roof systems and providing transparent advice regarding the performance benefits that can be anticipated from the installation.

To find out more about Alumasc Green Roofs, please visit:

The initial version of the Code prioritised specifiers’ and contractors’ requirements rather than providing product testing methodologies or performance acceptance

www.alumascgreenroofs.co.uk or e-mail to technical@alumasc-exteriors.co.uk.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |69|

How Green is YOUR roof?

Image: An example of a good sedum living roof by Hertalan

By Richard Storey, Hertalan Living roofs are now a widely accepted solution to help: • improve air quality by removing heavy metals caused by pollution, cars and industry.

• alleviate flood water run off from roofs, as a living roof catches on average circa 60% of the water that lands on it each year.

• reduce energy consumption by minimising the need for air conditioning unit running costs.

• reduce noise pollution by absorbing external noise pollution.

• reduce drainage costs by catching the rainwater and rendering some storm water drains redundant.

• extend the life of the roof. By protecting the membrane and absorbing the UV a green/living roof slows degradation caused in this way.

Specifiers and end users are now beginning to scrutinise the products within the build up of the systems to ensure manufacturers are using the most environmentally friendly and sustainable products available.

Guidelines from the GRO and the German FLL can help a specifier achieve a build up that will give successful results. However, they do not advise on the type of waterproofing to use other than testing some manufacturers’ suitability and making sure it will not be affected by the roots of the planting within various systems. |70| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

A typical Hertalan living roof system will comprise of the following layers: • • • • •

Hertalan EPDM waterproofing tested to FLL standards. geo-textile protective moisture mat. moisture retaining drainage board. growing substrate. planting layer.

Each element of the system can be given a level of sustainability to the client if they require and the choices for each element are now widespread.

On a recent project, one of our clients used sedum from their building site to achieve full coverage of the roof within 18 months.

Growing substrates now can be formed from recycled crushed brick and green waste compost. Moisture retaining drainage boards are often made from recycled HDPE. The geo-textile moisture mat can be made from waste products of carpet manufacturing.

EPDM carries independent support from the Green Building Digest of being the “best buy” for roofing membranes due to its relatively low impact and its reusability. It has added verification of its longevity from the independent SKZ study, carried out in central Europe.

The study took samples from various EPDM roofs and concluded that, when fitted correctly, an EPDM roof should last over 50 years.

The main Hertalan production facility in Kampen, Netherlands, holds ISO 14001 certification, the environmental management standard. Greenpeace also named EPDM as their preferred alternative for roofing membranes in its publication called “Building the Future.”

Hertalan EPDM systems have been used on roofs throughout Europe for over 40 years and Hertalan were in fact the first manufacturers of EPDM in Europe.

2. How Red is your roof?

A good living roof manufacturer will at least adhere to the minimum guidelines of the GRO or the FLL. These guidelines have been established after extensive research over many years of successful roofing applications. Then there’s the cowboy element that enters the market, unavoidably, because they see an opportunity to make a fast buck. If they tell you they can save you a fortune by reducing the tried and tested guidelines, we suggest you ask them if they’re members of any green roof trade organisations and check them out online or through independent authorities like LivingRoofs.org or the Green Roof Centre, Sheffield.

about the manufacturer’s products, the various elements of the system and what they do. A pretty website doesn’t always mean the contractor is reliable. They should be able to offer longterm maintenance for your roof or roof garden and provide a maintenance plan for either.

Products that can be purchased from online dealers rarely hold any agreement certificates that are relevant to the UK market.

A good starting point is to contact the manufacturer and see if they have a BBA certified system and to prove this.

A trustworthy manufacturer will send you a copy of their current BBA and this certificate number can be checked on the BBA website.

See if they hold ISO 14001 and ISO 9001. See what guarantees they offer and if they can do insurance backed ones too. Check out the details of training courses and see how thorough this training is; is the training course free? A committed contractor will also travel from pretty much anywhere to become an approved contractor.

We have approved contractors in the Shetland Isles, Inverness, Northern Ireland, Southern Ireland, Cornwall, Kent and Norfolk to name a few distant counties from our HQ. Our approved contractors have all paid and travelled to the Hertalan techno point in Nottinghamshire to attend the full training course and join a company with over 115 years of experience.

Unfortunately these unscrupulous roofers will suggest shortcuts like reducing the depth of substrate but guaranteeing the roof will perform as well as the major manufacturers.

A tell tale of this is when the sedums turn red as they try to hold on to as much moisture as possible by thickening their leaves. We have seen extremes of this sort result in the cowboys using the wrong fertiliser too, which results in the development of the flowers instead of encouraging the roots; this added flower growth draws on the unestablished root system which results in certain failure. Unfortunately this gets living roofs a bad name as people think green roofs are red. Sometimes the cowboys have been known to lay the pre-grown blanket direct onto the drainage board and this often results in the blanket drying out and being lifted out of place by the wind even before the certain failure it was doomed to.

Image: Make sure you choose an approved contracter to avoid results like this.

An added benefit of deeper substrate is by providing a safe environment for invertebrates to live. If a passing beetle lands on the roof and burrows down to get away from the midday sun but hits a plastic board it becomes a tourist; if it burrows down and escapes the heat it could easily become a resident. This could then bring in more species whether predators or prey but it all adds to the biodiversity of the roof.

3. How professional is your roofer?

A professional roofing contractor should have a good track record and should be able to answer questions ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |71|

Green Walls - So, what’s new since 600 BC?

By Zac Ribak, MD Watermatic Irrigation Ltd

The Hanging Gardens of Babylon were built by the King of Babylon to deal with his homesick wife’s longing for the trees and fragrant plants of her homeland.

Would she recognise some of today’s green walls? Well, they range from the edible to the incredible, so she would like that, and you find them on patios as well as in palaces. But they need to work much harder nowadays, particularly with the level of Sustainable Urban Management required in our cities.

The obvious one is to help deal with the Urban Heat Island effect which is a growing issue as the summers are certainly getting hotter, energy more expensive and the infrastructure is groaning under the strain of increased consumption peaks. Air conditioning adds a huge burden at peak times and bills land with much more of a thud on finance directors’ desks these days. A single degree of cooling carries a large carbon and energy cost , and to cool a building by an additional 5 or 6 degrees due to the heat island equates to a substantial financial loading. That is the power of green infrastructure using natural plant evapo transpiration to achieve a chunk of the cooling rather than refrigeration pumps. The green plants look a whole lot better than the electrical plant, too.

No wonder then that increasing attention is now on developing the green infrastructure which is a whole lot cheaper and brings irresistible improvements to homes, workplaces and cityscapes. Watch this space for more news on a future of integrated urban management.

Meanwhile, successful green infrastructure pulls together a whole range of green ideas and systems

|72| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

to deliver optimal benefits beyond the all important financials. Where there is ‘whole system thinking’ in the early stages of planning, numerous synergies can be found, including the use of harvested rainwater to irrigate green walls and also green roofs which are the horizontal cousins of our vertical living green walls.

Living walls are particularly suitable for cities, as they allow good use of available vertical surface areas. In fact, looking at London as an example of a relatively ‘green ‘ city visible from an aerial view, there are huge opportunities to create green walls and roofs with each system bringing benefits to the urban eco system. Some are hard benefits like temperature reduction, whilst some are ‘softer’ like reducing airborne dust particles, reducing sound levels, natural shading around windows, creating bio diverse habitat and generally positively impacting on the urban psychology. In this direction lie the Urban Oases that a Babylonian Queen would recognise.

As this is the run up to the 2012 green Olympics, it is worth saying that the Olympic estate includes some very impressive green walls and other green infrastructure which are set to delight the visitors and also the legacy occupants for many years to come and be a model that others can emulate and continuously refine as the glowing future for green walls unfurls itself.

So what about the great failures? There is still controversy about the location of those fabulous Hanging Gardens because they have disappeared - been recycled even. What is the lesson? Clearly it is about developing a robust understanding of how to make and maintain sustainable projects without spending a King’s ransom. In the pioneer days of green walls there were some spectacular failures; often the reasons were not spectacular at all. Just the usual trimming of costs leading to having no personnel available to switch on the irrigation, or switch it off. Or the idea of ‘zero maintenance’, for plants? Yeah right, tell me another. But there is low maintenance rather than no maintenance.

That works. As post–pioneers we have developed some really clever technologies that allow highly efficient and reliable irrigation which can carry liquid nutrients, computerised watering plans that vary for each plant zone, moisture sensors that prevent over watering and help to avoid drying, flexible planting schemes, and also telemetry which allows remote monitoring and controlling of the system from anywhere in the internetready world. Literally you can be by the pool in Florida and still be in full control of your green wall. Plants living on green walls are having healthier, beautiful longer lives, too.

And the great successes? Underlying these mini sagas there is a sound platform of good technological development beyond using the best of miniaturisation, mobile telephony and the power of the internet.

These Living Walls have benefitted from increasing understanding of the importance of getting the micro-ecology right. Affordable and clever components

are continuously arriving on the market with major technology, materials and systems crossing over from commercial agricultural experience and even space and military technological developments – perhaps not quite a green prophetic version of ‘beating swords into ploughshares’ but possibly moving in the right direction.

Things have moved beyond the ‘old’ ideas of watering green walls by simply cascading water from above on a timer. Now we have almost intelligent systems with pressure regulated dripline that compensates for the vertical height difference, and low energy pumps that adjust pressure to deliver precisely the right amounts of water and nutrients to the right places at the right times.

Water consumption is a fraction of what it was and the systems can be easily monitored to generate alerts in the case of failures. Earlier systems did not have these advantages and relied on expensive and substantial human monitoring which was prone to public holidays and sickness.

And the future? Modern green walls can be found outdoors as green facades screening ugly buildings or sites, and also with fabulous indoor planting schemes in the most upmarket chic stores and airport lounges. The scope and scale is remarkable as are the companies who have been busy designing imaginative and robust green wall systems and developing them to fit into any size, location and budget. Some are pre-grown for commercial projects and arrive onsite as impressive designs like huge green murals. Some homes and offices have smaller versions with herbs, lettuce, and even soft fruit like strawberries growing at picking height providing beauty and function in a single, vertical, space-saving mini garden.

There is also a European (and possibly a World’s) ‘First’ Green Wall Centre created by the team at Watermatic.

Set up for researching, testing and developing it is not so much a showroom, but more of an outdoor ‘grow room’ providing real data on wall performance and building the science of which types of wall systems do best in which circumstances. There are eight completely different systems that can be seen via live webcam at www. watermaticltd.co.uk. If you are interested in Sustainable Water Management including, but not restricted to, green walls there are the Sustainable Water Industry Group (SWIG) Awards calling now for nominations and taking place in November 2011. The Awards are for extraordinary projects combining the practical with the imaginative to deliver projects. Details at www.sustainablewater.org.uk One thing I think is for sure, that our homesick Babylonian Queen might have said, seeing our 21st century green walls, that the original Seven Wonders of the Ancient World now might be in need of some updating.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |73|

ENERGY Page 76 - 78 - Will Government Recognise The Potential For Solar Pv In The Uk? - Howard Johns, MD, Southern Solar And Chairman Of The Solar Trade Association Page 80 - 81 Tackling The Next Barriers To The Imple Mentation Of Photovoltaics (Pv) - Bruce Cross, Founder And Managing Director, Gb-Sol Ltd. Page 82 - 84 Accrediting The Green Deal: Building Confidence And Enabling Business - Jon Murthy, Ukas Page 85 - 86 Biomass Heating – The Uk’s Hottest Opportunity! - Neil Turner Res Group Page 88 - 89 - Standards Needed In Green Tech Gold Rush - Micael Pullan, Powerperfector

|74| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

WILL GOVERNMENT RECOGNISE THE POTENTIAL FOR SOLAR PV IN THE UK? Howard Johns Md Of Southern Solar And Chairman Of The Solar Trade Association

Solar PV has the power to revolutionise the way we produce energy in the UK, providing secure, affordable green electricity and cutting our carbon emissions. But changes to Government policy are threatening the future of solar PV and with it our energy security.

Solar is the world’s fastest growing energy technology and has the potential to generate around a third of the UK’s electricity needs with no emissions – and that’s if we just put it on the nations south facing roofs.

Globally, governments are encouraging their domestic solar industries to build capacity and create renewable electricity – as people around the world realise that electricity from solar PV will become the cheapest source of energy.

Last year, more solar PV capacity was installed across Europe than any other renewable technology. In 2010, Germany installed more than double the amount of solar that the UK plans to install by 2020. German politicians estimate that solar will meet over 50% of daytime electricity needs by 2020. More than 2.5 million people now use solar PV to generate electricity, while the German Environment Minister says that by 2013 solar PV will become cheaper than energy generated from other sources, including nuclear and fossil fuels.

Despite a proven track record for solar PV in other markets, Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC) has proposed drastic reductions to the financial incentive scheme – the Feed in Tariff - that is vital to the development of a sustainable solar industry in the UK. The Government is rejecting the chance to build the UK’s green economy and create many new jobs.

If the UK invests in a solar future now, we can bring down costs faster, and encourage enterprise and manufacturing here in the UK. Investment now will also enable us to build the installation capacity and supply chains required to deliver quality solar power stations on a wide range of scales. If we wait for the costs to fall, it will take longer to reach the time when no subsidy is needed and the delayed investment will result in the UK losing major manufacturing, tax revenue, export, employment and market-share opportunities in this vital and vast new global industry. Seventy percent of the jobs involved in solar PV cannot be exported as they are involved with delivery of the projects.

But instead of supporting solar, DECC has announced radical cuts in the Feed in Tariffs for projects larger than 50kW, in its “Fast Track Review” published in March, implemented from 1st August 2011. The Government plans to support installing PV only on a relatively small number of households, with very limited opportunities for community or public sector solar and no commercial sector or ground-mounted PV schemes. The Budget further proposed to reduce the tax benefits for community renewables schemes.

|76| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |77|

First Hand Experience of Community Schemes Under Threat Solar PV offers an amazing opportunity for communities to set up their own renewable power companies because it is relatively easy to implement. I have had first hand experience of setting up a community scheme which would not be possible under the new reduced FITs regime.

In Lewes, East Sussex, the energy services company Ovesco has teamed up with Harveys, the local brewery, to install the country's first community-owned solar power station on the roof of Harveys' warehouse.

Installed by Southern Solar, the 544 solar PV panels will generate 98 kilowatts peak, an estimated 92,000 kilowatt hours per year. The installation will be completed by August 1st this year, all the power generated will qualify for the top rate feed-in tariff of 34p per kilowatt hour, ensuring returns to investors of 4% per annum over the 25 years of the scheme.

Community schemes like this are now under threat – following two blows that have recently emerged since the scheme was first planned: Climate Change Minister Greg Barker has decided to cut the tariff above 50 kilowatts to 19p as of August 1st, and George Osborne has decided to remove EIS tax relief from FIT businesses.

Lewes Football Club has already expressed interest in hosting a PV array and its south-facing roof is scheduled to be Ovesco's next site. Other sites are being considered but we will now have to look at installations below 50kW to be eligible for a Feed In Tariff that is workable with a return for the people who have invested from the Community.

Ovesco's long-term plan is to make Lewes District selfsufficient in renewable energy by 2030, but the general uncertainty coupled with changes to policy make this grand vision ever more challenging.

Ernst & Young Solar PV Report on 50kW Outlines Potential for Solar The cost of subsidising the UK solar industry is low.

According to The UK Solar PV Industry Outlook Report on 50kW to 5 MW market, by independent consultants, Ernst & Young, non-domestic solar could thrive in the UK without subsidy from 2017. With FIT subsidies for solar over 50kW set to be slashed from August large scale solar is not commercially viable leaving much of the industry facing collapse.

The E&Y report underlines the potential for solar PV to increase competition in the UK electricity market and to deliver subsidy-free power to millions of users shortly after this Parliament. Instead the Coalition Government has put the UK industry at a serious international |78| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

competitive disadvantage and made solar more costly than it needs to be in the UK - without first having even quantified the benefits.

With a kick-start the UK can create a mature PV industry, and bring down the costs of distribution and installation with dramatic effects. Investing in solar today is an investment in the subsidy-free energy revolution we so badly need and which solar can deliver well before the end of the decade.

A Solar Revolution Increases Competition and Helps Democratise Energy in UK We can have a solar revolution for a fraction of the cost currently being spent on other energy generation technologies, with the added benefits of energy security and new green jobs. Energy and climate change are the two issues that will dominate the next century. We need solutions that can help us address both issues at once, whilst allowing our communities to thrive.

Solar PV allows us to democratise energy and distribute access to energy more fairly. Currently energy supply and energy policy in the UK is dominated by a handful of huge companies. By encouraging people to use PV, we create hundreds and thousands of small providers. You and your roof become a power station and together we begin to break away from our dependence on fossil fuels.

In reviewing technologies available to help us meet carbon reduction targets in the UK, the Government is failing to recognise solar as the viable, safe and practical option that it so obviously is. We are calling on the government to enable everyone to benefit from secure, clean energy projects of all sizes – on our homes, on our businesses, our industries and in our communities. Solar really is the future – and now we just need the policy makers to realise it.

The PV market has seen explosive growth over the last year, but this has been tempered by the uncertainty of a hasty government review. No market can adjust overnight to the reduction of its largest system to just 1% of the previous value so it will take some time for investors to regain some of their previous enthusiasm.

The government has moved from a Tariff (where the industry knows with certainty what will be the likely type and unit size of market) more towards a grant system (where the pot of money for incentives may run out at an uncertain time and may, or may not, be replenished).

By Bruce Cross, Founder and Managing Director, GB-Sol Ltd.

Tackling the next Barriers to the Implementation of Photovoltaics (PV)

Finding a model that maximises UK jobs

|80| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

This change immediately restricts prospects for pure UK companies as they are starting from a low level and have to invest in building capacity and hence raise capital to commit to large overhead expansion. The overseas companies come from large (The German market is already over a hundred times larger than the UK) markets where their economies of scale allow them to come and operate in the UK knowing they can pull back to their home markets very quickly when the funding cap is reached. The consequence of this policy change could well be that the UK feed-in-tariff will create many more jobs abroad than in the UK. It is unlikely that voters will approve of a technology that they perceive (rightly or wrongly) as being expensive to subsidise (the popular press have already started raising such questions) when it does not create local jobs. The industry has to be able to proffer a solution which both public and politicians can support, and a high level of UK content is important to the long term prospects for PV as a significant industry. The REA and other trade organisations are pressing for the government to broaden their commitment to PV, but have yet to see any signs of improvement.

Finding economic business models for multiple small installations The future for PV will focus on many small installations, and as such may benefit the small installers, and those running multiple schemes. There will be opportunities for novel business models that can bring larger groups of individual installs into a single entity, but without exceeding the new 50kW ‘economic payback limit’.

Marketing finance and delivery will be challenging, but the implementation should still be able to utilise the present regulatory infrastructure provided by MCS and REAL. For public sector and commercial systems the 50kW limit has yet to be tested in the context of several buildings on one site. How will the systems be rated if they all have a separate electrical connection but are located on separate buildings on the same site? Will we have a

‘postcode lottery’ dependent on the local interpretation of these rules?

The industry now needs to focus on delivering PV as many small systems. The previous model had been evolving for large scale projects mainly delivered directly from the manufacturer. This has to transform into a more distribution focussed and customer facing industry, which could contain many innovative new business models.

The regulatory framework needs to evolve to simplify the process for connecting multiple small installations to the grid. G83 works well when applied to a single domestic install, but a group scheme, even if widely scattered, is being treated as one unit and preauthorisation is being required. Typically this is a scheme for a social housing provider who has housing stock scattered over a town or region. This preauthorisation delays the project and adds unnecessary administration costs, without adding significant value. The DNOs (District Network Operators) should be resourced to give a speedy response, and clear guidelines should be published which allow some scattered groups to be treated as individual installs, provided they fall within certain criteria, and hence only require post-installation notification.

sophisticated and preferred solution, and the specifiers and influencers should place a premium on such solutions.

There are other advantages in the integrated systems which reinforce the reasoning because they replace traditional roofing materials, and so can reduce weight and cost. In a retrofit project, there have been concerns that PV systems add weight to a roof, and not all companies are performing a structural survey to verify the existing structure can support the extra load.

When an integrated system is fitted, this generally has a weight equivalent to slates, and less than concrete tiles, therefore with no increase of weight, no increased load on the structure. On the other hand, when used on a new build project, an integrated system has a cost advantage in that it displaces traditional roofing materials, thus reducing the marginal cost of the PV system.

U.K. based PV Manufacturer - www.gb-sol.co.uk

Visual appearance might become a barrier to PV. In a new market for a little understood domestic product there is a temptation to install as large a system as possible to maximise economic return for the client.

Installed systems that are out of scale with their surroundings will demotivate others in the locality from following suit. There is also a possibility that a backlash will come from visual lobby groups (the resistance to windfarms has been based mainly on appearance) and the PV industry would do well to avoid any such adverse reactions.

The industry should seek not just satisfied individual customers but exemplars to encourage greater uptake.

As the market develops people will start to appreciate that there are different types of system at different levels of cost. As with any purchase for their house, the knowledgeable home owner will often choose a higher priced solution when there is a clear visual or quality difference.

In future we may find that the presence of a PV roof will increase the resale value of a property, but only if it enhances the property. A ‘bolt on’ PV array could reduce the likelihood of a sale due to its visual appearance.

In a maturing marketplace there is a clear differentiator in having an aesthetically pleasing integrated PV roof.

This may be in the form of a ‘glazed roof’ system or a PV tile/slate system, but will surely be viewed as the ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |81|

Accrediting the Green Deal: Building confidence and enabling business

By Jon Murthy, UKAS

The passing of the Climate Change Act 2008 saw the UK being set targets for reducing carbon emissions across all sectors of society.

The Department for Energy and Climate Change (DECC) reports that up to a quarter of the UK’s total carbon emissions comes from energy used in homes. It also states that a similar amount is a result of business, industry and workplace activity. With some of Europe’s oldest building stock, the shoring up of draughty buildings and installing or increasing insulation measures is an essential yet daunting challenge for the UK. At the end of last year DECC introduced its new “Green Deal” initiative to parliament as part of the new Energy Bill. The aim of the scheme is relatively simple: to revolutionise the energy efficiency of British properties.

As any home or business owner will testify, the initial outlay for many of the measures designed to improve energy efficiency can prove to be a deterrent. This has been recognised in the Green Deal, which establishes a framework that enables private firms to offer consumers energy efficiency improvements at no up-front cost.

Instead, the value of the investment will be recouped through a charge on the energy bill, fixed to the property.

Upon announcing the scheme Greg Barker, Minister of State at DECC, stated “The Green Deal will be the biggest home improvement programme since the Second World War, shifting our outdated draughty homes from the past into the future, so it’s vital people can trust it.” To provide the necessary reassurance to those undertaking Green Deal improvements on their homes, community spaces and businesses, DECC has announced that it will require installers and assessors to be subject to accredited certification to the EN 45011 standard. |82| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Accreditation and the Green Deal Following an EU Directive, each member state must appoint a single National Accreditation Body (NAB).

This NAB is responsible for assessing evaluating organisations against internationally-recognised standards and awarding accredited status. The United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) was appointed the UK’s NAB in January 2010, although it has been the sole body recognised by government to accredit organisations since its formation in 1995 and has roots going back to the 1960s.

Accreditation is being used increasingly by the government to provide confidence in the services needed to deliver policy initiatives over a growing field of activity. It already applies to a number of environmental standards and schemes, including MCERTS, ISO 14001 and PAS 2050. As a first stage in ensuring that the new Green Deal standards for installers and assessors are met DECC has appointed UKAS to offer certification bodies accreditation under EN 45011. This will allow the accredited certification bodies to certify assessors and installers to operate under the Green Deal.

By assessing the assessors, UKAS accreditation underpins the certification process for the Green Deal. It will provide end consumers with confidence that there is a complete chain of competence right through to the organisations or individuals undertaking the Green Deal projects. Ensuring that installers and assessors will meet the necessary standards when the Green Deal starts in 2012 is only part of the buy-in process to the new scheme. The companies offering energy efficiency services need to be assured of the benefits of obtaining accredited certification status under the Green Deal.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |83|

What’s in it for me?

For some schemes, such as the Green Deal, accreditation is a legal requirement, whilst in others it is the expected norm. Beyond the legal requirements, accredited certification can have valuable benefits for organisations and open doors to previously closed markets. An increasing number of organisations, in both the public and private sectors are specifying UKAS accredited certification as a precondition to tendering for contracts. A company that holds UKAS accredited certification is therefore able to overcome this hurdle and widen the potential market for its goods or services by demonstrating credible evidence of best practice.

Regardless of industry sector or market conditions, customers need to have confidence in the goods and services that they procure. Making an informed choice is essential. Accredited certification demonstrates the ability to deliver consistently reliable, impartial, and accurate services, meeting internationally-recognised standards. This generates customer confidence in the companies that either hold or utilise services that have achieved accredited certification status. This is particularly important when dealing with homeowners regarding what can be a significant long term investment.

In addition to a positive effect on customers, accredited certification can benefit the business’ bottom line. At first glance achieving UKAS accredited certification status may appear to be yet another distraction that prevents time-strapped business owners from concentrating on providing the company’s core

|84| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

products or services. In fact the opposite is true, as accreditation can help those owners devote more time to the sharp end of their business. It also has a key role to play in saving businesses time and money.

Summary

The appointment of UKAS to support the Green Deal in this way is another indication of the government’s increasing use of accreditation to provide confidence in the services needed to deliver policy initiatives over a growing field of activity. In addition to providing end users with the necessary confidence in Green Deal installations, gaining accredited certification can confer a number of tangible benefits on an installers business.

UKAS is inviting expressions of interest from UK-based certification bodies to participate in pilot programmes for accredited certification of Green Deal assessors and installers. The pilot will provide the opportunity for certification bodies to achieve accreditation under EN 45011 for certification of installers and assessors against the specifications, which are currently being drafted.

DECC has indicated that limited financial support may be available for certification bodies participating in the pilot programme to assist with some of the accreditation costs. Further details of this support will be supplied by DECC at a later date.

Biomass heating – the

UK’s hottest opportunity!

By Neil Turner RES Group On 10 March 2011 the UK Government announced the biggest shake up of the heating industry in decades. The Renewable Heat Incentive (RHI) has been designed by the Department of Energy & Climate Change (DECC) to revolutionise the way buildings are heated and will mean biomass heating is financially the preferred choice in all commercial and public buildings. It is the first financial support scheme for renewable heat in the world!

The Triple Benefit As well as the income from the RHI, heat users benefit from the carbon savings achieved as they offset the Carbon Reduction Commitment (CRC) levy and from reduced use of counterfactual fuel (this is usually the incumbent fossil fuel such as gas, oil or LPG). This triple benefit (RHI, CRC and bill savings from displaced fossil fuel) makes biomass the UK’s most financially attractive fuel.

The tariffs have been set to achieve a 12% return on the additional cost of using biomass heating as an alternative to gas, therefore projects displacing oil or LPG can achieve even greater returns. It is estimated within DECC’s RHI Impact Assessment that nearly 50% of the £860million of Treasury funding for the RHI will be spent on biomass heating, which is over double the share of any other renewable energy technology. The funding is expected to stimulate £4.5 billion of capital investment up to 2020, which equates to an estimated 13,000 installations of renewable heating systems in the industrial sector as well as 110,000 installations in the commercial and public sector.

It is estimated within a DECC press release (March 2011) that 25% of the heat demand in the public and commercial sector will come from renewable sources by 2020 and biomass heating is vital for the UK to stay on track to meet its EU obligations of 20% of total energy from renewable energy by 2020. This means that biomass heat technologies and the RHI are set to transform the monitoring and delivery of heating, hot water and in some cases cooling within buildings.

Intelligently designed government scheme Set to begin on 30th September 2011, the details of the RHI released so far indicate an intelligently designed tiered tariff mechanism. The idea is that an income is guaranteed over a 20 year period as long as the equipment continues to work and deliver usable heat, but the tariff reduces significantly each and every year after 1314 hours of operation (this equates to a 15% load

factor, but in a conventional UK space heating demand profile this typically equates to over 50% of the annual load). This means there is a big incentive to deliver heat, but no incentive to over-consume fuel and waste heat.

Various further safe guards such as heat meters and spot checks are all going to be used to ensure the RHI is not abused and that the technology delivers on its promises.

This ‘policing’ of renewable heat is a massive wake up call for the heating industry and means there will be a new breed of renewable heat user focusing on whole life costs - selecting quality equipment that is well designed and capable of delivering heat for at least 20 years.

Over the last decade building-integrated renewable energy has mainly been installed in new developments to meet planning requirements such as the ‘Merton Rule’ (a percentage renewable energy requirement for new developments. For many Councils this has been a 10% target based on carbon or total onsite energy consumption. A number of Council’s have increased this requirement to 20%, which is highly challenging to achieve without the use of biomass heating). This policy and various grant programmes have enabled the biomass heating industry to flourish and quality fuel supply networks have developed. Procurement decisions are often based on biomass heating being the most cost effective onsite renewable energy to deliver carbon savings (project analysis nearly always shows biomass heating saves the most carbon at the lowest cost – ‘the £ spent to carbon saved ratio’). The ‘Merton Rule’ and grant programmes, although commendable for enabling the renewable energy market to develop, did not include any retribution if theoretical carbon savings were not achieved. This meant the construction industry could continue to drive down capital costs and some never delivered the carbon savings promised. The RHI completely changes this with payments made on a quarterly metered heat basis – the whole life cost is now critical to a projects success!

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |85|

Understanding the costs and benefits The RHI encourages the long-term delivery of renewable heating in existing buildings, so to fully realise the financial value of your asset you need to analyse the impact it is having on the reduction in consumption of your counterfactual fuel (fossil fuel boilers already onsite may continue to provide back up to the biomass boiler or be used in conjunction with the biomass boiler to meet a peak heat demand on the coldest days). To do this calculation it is essential to understand the difference between fuel going into a fossil fuel boiler and the actual heat delivered. For example, gas is bought and sold based on its Gross Calorific Value (GCV), not Net Calorific Value (NCV). In this case GCV is about 10% higher than its NCV (i.e. when gas is burnt, about 10% of the total energy it contains just goes into evaporating the water that is a product of its combustion). You also need to consider the efficiency of the gas boiler and only then can heat tariffs in terms of pence per kilowatt hour (p/kWh) be compared on a like for like basis.

Biomass tariffs and the RHI are quoted in terms of delivered heat, already taking into account calorific value and boiler efficiency. This key difference between the tariffs quoted on fuel bills and actual delivered heat is often misinterpreted in favour of fossil fuels.

Practicalities – Space and design requirements for biomass heating The next vital step is knowing if you have space for all the equipment. Biomass heating systems are bigger than their fossil fuel equivalents and the footprint depends on the size of the heating demand, the type of biomass fuel and several other site specifics described below.

Biomass boilers can be fuelled by either wood pellets or wood chip. Wood chips are lower cost per kWh of heat delivered than wood pellets, but require greater volumes due to its lower calorific value. Wood chip also has a tendency to form ‘chip bridges’ over equipment and require cajoling and agitating into the boiler through the use of rotary agitators, walking floor mechanisms or hydraulic rams. Chip designs also need an underground fuel store or even a transportable fuel store called a hook bin, otherwise it can become difficult and expensive to re-fuel. Pellets are more expensive per kWh of heat delivered, but have flowing properties and a higher energy density. This means the fuel handling equipment is simpler and has a smaller footprint than the chip equivalent. The fuel store can also be refilled by blowing pellets from a specialised, but widely available, vehicle.

In general, we favour wood chip for new developments when we can more easily influence the design of the building to favour wood chip and we encourage pellet for retrofit to existing buildings (where there are usually greater space and design constraints and to minimise significant building modifications).

As well as the large boiler and associated fuel store, some sites may also need an accumulator tank. This |86| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

technology can give many benefits including stopping the boiler inefficiently low load cycling (boiler turning on and off rapidly when there is small heat load). An accumulator tank can also meet a site peak heating demand at a particular time of day and ensure a constant supply of instantaneous hot water. The size and need for an accumulator tank is defined during the project scoping period and can sometimes be an essential part of good design.

Furthermore, depending on the emission requirements defined by the local authority, systems will need to suitably disperse and control emissions. This means particulate cyclones, ceramic filters and flue height options being considered as part of the design.

Finally, all of the equipment described above can be installed within your building or sit externally in a prefabricated plant room such as the ‘Green Heat Module’. If you believe you have the space and the heat demand then this technology is definitely the one for you!

Procurement We believe the RHI is going to drive procurement decisions in favour of ‘best value’ to the end user rather than ‘lowest cost’ meaning quality, efficient biomass heating systems. The track record and expertise of the designer and installer are critical to success. This contract can then be implemented as part of an energy service contract (heat sold on a p/kWh basis), a lease or a direct purchase. Under all scenarios planning permission will need to be sought and Ofgem will need to accredit the installation for RHI eligibility.

Once your RHI project is installed and running efficiently, output needs to be maintained for 20 years. Biomass boilers need regular operation and maintenance, available and responsive biomass engineering expertise and a continuous supply of fuel of the right quality, price and calorific value. An operative will also need to be trained onsite to empty the ash bin, order fuel, submit quarterly meter readings to Ofgem and receive regular fuel deliveries.

This may all seem overwhelmingly complicated, but thankfully there are companies out there that have been planning for the RHI for many years and are now ready to deliver your installation, look after it and fuel it for the next 20 years.

Standards needed in green tech gold rush

By Michael Pullan, Powerperfector There aren’t many companies which can claim to have created a whole new industry, but powerPerfector Ltd is one. The company introduced Voltage Power Optimisation (VPO)® technology to the UK in 2001 and has recently been recognised as the fastest growing ‘green’ company in the UK. Whether it is the cost of running delivery vehicles, or the high prices paid to heat buildings and run energy intensive machinery, industry is at the mercy of increases in fuel prices.

As energy sources from fossil fuels become increasingly scarce, supply and demand will dictate that prices follow an upward trend. Economic and political factors may introduce volatility which will create an unpredictable upward trend.

In many cases, how businesses adapt to this and meet their commitments to reduce costs and emissions will dictate if they survive or fail.

The good news is that solutions are out there. There are numerous technologies that can reduce carbon, slash energy bills and tick the CSR box on the demand side but only one technology secures a business’ electrical supply and thus protects business continuity. With all the choices out there knowing how to differentiate good technology from bad is a challenge.

Feed-in Tariffs created a rush for micro-generation. With onsite generation attracting a feed-in tariff of over 40p/

|88| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

kWh in some cases, the finances stacked up. However, the government’s decision to axe the subsidy is likely to mean that solar arrays or wind turbines will no longer appeal to the finance team, but may hold sway with management, PR and CSR - all keen to have a visible manifestation of an environmental policy.

Likewise energy efficiency measures such as movement sensitive lighting and water saving initiatives are visible and differentiate a company that is acting on carbon and cost.

But, with average energy savings of around 12 per cent, the single most effective measure businesses can implement is one that does not have the same visibility but is hidden away in a corner of the switch room. Voltage Power Optimisation generates energy and carbon savings by optimising electrical power quality and by supplying voltage at a more efficient level to the whole business.

It is a sector of the energy efficiency market that is growing at an astonishing rate, fuelled by the confluence of drivers that in part are defined as ‘business risks’.

Various technologies are being reconstituted, copied and re-positioned to offer a part solution to the marketplace.

Most of the technology, the people and products will be reliable, good, concerned and professional. Others will not be. The green revolution – like the gold rush and the dot-com boom – will attract substandard products as people seek to exploit an opportunity for quick profits as opposed to assisting in the creation of a respected sector that provides quality solutions.

Supply-side installations hold far more risk than demand-side ones – if low energy lights or motors fail it can be worked around – if the electrical supply goes down tens of thousands of pounds can be lost - let alone the damage to reputation. This is where the choices made can either endanger or protect business continuity.

When describing our own technology we can say that it is trusted by some of the biggest names in energy and

climate change. These include the energy regulator (Ofgem), the government’s climate change department (DECC), the UK’s main electricity distributor (National Grid), the UK’s biggest retailer (Tesco) and 9 other supermarket chains, the UK’s environmental guardians (Environment Agency), as well as 145 local authorities and over 20 government agencies. We have installed as many as 60 powerPerfectors a week so we really do understand risk for our client’s in this area as well.

However not all companies have the credibility afforded by the clients listed above. There is a need for greater regulation within the energy efficiency market. With no over-arching body to monitor and police false or exaggerated claims, companies have entered the Voltage Management sector with technology that does not perform as promoted.

ESTA’s endorsement of the International Performance, Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP), a robust, proven M and V protocol from the US, goes a long way to filling “the policing gap” in the sector. Its use is intended to be mandatory at some point in the future and clients can then have 100% confidence in true savings and suppliers 100% confidence in a level honest playing field – the snake oil salesmen will creep back under their rocks.

IPMVP brings reassurance for clients that the savings are real and auditable. Think twice about buying Energy Conservation Measures from any company that does not include this evaluation process.

Within the voltage management market there are a variety of offers. Each technology is slightly different and claim varying savings and performance capabilities.

So what criteria should energy professionals use when purchasing voltage management solutions?

Reliability - Make sure that the company’s technology has an unblemished reliability track record, otherwise you are risking business continuity.

Guarantee – If the guarantee is longer than the product’s market time how do you know it will last? And if it has been around a long time then what is different about it compared to other offerings?

may seem useful but savings can’t be measured live as you need comparative consumption data, so a product providing this is providing false information.

Measurement and Verification – A savings analysis should come in two parts; firstly a detailed savings plan, in which the site is analysed and a methodology for determining the savings is agreed upon, and secondly a savings report, which quantifies the avoided energy use.

Any measurement and verification strategy that does not have these two ingredients could be open to ambiguity, or worse, abuse, as the savings analysis can simply be thrown together after the energy conservation measure has been implemented.

IPMVP as mentioned before, is now the most widely used and recognised M&V protocol in the world. You can be sure savings calculated using IPMVP will be auditable and accurate if conducted by qualified practitioners – but make sure the practitioner is registered!

Price – The government spending review risks putting “best value procurement” at risk and raises the spectre of “lowest cost wins”. There will always be a cheaper product available if price is the main factor in decision making. The cheapest product is unlikely to provide the best value and in Voltage Management it will buy the highest risk.

Benchmarking – Make sure that the technology has been tried and tested. Review the case studies and testimonials of the company and then follow up by speaking to clients of the company.

Company reliability – Check the financials of the product seller – are they financially secure enough to pay out on their guarantees?

Finally, because of the critical point of the building at which Voltage Management technology sits, it is critical that you choose a robust, reliable solution. Failure is not an option.

Simplicity - As a rule of thumb, the fewer points of failure the better. Beware of ad hoc solutions which combine multiple separate components in one box to solve multiple problems. If it requires fan cooling it is not efficient and if the fan fails what is the danger of overheating? Moving parts can be a point of failure and at the critical point of the electrical supply they introduce unnecessary risk.

If a bypass is recommended – why - might it fail? If the supplier is not confident of their product, how can you be?

Bells and Whistles – Equipment showing savings live ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |89|

WATER Page 92 - 95 - Energy Factories - Richard Ratcliff, Water Sector Director for MWH Europe & Africa Page 96 - 97 - All Water Is Not Equal - Nick Reeves, Executive Director, CIWEM Page 98 - 99 - Sustainability Is Crucial - BMA

|90| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |91|

Energy Factories – what can the UK utilities learn from the rebranding of waste water treatment plants in the Netherlands?

Richard Ratcliff, Water Sector Director for MWH Europe & Africa reviews the UK implications of a report forecasting the future of sustainable Sewage Treatment Works (STW) as Energy Factories. In particular he looks at why the Dutch approach is giving them a huge lead over the rest of Europe.

In Holland, today no-one talks about building Waste Water Treatment (WWT) plants or Sewage Treatment Works (STW’s) - everything is branded as an Energy, Nutrient or Water Factory. Waste is beginning to be viewed positively as a resource. The positive effects of ‘rebranding’ of water and waste facilities as Energy Factories has caught the Dutch public’s imagination and made the wastewater industry of interest to them.

Energy Factories are capitalising on the public appetite for all things sustainable, carbon neutral and energy efficient. Perception is very positive and the public are very supportive of government investment of public funds into research and development (R&D) and construction.

In 2008 STOWA (The Dutch Foundation for Applied Water Research) appointed MWH to produce a report -The Dutch Roadmap for the Water and Waste Treatment Plant of 2030. This was part of an international research project they commissioned to define what the municipal

|92| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Sewage Treatment Works (STW) of 2030 should look like. In the report MWH identified how STW’s could generate surplus energy by 2030 and that the way ahead lay with three new design concepts – for Energy, Nutrient and Water Factories. These will recover valuable resources from sewage waste delivering sustainability and energy reductions of around 40% across the asset base.

The first of these concepts to be developed is the Energy Factory, with 13 of the 26 water authorities in the Netherlands now completing feasibility studies.

By upgrading existing STWs, these studies show that energy-neutral, and even energy-generating STWs, are technologically possible. By minimising energy consumption through process optimisations on the one hand, and by maximising energy production through enhanced digestion on the other, huge efficiencies can be made. Enhanced primary sedimentation through the addition of chemicals appears to be the key to become almost energy neutral.

Thermal hydrolysis of waste activated sludge is an additional measure to eventually become energy producing.

Continuous innovation and energy reduction

These concepts are taking off in the Netherlands because the Dutch wastewater authorities need to continuously innovate to manage rising energy prices and energy efficiency agreements with their government. They have committed to a two per cent reduction in energy usage, year on year, until 2030. And this in turn has created the impetus for the industry to rebrand and reformulate their wastewater treatment plants as Energy Factories.

The re-brand has been achieved by collaboration across water companies and between the water and waste sectors. Currently this doesn’t happen in the UK or only on a very limited scale. To a large degree this is because of restrictions and legislative barriers which prevent the UK industry taking a holistic view of how the future might work. If these barriers were removed the UK industry could easily emulate the approach being taken in the Netherlands.

A long term view leading to full lifecycle efficiencies

The Dutch also have the benefit of taking the long term view. They are focusing medium term on finding energy neutral solutions and longer term on how they can create the processes to fulfil their legislated requirements. This has driven innovation and new ways of thinking such as the re-branding in order to future proof their industry. In contrast, the UK is severely restricted by its five year investment cycles with only a set amount of money. If the restraints of five year planning were removed then we could start to make changes and increase our power consumption and / or generation from these types of sites in the UK. Long term planning also leads to full lifecycle efficiencies as there are no ‘stranded assets’ and benefits can be accrued over 30 years. In the UK, our five year investment cycle is a very short term and can lead to stranded assets and lost opportunities. Over 30 years you can look strategically at your asset base and look for radical solutions.

Strategic R&D

The Dutch are not afraid to trial things and if it doesn’t work, well then it doesn’t work and they move on to the next thing. In the UK this kind of investment is seen as capital outlay which must generate a return. This makes us quite reserved in terms of R&D into new technologies and in practice |94| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

means we tend to only put in proven or tried and tested technologies. You could say the UK industry is forced to play it safe.

Despite being publicly owned, the Dutch utilities benefit from government commitment to research and development and wide-scale public support. The push to reduce energy consumption has been the catalyst for the Netherlands to invest in strategic R&D to develop new technologies they can share and this is now giving them an impressive lead over other countries. In the UK, as we no longer create such technologies ourselves, we are beginning to implement some of the new Dutch technologies. For example United Utilities, Severn Trent and Anglian Water are putting in low carbon Dutch technology for the treatment of high strength ammoniacal liquors.

Collaboration is key

Another big advantage the Dutch have is their very real culture of collaboration especially among the Dutch water sector, utilities and government. The industry has developed generic energy factory flow sheets for short and medium term approaches, as well as the long term strategic NEWater 2030 roadmap.

Many of the energy factories business cases have been developed with multiple consultancy involvement, leading to best practise solutions for specific sites.

Some water companies are coming together to develop energy factories in order to produce the most holistic and sustainable solution. This collaboration has even extended to joint collaboration with regional waste companies. This is leading to concepts which optimise the energy balance and also maximise the ability to reuse energy (heat) sources. At the moment there is the intention for Energy Factories in Den Bosch (400.000 p.e), Tilburg and Amersfoort.

The Dutch government funds and collaborates with consultants, water companies and universities – looking at the blue sky, trialling and developing new technologies.

These collaborations lead to new products and processes which in turn lead to commercial products. We now have a very different culture in the UK and we do very little R&D and minimal collaboration.

Waste as a valuable resource

Currently the focus in Holland is on Energy Factories, but the challenge is to combine the three concepts into one: the Nutrient_Energy_Waterfactory: NEWs. The STW of the future will be a NEWater factory, where waste is seen as a valuable resource, Each concept involves a different set of treatment techniques and the capital cost will play an important role in the selection of the treatment technologies within all three concepts. The Energy factory aims at maximising energy recovery from sewage sludge, whereas the Nutrient factory aims at recovering valuable resources (phosphorus) from wastewater. The Water factory aims at reusing wastewater for different purposes, such as process water, boiler feed water, recreation water and agricultural water.

These NEWater factory concepts are transferable to the UK water industry, which is increasingly under pressure to reduce energy consumption and maximise renewable energy generation. Additionally, UK water companies are now recognising the real need to recovery and recycle phosphorus as its global price increases and its global reserves reduce. So if there is a will there is definitely a way to create UK Energy Factories.

A copy of the report is available by contacting STOWA

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |95|

A L L W A T E R I S N O T E Q U A L

Access to clean water is a basic human right, but not all of it, says CIWEM executive director, Nick Reeves.

Fresh water is finite. But it’s a message that doesn’t work and we continue to be profligate. A growing population and growing demand for food and manufactured goods means that water tables around the world are falling fast. And when, earlier this year, the government considered the use of water canon to cool the passions of protesting students nobody suggested that it might be an entirely inappropriate use of a precious resource – both wasteful and unethical.

So, with the melody of distant rioting drifting on the wind and preparations for the London Olympics adding a sighing counterpoint, what better time to consider the really important things in life and ask: what price the value of water?

July and August 2010 signalled the driest summer on record and Cumbria was hit by hosepipe restrictions. Despite the floods a few months earlier this normally ‘wet’ and beautiful part of Britain – beloved of artists, writers and naturalists down the years - was dry and the reservoirs half empty. To the experts and to locals this came as no surprise. Only the media looking for a ‘silly season’ story was incredulous.

The Cumbrian landscape and pasture lies atop hard impervious rock and most of the flood water ended up in the sea via hills and the rivers. Unlike the south east – where water is absorbed by spongy limestone and stored in aquifers - the hot, dry summer of 2010 was, for Cumbria, very bad news.

It exposed an urgent need to think about water differently and to manage it much more efficiently.

It may be de rigueur to rubbish the IPCC and its evidence for climate change but the extremes of wet and dry will become more frequent and more damaging as global warming bites. But, what happened in Cumbria was a little local difficulty. In some parts of the world, water and the lack of it, is a matter of life and

|96| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

death.

Still bathing in the selfreflecting glow and glory of a successful football World Cup, you might be forgiven for thinking that South Africa is a country on top of its game and equal to any challenge: social, political, economic or environmental. And you might not be wrong.

South Africa, the soi-disant rainbow nation, is full of confidence and bravado and understands its problems only too well. Better than most other countries, it is preparing for the devastating effects of an emerging global water crisis.

South Africa has had to confront, headon, an issue that others are only now beginning to understand. Water – and how we rise to the challenge of enough for all is the big green issue and narrative that will come to define the 21st century.

It’s true to say that few countries include a reference to the right of access to water in their constitutions. South Africa’s constitution does and should be applauded. Most of the rest of the world’s attitude to water is wrong-headed and arrogant, and is wholly unsustainable. Global water requirements are expected to grow by over 50 per cent by 2030 according to a recent report by McKinsey for the Water Resources Group. In 20 years time water withdrawals will exceed natural renewal by more than 60 per cent, mostly at the expense of water required for the environment and at the expense of the poorest and most vulnerable.

With our eye off the ball, our attention has been taken by the threat of peak oil and depleting fossil fuels. We have been largely ignoring the far more serious threat of peak water. Unless radical changes are made, soon, we will run out of water first. The number of people (around one billion) without access to clean water, now, will escalate, heralding an unprecedented humanitarian and ecological disaster.

Water-wars are not only a real possibility – they are happening now.

The era of water waste and water at throwaway prices is near its end, and procrastinating politicians will need to act. It’s time to set a price that more accurately values our most precious natural resource. The OECD and the World Bank are moving to this point of view, and have recently published reports suggesting the setting of a better price for water.

Sadly, progress has been trumped by a debate that has been polarised and over simplistic. Yet the experience of South Africa teaches us that this does not need to be a binary decision. Its introduction of a household monthly allocation via its free basic water subsidy programme allows for essential sanitation, cooking, and drinking water, while charging the full cost of the infrastructure for additional and non-essential use.

Other countries can learn from this step pricing approach that keeps the ideologically-inclined (like me), regardless of ideology, content. It recognises that not all water use should be regarded as equal. While it is a basic human right to have access to subsidised (or free) water for hygiene and hydration, why should filling a swimming pool or washing your car or watering a lawn be priced in exactly the same way? Full cost recovery for these activities will not only ensure that we are more careful and ethical in our use, but will also, crucially, help improve our leaky and outmoded infrastructure. In the poorest areas, it will also help to extend pipes so that water reaches more homes.

But any improvements in domestic supply and use will come to nothing unless we alter our approach to agriculture radically. Farming takes up 70 per cent of global water usage. Setting aside the huge volumes of embedded water in the products we buy, it is here that the greatest difference can be made.

But progress has been frustratingly slow so far. And politicians are the great flaneurs of agricultural policy.

With the global population set to increase from six billion to 11 billion by 2050, or maybe sooner, and with little sign that action to stem population growth and consumption will happen anytime soon, improving agricultural productivity is fundamental to helping

address water shortages and increasing crop yield. Measures such as no tillage-farming, improved drainage, drip and sprinkler irrigation and crop yield enhancement can all increase output, many of them at low cost.

A rise in water prices for non-essential use would also improve efficiency. A recent OECD report into water management in agriculture, for example, has shown that, in areas where the price of water for agriculture has increased, agricultural production has been unaffected. It highlights the example of Australia, which was able to cut irrigation and water use by half without a loss of output.

More interesting is the story of the aflaj, ancient irrigation systems in Oman, with tradable water rights and more than 4,000 years of efficient and sustainable water use.

Water should have an adequate price for any use as a commercial good but different principles apply for water as a means of maintaining health and well-being and environmental benefit.

It is the responsibility of all involved in water management and agriculture to help farmers find ways to improve their water efficiency. This should take the form of training, and the promotion of water stewardship, technical help or assistance through micro-finance. After all, industry uses twice as much water as households, and often in a less efficient way. And farming is one of a few of the most important of professions, where anyone – literally – can practice, without any qualifications or experience at all.

Governments, too, have to recognise water for the precious resource that it is, and price it accordingly. If last year’s focus on South Africa and the World Cup can help highlight the benefits of flexible pricing, this will – despite the terrible performance of the England football team – have been a successful World Cup. Meantime the UN have passed a resolution which acknowledges that access to clean, safe water is a basic human right. All countries, bar two, put their full weight behind it. The UK and the US abstained. Read in to that what you will.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |97|

Sustainability is crucial

By BMA (Bathroom Manufacturers Association) There is one topic above all others which has a relevance in any country of the world. In some it is a priority and in others less so. Sustainability.

This topic - the delicate balance between people and their environment – is more crucial than ever to our survival.

In history, where sustainability failed, the consequences were devastating.

The recent dreadful drought in the Horn of Africa shows yet again that the local population is at the mercy of the weather. Closer to home the driest Spring on record in parts of Europe has left us with the lowest reservoirs in living memory and closer still DEFRA announced drought conditions in parts of east Anglia and the Midlands just a couple of months ago.

Water efficiency, and with it energy efficiency and lean and mean manufacturing, are key to our long

term survival and the British government has announced that it is one of its priorities.

The UK Bathroom Industry has recognised for a long time that it has a responsibility to ensure that its products are the most water and energy efficient and in less than a decade the product portfolios of members of the BMA have been completely overhauled. Bathroom products are more sustainable than ever.

Bathroom manufacturers have responded vigorously to the drive for water and energy efficiency and they are playing an increasingly important role in designing and developing sustainable products. Drawing boards are full of ideas and virtually every new product now brought to market has sustainability embedded into its ‘DNA’.

Members of the BMA are leading the drive for water efficiency both in their development of products and the creation of water efficiency ‘tools’.

PRODUCTS We have seen some interesting and quite major breakthroughs recently and many of the products installed in today’s bathroom have been affected.

WCs, with super-efficient flush, are now common place.

They no longer grace the portfolios of a select few top-end manufacturers. They are now more widespread, and reliable branded products, which conform with the regulations and are guaranteed to actually work, are here to stay.

Effective average flush volumes of 3 litres are available at realistic prices and are no longer ‘special.’ At least one product has been launched in the last twelve months which

|98| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

combines the function of the washbasin with the WC. Waste from the basin is diverted and stored in the cistern prior to being used to flush the toilet. This type of breakthrough thinking is both surprising and effective.

Taps with built in eco-click and thermo regulating valves are freely available. These not only save water but save energy and are ultra-safe in the family bathroom.

Manufacturers Association in their work to develop a labelling scheme which provides people with an easy means to identify water efficient products.”

The statement from the DEFRA Minister shows that he and his department fully support the work of the BMA in driving the quest for water and energy efficient bathroom products.

Eco-friendly shower controls and shower heads have enjoyed massive growth over the last few years. These, like click-taps, show huge savings in both water and energy consumption. The technology used to develop and manufacture these excellent devices is advancing fast.

It was not so long back when the average new bath was filled with around 200 litres. Today, without much effort, a consumer can find a really comfortable bath with a capacity of just 130 litres. The most recent launch saw a bath of just 75 litres.

The product data stored in the database has now been put to good use in the new Water Calculator which is designed to make it easier for developers and builders to meet the new water-efficiency requirements of Part G of the Building Regulations and the Code for Sustainable Homes. The calculator was designed and developed by the BMA in association with Waterwise East.

TOOLS But how would a prospective bathroom buyer, whether a trade professional or a man in the street, choose the very best bathroom to suit their requirements?

“They need the tools to do the job,” says Yvonne Orgill, chief executive of the BMA. “Our staff, who are now based in low carbon offices at Keele University Innovation Centre, have worked hard recently to develop the Water Efficient Product Labelling Scheme (WEPLS) and the new Water Calculator.”

WEPLS has grown rapidly from a germ of an idea to a benchmark scheme which is now being copied in Europe and wider afield. The web-enabled database holds the details of over 1500 water efficient bathroom products which, by default, have the lowest carbon footprint. The scheme is increasingly recognised by consumers and professionals alike and from the Government’s point of view it is an important tool in their drive to meet the Green Agenda. Over 1100 stockists have registered their details with the scheme. www.water-efficiencylabel.org. uk/

The Water Calculator at www.thewatercalculator.org.uk is the first of its kind and includes water-consumption information so that builders and developers can simply select from a drop-down menu of products to calculate the water consumption of a property.

The tool auto-completes the calculations enabling quick and easy specification without the hassle of gathering data from product manufacturers. The results can then be printed off to give to Building Control inspectors and others involved in the assessment process.

“BMA members are encouraged by the very positive reaction to their work in developing these tools” says Orgill. “The bathroom industry is playing its part in driving for a more sustainable future.”

The key to WEPLS is the product label itself which is similar in design to the familiar energy label found on white goods. It clearly shows the volume of water that the product will consume if installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

In a recent statement Richard Benyon, Parliamentary Under-Secretary of State at the Department for the Environment, Food and Rural Affairs, DEFRA, praised and supported the scheme.

He said “Water is an invaluable resource which needs to be managed responsibly. Whilst Government and industry can help make it easier to save water, taking personal responsibility is at the heart of water conservation.

People need access to clear advice on how they can save water so I am pleased to support the Bathroom ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |99|

LAND MANAGEMENT Page 102 - 105 - A Client’s Guide to Professional Indemnity Insurance - The Association of Geotechnical & Geoenvironmental Specialists Page 106 - 111 - Stabilisation and Solidification of Contaminated Soil and Waste Part 3: Treatment of Inorganic Contaminants - Dr Colin Hills, Director, Centre for Contaminated Land Remediation, University of Greenwich

|100| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |101|

A Client’s Guide to Professional Indemnity Insurance

By The Association of Geotechnical & Geoenvironmental Specialists The Association of Geotechnical & Geoenvironmental Specialists (AGS) is a non-profit making trade association established to improve the profile and quality of geotechnical and geoenvironmental engineering.

Consultants (including contractors undertaking design work) hold Professional Indemnity Insurance in order to protect themselves against negligence claims. Clients do not always appreciate that PI insurance is in place primarily to protect the interests of the insured and not those of his client.

This guidance has been prepared by the AGS to assist clients to better understand PI Insurance issues and the need or agreement with their geotechnical and geoenvironmental advisors and designers on the most sensible allocation of financial risk.

In order for any PI policy to be triggered the claimant (usually the client) has to establish the advisor’s legal liability for the losses that he has incurred but the legal process can be lengthy, uncertain and expensive.

Although many potential clients believe otherwise, it is not an insurance policy that can be called upon directly to cover the client’s ‘first party’ losses.

A client has only effectively transferred a risk when he can be properly reimbursed for any financial loss that flows from that risk. A risk transferred through a contract of appointment where the financial consequences cannot be borne by the recipient is not a managed risk.

As advisors and designers, the majority of AGS Members have few liquid assets and are, in the main, dependent on their PI policy to pay out on liabilities for their advice or design. If they breach their policy conditions or if the settlement is greater than the amount insured then it is the client as claimant that suffers.

This guide aims to assist clients to better understand PI insurance issues and the need for agreement with their advisors and designers on the most sensible allocation of financial risk.

Professional Indemnity Insurance: Some Basic Principles There are a number of important aspects of PI insurance which can act against the recovery of loss under a PI policy. |102| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

• The claimant needs to prove the insured’s legal liability for the loss suffered. Losses can occur even when no liability attaches to the advisor.

•

PI insurance is generally only available for periods of twelve months so the advisors need to renew their cover arrangements on an annual basis. A failure to do so would leave the advisor uninsured.

•

In common law countries, PI policies generally operate on what is known as a "claims made" basis.

This means that it is the policy in force when the insured party first notifies a claim (or a circumstance that might give rise to a claim) to his insurers which applies. The policy, if any, that may have been in place when the appointment was made, or when the alleged breach of contract or negligence arose, is irrelevant.

•

Policies will either be on a ‘costs inclusive’ or on a ‘costs in addition’ basis. The former means that the legal costs have to be paid out of the insured sum before paying the claimant, while in the latter the full amount of the insured sum is available to the claimant with all legal costs being paid by the insurer ‘in addition’ to the sum insured.

This latter basis is therefore of greater potential benefit to clients who could be inadequately reimbursed for their losses if the insured had his PI on the former ‘costs inclusive’ basis.

•

Advisor appointments may involve periods of potential liability over a number of years. Therefore, should an advisor fail to renew its annual cover, it is effectively uninsured for any work undertaken at any time in the past, leaving the potential claimant unable to recover their loss through PI Insurance.

•

PI policies in the future may not be available at commercially acceptable premiums or may not be available at all to cover the type of work originally carried out by the advisor.

•

An insurance company may not be able to pay a settled claim if it goes into liquidation prior to the date of settlement despite the claim having been properly notified within the policy conditions. It would then fall to the insured to settle the claim from their assets.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |103|

Clients need to be aware that there can be no guarantee that a PI policy will be in place when a claim is made or that the insurance company itself will be able to pay out on the settlement in the future.

The excess (or deductible) is the part of any claim that is paid by the insured as opposed to the insurer. It is not unusual for these to be set at significant levels, perhaps as much as 1% of the insured’s annual fee income.

The insured will need to be able to fund this excess themselves otherwise the insurer may be able to avoid the whole claim.

The limit of indemnity, as chosen by every insured party, is the maximum amount that insurers will pay. The limit can operate either on an "each and every" claim basis, meaning that the full limit of indemnity under the policy applies separately to each claim which might arise during the period of insurance or on an "aggregate" basis, meaning that the limit of indemnity applies as a maximum total payment irrespective of the number of claims notified during the period of insurance.

It is in the interest of the client that the advisor maintains cover on an "each and every" basis except where the insurance market can only provide “aggregate” cover such as for pollution and contamination or where aggregate cover is the only cover available at commercially viable premiums. |104| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

As with all insurance products, exclusions are incorporated into PI policies. The most notable exclusions, of which clients should be aware, are:•

•

• •

claims involving responsibility for strict liabilities such as fitness for purpose and other similar contractual guarantees that are not subject to the test of negligence. fines, penalties and liquidated damages (including contractual penalty clauses). liability to pay under any bonding arrangements claims within ‘each and every’ cover which are limited in the aggregate

Agreeing Limits of PI Indemnity An important aspect of many AGS Members’ advisor appointments is the extent to which the client requires them to carry PI insurance and, if so, for what period of time.

The requirement should reflect the actual loss that might arise which in turn will depend upon a number of interrelated factors such as:•

•

•

•

the nature of the advisory services to be provided and the size and complexity of the project. the method of procurement adopted and the extent to which financial losses may be incurred if, for example, the project is delivered late. the extent of any high risk activities such as work on contaminated land and the level of fees being earned by the engineering consultancy on the project. the extent to which any design work might be used on a repeat basis.

Clients are advised to require their advisors to carry a reasonable limit of indemnity to meet their potential financial liabilities subject to its availability at commercially reasonable rates.

•

will only be liable for that proportion of any loss which is directly related to their own actions. a clear point in time, from completion of the services, after which the advisor will be freed from liability and any requirement to maintain PII on the appointment.

It is important for clients to satisfy themselves that the PI arrangements put in place by the advisors they retain are in accordance with the requirements of the conditions of engagement.

As PI claims can take a considerable period of time to settle, clients should also seek reassurance that the advisors and designers they employ only place cover with reputable insurers having a long term commitment to the class of business - even if this means higher premiums and higher fees.

If in any particular circumstance a client feels that the level of his advisor’s PI is inadequate, the client can either make arrangements for the consultant to increase the level of cover - in return for payment of any additional premium that is required or make his own alternative arrangements to ensure that additional finance will be available if required.

Agreeing Limits of Financial Liability As advisors are generally only able to fund risk to the extent that it can be insured, clients should accept that caps on financial liability agreed in the appointment contract must in some way relate to the PI available to the advisor. In this way, both clients and their advisors achieve a degree of certainty as to the liabilities of each to the other.

This strategy offers better protection to the client than imposing onerous liabilities for which there is no possibility of protection by insurance.

Unlimited liability only exists in theory.

Recommendations The continued availability of adequate Professional Indemnity Insurance is clearly in the interest of all clients.

To achieve this, their advisors and designers need to be able to present a risk profile that is reasonable as to amount, certain as to time and based on the discharge of their own responsibilities rather than those of others.

As a result clients are advised to incorporate the following provisions into their appointment documents:•

•

a provision that limits the advisor’s liability to an amount no greater than the amount recoverable under his PI arrangements. a "net contribution" clause such that the advisor ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |105|

Stabilisation and Solidification of Contaminated Soil and Waste Part 3: Treatment of Inorganic Contaminants

By Dr Collin Hills, Director, Centre for Contaminated Land Remediation, University of Greenwich Scope This is the third part of an occasional series of articles on stabilisation/solidification (s/s) technology. Previously, s/s has been introduced as a risk management strategy and the interaction of cement-based binders and soil has been discussed. Dr Colin Hills Director of the Centre for Contaminated Land Remediation at the University of Greenwich is joined in this article by Edward Bates, recently retired from the US Environmental Protection Agency, who was deeply involved in the application and regulation of s/s in that country for 30 years, and Dr Peter Gunning of Carbonate Systems Ltd. In this article, stabilisation/solidification (s/s) is presented in respect to the fixation of inorganic compounds in s/s waste forms.

Introduction The establishment of a stable chemical environment during s/s is achieved through the appropriate selection of binding agents, uniquely formulated for each application. Contaminants are immobilised by chemical processes including adsorption, hydrolysis and precipitation and are physically trapped by (the waste forms) low permeability, thereby isolating them from leaching solutions, such as groundwater or rainfall.

The effective use of s/s has been demonstrated with a range of inorganic contaminant groups, as shown in Table 1, produced by the Interstate Technology and Regulatory Council (ITRC, 2011). The s/s of organics is discussed further in the next article in this series. A thorough review of the literature on the use of s/s to immobilise contaminants is available (Environment Agency, 2004) The majority of sites remediated by s/s under the Superfund program have been contaminated with metals or mixtures of metals and inorganic compounds, as shown in Figure 1. A useful update to source treatment technologies (including s/s) to 2008, for both in-situ and ex-situ remedial operations is given by the US EPA (2010). A recent examination of aged waste forms has demonstrated the efficacy of treatment for both organic and inorganic contaminants over time (PASSiFy, 2010).

The physical and chemical processes by which anionic and cationic contaminants interact with cement-based binders assists in the choice of treatment of waste and soil, although consideration of the contaminated matrix is needed if remedial targets are to be met and maintained.

|106| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

The interaction of contaminants with soil and/or binder involves a number of ‘fixation’ mechanisms, which include: • • •

•

•

adsorption to binder-soil matrices; pH-dependent precipitation; redox-controlled precipitation of insoluble compounds; absorption/encapsulation into and onto nano-porous C-S-H gel; and incorporation into crystalline components of the cement matrix.

The interaction of metal contaminants and clayey soils involves cation exchange (see article 2) in accordance with the lyotropic series. This relationship is significantly influenced by a soils organic content, mineral composition, and the prevailing pH and Eh conditions.

However, soil clay fraction/binder-relationship provides the long-term stabilising process primarily centred upon adsorption and metal precipitation.

The alkaline pore fluid of cement-based systems promotes the precipitation of insoluble compounds such as metal hydroxides, but the longer-term maintenance of pH is dependent on the impact of environmental loads experienced in service. As such, the long-term release of contaminants from treated soil or waste will eventually occur but should not present a significant risk.

Adsorption in binder-soil matrices Adsorption in binder-soil matrices is achieved at high pH when metals have a strong affinity to the surface of clays. However, as natural groundwater tends to be acidic (rather than alkaline), the long-term neutralising capacity of a binder system is important. For example, the work of Astrup et al. (2001, 2003) concluded that a particular s/s system was capable of performing (i.e. retaining a pH >9) for ca. 100,000 years, illustrating the resilience of s/s waste forms to withstand environmental loading. pH-dependent precipitation Precipitation of salts from solution is pH dependent (see article 2). As well as facilitating the surface adsorption of metal ions, high concentration of OH- ions in solution can promote the formation of metal complexes and the precipitation of metal salts. Factors such as pH, Eh ion exchange capacity, and complexation/chelation with organic matter may directly affect metal solubility in cement-bound system.

Table 1: Effectiveness of S/S Treatment for inorganic Chemical Groups (after ITRC, 2011) Chemical Groups

Citations For Treatment Effectiveness EPA 1993

EPA 2009

Volatile Metals

D

D

Non-Volatile Metals

D

D

Asbestos

D

D

Radioactive Materials

D

D

Inorganic Corrosives

D

D

Inorganic Cyanides

D

D

Mercury

D

D

Oxidizers

D

D

Reducers

D

D

Other References

Inorganic Chemicals

EPA 2007

Reactive Chemicals

Effectiveness Key: N = No expected effectiveness P = Potential effectiveness D = Demonstrated effectiveness Reference sources: US EPA 1993; 2007; 2009

Figure 1a: Contaminants treated by s/s under the Superfund Program (US EPA 2000)

Redox-controlled precipitation The redox environment can be controlled in a waste form by use of a tailored binder system. Generally, however, cements typically used promote oxidising conditions, with typical Eh values between +100 and +200 mV due primarily to dissolved oxygen (Taylor 1997). When ground granular blast furnace slag GGBS containing sulphur is used, low Eh values, in the order of –350 to –450 mV are possible and can limit the mobility of metals such as Cr and Mn. In practice, kinetic considerations and the depletion of oxygen by bioactive soil may keep Eh values low over the longer-term.

Cement phases The performance of cement phases is key to successful

Figure 1b: Binder materials used for s/s under the Superfund Program (US EPA 2000)

s/s. Table 2 summarises the phases commonly associated with Portland cement, and their generalised properties.

Calcium silicate hydrate (C-S-H) is a gelatinous phase that is known to be geologically persistent for thousands of years. C-S-H has a nanoporous structure and a high specific surface area (between 10 and 50 m2g-1) to which both anions and cations may be sorbed, and thus ‘immobilised’. The surface charge of C-S-H varies with its composition, and is about zero when the calcium:silicon ratio (c/s) is about 1.2. By altering this c/s ratio via binder selection, preferential binding can be achieved. For example, Ca-rich C-S-H has a positive surface charge and attracts anions, whereas Si-rich C-S-H favours the ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |107|

Figure 2

sorption of cations. When GGBS-blended binders are used, c/s ratios of <0.8, favour the sorption of cations (Harris et al., 2002).

Isomorphic substitution of calcium ions for other divalent cations of similar size including strontium, barium and lead is possible. Metals may also substitute for silicon and become chemically incorporated into the C-S-H. Contaminants can become incorporated into newly formed solid, crystalline phases and compound-specific interactions are possible. Portlandite (calcium hydroxide) Table 2: Summary of cement hydrates and their properties

buffers the pore solution pH to 12.5, but its interaction with metallic compounds is limited. Ettringite can however, incorporate metals in its crystalline structure.

The trivalent metals: Fe3+, Cr3+, Mn3+, and Ti3+ can substitute for Al3+, and Ca2+can be replaced by Mg2+, Zn2+, Mn2+, Fe2+, Co2+, Pb2+, Cd2+ and Cu2+. The replacement of SO42- by a range of oxyanions such as CrO42-, AsO43-, SeO42-, IO3-, CO32-, NO3- can also occur and small organic molecules may occupy the channel sites within the ettringite structure.

Monosulphate and tetracalcium aluminate hydrate behave similarly to ettringite. The anions SO42- and OHcan enter interstitial and interlayer sites of this phase.

Phase

Key properties

Significance to s/s

Calcium silicate hydrate (C-S-H)

Gel-phase, high surface area, highly hydrated, variable c/s ratio, fills pores

Sorptive capability. Can incoporate divalent and trivalent ions in its structure. C-S-H can be modified to regulate the redox environment of a waste form

Portlandite

Plate-like crystals, fills pores

The key buffering phase, maintaining pH â&#x2030;&#x2C6; 12.5

Ettringite (or Aft)

Prismatic crystals

Can incorporating metals, anions and organic molecules in its structure

Monosulphate (or AFm)

Plate-like crystals (behaves similar to ettringite)

Similar to ettringite, as can substitute metals and anions into its structure

|108| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Table 3: Additives used to treat problem metals (after Conner 1997) Additive Contaminant

Fly/ bed bed ash

Ca(OH)2

FeSO4

CaCO3

NaCO3

NaCl

Na2SO4

Organo sulphur

Carbon

Ca(OCl)2/ NaOCl

KMnO4

•

•

Na2S2O4

Na2S/ Sulphur

Antimony Arsenic (5+)

•

Arsenic (3+)

•

•

Arsenicorgano Compounds

•

•

Barium

•

•

•

•

Barillium Cadmium

•

Chromium (3+)

•

Chromium (6+)

•

•

•

•

Chromium complexes Lead, conventional

• •

•

•

•

•

Lead-organo compounds

•

Lead elemental Mercury conventional

•

•

• •

•

•

Mercuryorgano compounds

•

Mercury elemental

•

Nickel conventional

•

Nickel cyanide complexes

•

•

Nickel organo complexes

•

•

Selenium Conventional

•

Selenium/ selenate

•

• •

•

•

Silver

•

Thallium

S/S Experience with Inorganic Contaminants The variable chemical and physical properties of contaminants will have influence the efficacy of s/s treatment. For example, in soil or waste containing transition metals, a reduction in oxidation state may sometimes be required to produce compounds that are insoluble. Guidance on specific treatments can be found in Conner (1997).

When cement or lime-based systems are used during s/s, the high pH favours the precipitation of metal hydroxides, hydrous oxides or carbonates. However, only soluble salts will be incorporated into the structure of hydrated cement phases. Thus, the chemical nature of contaminants will, to a large extent, govern how they can be ‘fixed’ by s/s.

Oxyanions may require pre-treatment prior because they |110| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

can be highly soluble and difficult to solidify. Conner (1990) describes a number of systems that have been specifically formulated for treating oxyanions.

Chromates and dichromates are highly soluble and treatment may involve reduction prior to s/s. Arsenic can present multiple species at any one time depending on binder choice. Arsenic is often considered a problem metal, but has been effectively treated at a number of sites in the USA using for example, cement, phosphate, ferric sulphate and asphalt.

In the selection of pre-treatment methods, careful consideration must be given to the effects on other contaminants present. Table 3 (modified from Conner, 1997) gives pre-treatment methods for a range of metal presented for s/s.

Conner (1990) reviewed the options available for fluoride, cyanide and other inorganic compounds. Very soluble salts such as fluoride may be difficult to s/s due to high leaching. Chlorides are problematic and can accelerate cement setting. The sulphides of Hg or As may be stable at high pH, whereas nitrate salts are highly soluble and the choice of binder is very important for successful s/s.

The importance of pH on Hg availability is highlighted by the relative stability of cinnabar at pH 5. At higher and lower pH this compound becomes increasingly soluble.

Cyanides may readily combine with some metals and form simple compounds of sodium, potassium, calcium, zinc and copper. Cyanide complexes involve both organic and inorganic molecules, but, because of the toxicity of cyanide compounds, they can destroyed by oxidation, prior to s/s.

Metal’s including Zn, Cd and Pb in ash and foundry dusts have been effectively treated by binders containing GGBS or PFA. Stabilising reagents such as soluble phosphates, soluble silicates or kiln dusts may also be added to binders to improve performance.

Technology Limitations The success of s/s to treat specific waste or soil containing organic or inorganic compounds may depend on both the use of pre-treatment and the choice of binder.

However some inorganic materials are difficult to treat because of the complex nature of chemical and physical interference effects (Bates, 2010). Simple problems such as inadequate mixing of binder and soil/waste, too high moisture content or aggregation into clumps can also be an issue. Factors to be considered include: •

•

•

the physical characteristics of the soil/waste being treated; sands and silts are easiest while clays may produce mixing issues the environment into which the treated material is to be placed (ex-situ treatment) or that it exists in (in-situ treatment) logistical/economic/time constraints.

strongly interfere with s/s through sorption, complexation and precipitation reactions. Adsorption onto C-S-H to form an impervious coating can stifle hydration reactions.

The interference of boron was improved by the use of activated PFA during s/s to form a precipitate of NaB(OH)4 . The precipitate was then physically encapsulated in the treated product and leaching of B reduced by 100x (Palomo and de la Fuente, 2003).

The effect of anions is also important as, for example, sulphate can react with cement-hydrates to cause expansive ettringite formation and matrix expansion. In practice, mixtures of inorganic and organic contaminants are common and are routinely treated. Bates et al.

(1999) reported a range of proprietary s/s systems used at a number of wood preserving sites and showed that despite the mixture of metals and organics present (including As, Cr, Cu, Pb, Zn), s/s was effective. One site, American Creosote in Tennessee, contained mixed metals and organics and was treated with cement, fly ash and activated carbon. Figure 2 shows the pugmill treatment during operation.

The appropriate use of bench trials will enable the interference effects to be identified and eliminated. The bench-scale testing of a number of wood preserving sites is described by Bates et al. (2000). The full-scale remedial operation at the American Creosote Site is also discussed (Bates et al., 2002).

Summary The immobilisation of contaminants in cement-based systems may involve sorption, precipitation and incorporation into crystalline (and non crystalline) phases. A number of contaminants are known to interfere with cement-based processes, however it is possible to eliminate these with the s/s treatment options available.

Most inorganic contaminants can be successfully solidified using cement/lime-pozzolan-based binder systems, but a thorough understanding of the behaviour of the contaminants is fundamental to meeting remedial performance targets.

A number of inorganic compounds, including copper, lead, zinc, borates, phosphates and iodides, are known to

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |111|

LABS AND TESTING Page 114 - 117 - The End For The Environmental Testing Laboratory? - Ian Rippin, Commercial Director, NLS

Page 118 - 119 - Air Quality Monitoring - Dr Melanie Williams, National Physical Laboratory

|112| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Does the rise of cost effective, rapid and real time in-situ monitoring spell the end for the environmental testing laboratory?

By Ian Rippin, NLS commercial director Contributors: Matt Lowenthal, NLS instrumentation technical specialist; Frances Houston, NLS instrumentation manager; Graham Miller, Agilent mobile Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) global business manager and Chris Hunter, NLS Leeds laboratory manager.

Monitoring solutions, not just laboratory results Reacting to results derived from traditional methods of environmental testing is certainly an ideal course of action, but using real time results to influence immediate decision-making as part of a monitoring solution, is potentially better. That is the conclusion many organisations are reaching when looking to assess the impact their business activities are having on the environment.

Instrumentation Service, Frances Houston, who manages the new National Laboratory Service (NLS) offering, says: â&#x20AC;&#x153;The NLS has recognised that the needs of its customers now extend beyond traditional lab-based testing to the provision of more responsive monitoring solutions. These monitoring solutions involve the bringing together of, not just scientific knowledge, but technical and engineering expertise as well.â&#x20AC;?

Many are now looking to take advantage of the advances that have been achieved in field-based monitoring technology. The adoption of a field-based approach can either act as a replacement for, or in addition to, more traditional environmental testing regimes.

The drivers for the adoption of real time monitoring In the past, those organisations that have taken their environmental responsibilities seriously, have had limited access to the technology that is able to monitor their own discharges.

As a further indication of the growing trend from lab to field, there are an increasing number of environmental laboratories that are offering their customers fieldbased analytical tools. The new services sit alongside the more traditional business models that have focused on the testing of customer samples that are received by laboratories in bottles and containers.

The case for field-based monitoring is clear: it can enable rapid and in-situ environmental assessments by providing real time results in dynamic settings. Fieldbased monitoring devices can measure actually what is happening in a given water course over time.

Following the recent launch of the National Water Quality

It would be impossible to achieve the same representative result in a cost effective manner through traditional sampling techniques. Matt Loewenthal, NLS

Image 1

Image 2

|114| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

instrumentation technical specialist, says: “To build up even a fraction of the same picture you would need to take numerous ‘spot’ samples at frequent intervals and then send each of these for laboratory-based testing”.

It has long been understood that ‘spot’ or ‘grab’ samples can only provide results that tell you what is happening in the water column at the exact moment the sample bottle is filled.

‘High resolution testing’, or in other words testing that can detect episodic events in a water course - including both natural or man-made occurrences – has been a regulatory requirement since the EC Water Framework Directive (WFD) was introduced in 2000.

There are daughter directives that stem from the WFD, including surface waters and bathing waters, and effluent discharges into water courses that must be sampled and monitored to prevent the release of contamination.

Many of these now come under the Operator Self Monitoring (OSM) regulations implemented in April 2009, placing the responsibility onto the producer rather than samples being taken by the regulator for analysis, which in the case of England and Wales is the Environment Agency.

Under OSM, organisations have to prove to the regulator that their monitoring arrangements are adequate for the activities that they are engaged in. At present, it is widely accepted that the taking of a single sample each month, each week, once a day or even every hour, will not generate enough data to provide a comprehensive categorisation of what is actually happening over time in a given water course. Water companies themselves are now looking to real time monitoring solutions that typically take readings every few minutes, to better understand the range of pressures on a body of water.

The ultimate aim is to identify the sources of pollution and then look to restrict or limit those with greatest

Image 3 influence. This includes monitoring the impact of what are increasingly frequent, storm events. These can cause turbidity issues, triggering a water company to take action to minimise the disruption and cost involved in treating contaminated river water.

The latest proposals from the water industry advocate the introduction of ‘flexible consenting’, which requires the real time monitoring of river conditions, and specifically water flow. The concept of ‘flexible consenting’ is to allow for variable discharge standards dependent upon high or low river flow.

Adoption concerns For many, field-based monitoring represents a logical progression from laboratory-based testing, for some, there are deployment concerns. Many of which are ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |115|

Recent advances in cellular technology offer ever more efficient and reliable wireless transmission of data between remote locations and central collection points. The appropriate telemetry solution is typically determined by the required data transfer frequency, the local cost and signal conditions.

-

Image 4 perceived barriers rather than real constraints: -

You need specialist skills to operate the equipment.

This is not an accurate assumption. Monitoring technology has moved on in recent years to include portable equipment and hand-held instruments that can be operated with very limited device-based training.

-

There are limitations to what you can test for.

This is true, but the majority of the most significant influences on water quality are included, e.g. parameters such as dissolved oxygen, ammonia, pH, conductivity, turbidity and chlorophyll.

Currently on the horizon are devices for the real time monitoring of pesticides and phosphates. Elevated phosphor concentrations in surface waters increase the growth of phosphate-dependent organisms, such as algae and duckweed. These are organisms that use up large amounts of oxygen and prevent sunlight from entering the water, making for a hostile environment for other organisms.

-

Difficult to get to, remote sites, and those in full view of the general public can restrict the use of this technology.

This is not true - power supply, equipment security and ability to transmit real time results are at the heart of these concerns.

Concerns over the need for access to a power supply in remote locations are largely unfounded, especially with the advances in solar panel-based energy generation technology.

From a security perspective - including the prevention of vandalism - static stations are typically located on the edge of farmers’ fields and out of the public gaze. If this is not possible, monitoring stations such as ‘walk-in kiosks’ can be fabricated in steel, to ensure expensive equipment is locked away. Some installations are also built to only allow for maintenance access to the instrumentation that they contain. |116| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Accessing the data generated by real time monitoring devices is prohibitively costly and complex to achieve.

Another inaccurate assumption. Historically, this may have been the case, with telemetry enabled data collected inside an organisation and expensive systems integration projects which were fed into an organisation’s proprietary systems.

However, the rise of the ‘sensor web’ has put pay to all of that. The phrase ‘sensor web’ is associated with a sensing system which relies on the internet as its means for carrying information from its source to a wide audience. Organisations can now readily enable access to their monitoring data through any internet enabled device such as a computer, Blackberry or PDA, either via their corporate website or a hosted service. Monitoring data can either be open to all who want it or restricted to a target audience through password protected portals.

Customer uptake Field-based monitoring solutions have been adopted to measure the environmental impact from large industrial installations, urban diffuse pollution and organisations that typically operate from large estates – including hospitals and airports.

Matt Loewenthal stresses that up-front consultation is necessary to ensure the right monitoring solution is designed to meet a customer’s specific set of circumstances. Loewenthal says: “You need to be clear as to the outcomes you are looking for, and therefore what you want to measure and why. Solutions can then be tailored to meet the specific monitoring need”.

First time users of real time monitoring techniques tend to have preconceived ideas as to the source of a water quality problem that they are looking to investigate and control. Loewenthal goes on to say: “It is important not to jump to conclusions in advance of getting hold of the data. You really need to investigate first”.

It transpires that not all of the early adopters of this technology have had a satisfactory experience, with many having to live with promises of solutions that in reality fall short of their monitoring needs. Loewenthal comments: “Anyone can build you a monitoring station but we take the approach that it is better to be honest upfront as to what can and can’t be achieved. We stay with our customers to make sure their monitoring solutions perform for the long term.”

BAA Airports Limited at Heathrow is one such organisation that has been supported by the NLS

National Water Quality Instrumentation Service. At the outset, portable monitoring devices were deployed to monitor water courses across the Heathrow estate.

These have now been made permanent installations, with BAA able to monitor for any problems in pre-treatment discharges that are destined for local rivers.

based testing would be folly. Both approaches are able to exist side by side, and often as complementary techniques. The further adoption of real time, in-situ monitoring is set to increase, with the miniaturisation of a range of sensing technologies that will present its users a wealth of data in real time.

The NLS has also supported a National Health Service hospital, deploying a ‘suitcase’ based monitoring system to help tackle a long standing water quality issue with a pond located on the hospital site. This customer wanted to ensure that controls to maintain water quality in the pond were working.

Graham Miller, global business manager for Agilent mobile Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR), agrees: “At Agilent we see mobile testing as being a tool in the toolbox, offering quick turnaround and timelier decisionmaking without compromising analytical performance.

The laboratory has an essential role to play, not only in implementation and validation of new mobile techniques, but in monitoring outcomes as well.”

So called ‘suitcase systems’ are very quick to deploy, with all of the monitoring instrumentation literally housed in a hard backed suitcase that can be solar or mains powered.

‘Suitcase’ systems are especially useful in situations where short-term monitoring is required, either in support of pollution events or to monitor the impact of planned maintenance, and for any investigations for which an immediate response is required.

NLS real time monitoring solutions, operated on behalf of the Olympic Development Authority in the Lower Lea Valley, are currently monitoring the impact on local river water quality that may result from the site development in readiness for 2012. This approach to monitoring water quality helps to save on the costs associated with traditional ‘spot’ sampling and the subsequent delay involved with establishing laboratory-based results.

Images 1: DTC Mini Kiosk Autosmapler Image 2: Instrumentation - NLS solar powered monitoring station.

Image 3: DTC Mini Kiosk Eden Image 4: Stinton Hall Exterior Image 5: Newton Rigg Exterior

Image 5

The beginning of the end for the environmental testing laboratory?

The case for lab-based testing is still supported as the results generated can be defensible and repeatable, and are derived from a controlled environment. More often than not, the laboratory can deliver a wider range of substance detection at lower levels. However, fieldbased monitoring can offer representative results and can be linked to a real time communications capability to support more immediate decision-making.

There is perhaps one technique that can satisfy both testing for a broad range of compounds and deliver results that provide an accurate representation of what is actually going on in a water course over time.

Passive sampling is a way of testing water for pollutants by leaving an absorbent medium in place for several weeks at a time to accumulate contaminants. As this method provides a site test which collects an average pollutant concentration over an extended period without repeat visits, this approach is much more cost effective, particularly with the higher monitoring demands under the WFD. It is estimated that passive sampling can cut the cost of routine water sampling by up to 30%. It also minimises the chance that you will miss a particular pollutant because you sampled at the wrong time.

To predict even the beginning of the end for laboratoryENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |117|

Air Quality Monitoring Dr Melanie Williams Group Leader, Environmental Measurements, National Physical Laboratory Climate change, pollution and air quality have become a part of modern life. There are definitive links between pollutants and adverse effects on human health as well as on environmental sustainability. We need to ensure that the quantity of these pollutants in the air does not go above levels where they become dangerous to our health or to the environment.

This is an issue that concerns the government, business and the public. Governments need to meet set regulations which limit the levels of pollutants in the air, and businesses, councils and communities need to ensure they donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t exceed these levels.

Furthermore, having a clear understanding of the presence of certain toxins and pollutants underpins environmental and health research and supports modelling of future impact. This provides an infrastructure which can quickly respond to changes, such as the specification of new pollutants or events which lead to sudden increases in harmful emissions.

Underpinning this is the need for accurate measurement.

This is critical to understanding the levels of man-made and naturally occurring pollutants, and is essential to developing strategies to mitigate short- and long-term impacts. It provides the basis for setting the limits and the ability to enforce them.

the World Meteorological Organisation (WMO), and the European Air Quality Reference Laboratories (AQUILA).

We are entrusted by Defra, the Environment Agency and NERC to lead UK monitoring networks as well as the provision of traceable measurements for climate change models.

These measurement projects include detecting gases such as ozone, water-vapour, airborne particles from 1 nm to 10 mm in size, and VOCs (volatile organic compounds - chemical compounds with significant vapor pressures that can be dangerous to health and the environment, eg 'smog').

Air quality surveys are applicable to many industrial and air quality applications, including: groundwater and soil contamination assessment, tanker loading emissions monitoring, detection of leaks from storage facilities and vehicle emissions.

Accurate monitoring of air quality is also vitally important for regulatory purposes and industrial impact assessment. Ambient air quality surveys at NPL include characterising industrial emissions in accordance with UK and EC legislation, monitoring roadside and urban air quality, validating pollution abatement measures and supporting corporate environmental policies.

The science behind air quality Airborne particles are complicated and difficult to measure. They have the most serious effect on human health of all air pollutants. The also have a significant but poorly-quantified effect on climate change. Both of these factors are highly relevant to the current interest in the manufacture of nanoparticles for industrial purposes.

In the UK, the government has established several Air Quality Networks, through the Department of Food and Environmental Affairs (Defra) that are organised into networks that target a particular pollutant, using a particular measurement method. This information informs government policy, validates emission reductions, and provides warnings if pollutants reach dangerous levels.

Airborne particles in outdoor air are a varied and changing mixture of natural particles (such as dust and sea salt), man-made particles (such as carbon-rich particles from engine exhaust) and particles formed within the atmosphere by reactions between gases (such as ammonia and nitrogen dioxide, which form ammonium nitrate). They vary in size from a few nanometres to tens of micrometres. Many different techniques are used to measure them.

How does NPL help?

The National Physical Laboratory (NPL) is the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s National Measurement Institute and as such has developed considerable expertise in the measurement of airbourne particles which affect air quality.

NPL have been closely involved with the development of standard methods for measuring airbourne particles, which are generally classed in two groups, PM10 (particles of 10 micrometers in diameter or less) and PM2.5 (particles less than 2.5 micrometers in diameter).

While NPLâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s primary role is to provide highly accurate techniques to underpin requirements for measurements made elsewhere, there are areas where NPL also has considerable experience of the practical aspects of the measurements.

A range of techniques are available for measuring airbourne particles. The reference method involves weighing filters before and after they are exposed to the air being sampled.

Air quality measurements are one such area. NPL's expertise has been called upon to play leading roles in |118| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Some common automatic methods of measurement include Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalances (TEOM), which measure the increasing mass of a filter

by its effect on the resonant frequency of a vibrating support; beta attenuation monitors, which measure the increasing amount of material on a filter by its absorption of electrons emitted by a weak beta-source; and optical monitors, which can gauge the size of individual particles from signals scattered from a light beam and integrate this into a total volume of particles.

Some instruments give different results from the reference method to varying degrees in differing circumstances, and have many variations. New technologies which give ever more accurate results are being investigated by NPL, and other measurement laboratories. A variation of the TEOM called the Filter Dynamic Measurement System (FDMS) is currently receiving a great deal of attention in the UK. Environmental measurement in the real world In addition to the various commercial services offered

by NPL, we are closely involved in a number of UK and European projects to monitor air quality.

Air quality refers to the levels of pollutants in air that are relevant to human health or ecosystems. The most important pollutants have changed over recent decades.

Historically, coal burning in towns led to high levels of sulphur dioxide (and particles â&#x20AC;&#x201C; see below), but this pollutant is now only a localised problem. The most important gaseous pollutants for human health effects are currently ozone and nitrogen dioxide.

Various government initiatives exist to monitor and control levels of these pollutants or their precursors.

For example NPL manages four of Defraâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Air Quality Networks. These Networks are based on aspects of particle measurement.

Of all the particulate measurement techniques, black smoke appears to be the one most consistently associated with health effects. The Black Smoke Network provides a valuable historical dataset on the impacts of the Clean Air Acts. It involves the measurement of carbon containing particulate matter from the burning of solid fuel and vehicle emissions. Black smoke sampling uses an eight-port sampler to draw air at a constant flow rate through a paper filter. Suspended particulate matter is collected on the filter forming a stain, the darkness of which is measured by a reflectometer.

generates reliable datasets of airborne particle number, concentration and size at selected sites. Long time series measurements of particle number are important for studies into the cause of disease.

The Heavy Metals Network measures ambient levels of arsenic, cadmium, chromium, copper, iron, manganese, nickel, lead, platinum, vanadium, zinc, and mercury, in particulate matter, at twenty-four sites around the UK. Accurately measured concentrations of the most toxic metals are requirements of the new EC Air Quality Directive and the Fourth Air Quality Daughter Directives.

Sites are predominantly located downwind of large metal processing facilities and in areas with a high population.

NPL has recently taken over management of the PAHs ( Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons) Network. (PAHs) are a group of persistent organic compounds, some of which are toxic and/or possible or proven human carcinogens; they are produced via incomplete combustion of carbon containing fuels especially coal.

NPL is also playing a major role in the new EU co-funded project AirMonTech, which will make recommendations to the European Commission on how to revise legislation covering air quality in Europe, and on what research is needed to help with this decision.

NPL, through its various projects, is constantly striving to deliver benefit to the government and customers through detailed understanding of air quality. Air quality monitoring techniques and strategies lead to improved legislation, reduced environmental impact and better health. But the process is continuingly evolving. New technology and greater understanding of measurement methods will lead to ever more accurate and consistent air quality measurements across the UK and Europe, and will guide decisions from healthcare to climate change mitigation in future. NPL, along with its partners and other measurement institutes across the globe, is continually working to ensure better air quality through measurement.

Another network is the Particle Counting and Speciation Network, which was established to research the nature of particulate matter in ambient air. Particulates are known to exacerbate symptoms of cardiovascular and respiratory diseases, and are also known to contribute to climate change. Particle number has also been associated with health effects.

The Network provides information on the chemical composition of particulate matter, thereby providing information on sources and allowing the relevant chemical processes to be modelled more reliably. It also ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |119|

TRANSPORT Page 122 - 123 - The Clean Air Act; Catching Up! - Kulveer Ranger, Mayor of London’s Director of Environment.

Page 127 - The Automotive Industry’s Approach To Climate Change Low Carbon Vehicles - Paul Everitt, Chief Executive, Society Of Motor Manufacturers And Traders Page 128 - 131 - Achieving Culture Change Through Technology - John Lennox, European Fleet Manager, G4s

|120| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

The Clean Air Act; Catching Up! Kulveer Ranger, Mayor of Londonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Director of Environment.

This year marks the 50th anniversary of the Clean Air Act, a seminal piece of legislation in response to the infamous pea-souper fogs that blighted London's skyline over that decade. Those pollution smogs claimed the lives of several thousand people and caused widespread illhealth prompting a series of enlightened reforms.

Whilst air quality has of course improved significantly since those times, at the start of the 21st century, pollution remains a serious health concern. Our research shows that poor air quality shortens the lives of an estimated 4,300 people in London every year. This is why the Mayor, Boris Johnson is determined to tackle pollution and improve the capital's environment as part of his vision to bring the best of the village back into the city creating a cleaner, greener and more civilised capital.

Cleaning up the air of a major city like London, with almost eight million people - and growing - is no easy task and a challenge confronting policy makers around the globe.

Road transport emissions are responsible for around 80 per cent of tiny airborne pollutants (PM10) in central London and around half of NOx emissions across the capital. Measures in the Mayor's Air Quality Strategy, published last year, will lead to PM10 emissions in central London falling by around a third and NOx emissions across London by a similar amount (from 2008 levels) over the next three years.

Our approach is to encourage low and zero technology vehicles whilst deterring the oldest and most polluting.

We are determined to create cleaner public vehicles and provide Londoners with a wealth of greener travel choices. In addition, we are targeting pollution 'hotspots' with an intensive blast of interventions. On top of this, our programme of urban greening - increased tree cover and vegetation - has the multiple benefit of making the city more beautiful and better at absorbing pollutants.

CLEANING UP CITY VEHICLES: We have one of the most comprehensive bus networks in the world, carrying over 6.5 million people daily. But buses are also responsible for around 20 per cent of NOx emissions in central London. We believe it is only right we clean up public vehicles in order to set the standard we demand of others. We already have one of the cleanest fleets in Europe, but we are going even further. The Mayor has developed a bus that will set a global standard |122| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

in eco-transport. The New Bus for London is going to reintroduce the best of the traditional Routemaster â&#x20AC;&#x201C; passengers can hop on and hop off and the greenest possible engine technology. It will incorporate the latest hybrid technology and will be both 40 per cent more fuel efficient than conventional diesel buses and 15 per cent more fuel efficient than current hybrid buses. It has been designed so that air quality emissions will be reduced by 40 per cent for NOx and 33 per cent for PM emissions when compared with conventional diesel buses. The first prototypes will be on the streets early next year.

These new buses will join one of Europe's largest existing fleet of hybrid vehicles, which will number 300 hybrid buses by 2012. TfL is also carrying out a trial that will see 18 buses retrofitted with specialist equipment to tackle NOx pollution.

London also boasts the UK's only zero emission bus route thanks to a pioneering batch of five hydrogen vehicles running through the most polluted parts of the capital.

Three more will join this unique fleet by the end of the year. These buses emit only water and they refuel at a site in east London, that we are keen to use as a catalyst to encourage even more hydrogen vehicles.

Our black cabs are iconic, instantly recognised across the world and renowned for their excellent customer service.

We want to ensure they are also known for their green credentials, as currently they contribute around a quarter of PM10 emissions in central London. The oldest, more polluting black cabs will lose their licence to operate, under tough new standards. From 1 January 2012 no black cab over 15 years old will be licensed by the Taxi and Private Hire Office. There are around 1,200 which are likely to be more than 15 years old in 2012. The Mayor will introduce a requirement for all new taxis entering the fleet to meet the strictest vehicles standard from 1 April 2012. In addition, from January 2012 all aspiring cabbies will also be required to take a mandatory eco-driving course. Helping cabbies to drive more efficiently will not only help them to save money at a time when fuel prices are rising, but also reduce emissions of pollutants and carbon dioxide. The Mayor and TfL have also announced

major funding to encourage taxi owners to upgrade to low emission vehicles such as electric black cabs. Taxi owners who are upgrading their vehicles will be able to make use of the fund to upgrade to the cleanest vehicles available. The Mayor has pledged to work with taxi manufacturers to develop an affordable zero emission taxi by 2020.

Whilst our modelling suggests we are on track to meet European legal limits for PM10, intensive measures are being introduced in the handful of places in central London where we are most at risk of breaching these limits. We have been awarded £5 million from the Government to establish a Clean Air Fund, which we are using to fund a package of local measures. These include using dust suppressant techniques on the most polluted roads. This is a solution of Calcium Magnesium Acetate which makes particulates stick to the carriageway rather than re-circulating them in the air. Early results show it is reducing emissions by 20 per cent in some locations.

We will also install green screens, which are walls of green vegetation which act as a barrier between the road and footpath absorbing pollutants and the Mayor wants to tackle unnecessary idling - vehicles which leave their engines running using up fuel unnecessarily and increasing emissions. Marshalls will work at main taxi ranks with cabbies to cut the number of vehicles left running and we will work with the bus and coach industry to get this crucial message across.

PROVIDING LONDONERS WITH GREENER CHOICES A cycling revolution is well underway in London with unprecedented investment meaning more and more people are switching over to this cleaner way of travelling. We have invested in the Barclays Cycle Hire scheme which has seen 5.2 million cycle journeys in under a year since it launched, with 20,000 cycle journeys on the scheme on an average weekday and 125,000 members. We are delivering new safe cycle routes and facilities. We are planning 12 Barclays Cycle Superhighways, clearly signed bike lanes providing easy routes from outer London into the city centre. Two of these are already up and running, with two more opening this summer.

Electric driving is set to increase – manufacturers are investing hundreds of millions into electric vehicles, and by 2020, we can expect a large proportion of cars to be electric. For example, Ford predicts one in four of their car sales could be battery powered electric. London already has more electric drivers than anywhere in the UK and we want to make London the electric car capital of Europe. To capitalise on their environmental benefits, the Mayor wants to see 100,000 electric vehicles as soon as possible.

In May the Mayor launched the first city-wide electric charging point network and membership scheme, Source London. By 2013 this network will total 1300 charging points, more than the number of petrol stations currently

in London. A new policy in the draft London Plan, the Mayor's spatial planning strategy, has placed a condition that 20 per cent of parking in new developments should be equipped with charge points - this could yield over 7,000 charge point spaces per year. The Mayor has also granted electric vehicles (along with other low emission vehicles) a 100 per cent discount for the London congestion charge.

Electric vehicles suit Londoners way of life and are cost effective; using an electric vehicle brings a cost saving of around £3500 per annum. Because of the capital's good public transport network and most things being on people's doorstep Londoners do not drive far. In fact, 90 per cent of all car trips are less than six miles, totally within the range of the current crop of electric cars.

GREENING LONDON Greening our city not only makes it more attractive to live in but has a role to play in absorbing pollution. London’s leafy suburbs and green spaces are the lungs of the capital. They help breathe life into our communities, protect the environment and speak to our national yearning for the countryside.

At a local level, trees and vegetation can reduce concentrations of PM10 by 20 per cent and leaves and branches act as a filter to trap toxic particles. A treelined street has only 10-15 per cent of the dust of a street without.

We have planted over 9500 of the promised 10,000 street trees in the last three years. The Mayor also wants to increase tree canopy in the capital from 20 per cent to 25 per cent by 2025 which is the equivalent to approximately two million extra trees. We have redoubled our tree planting efforts with the launch of the capital's RE:LEAF programme, working with major tree and environmental organisations to boost volunteer planting.

All this activity means we are successfully cutting the capital's dangerous emissions. This is testified by the European Commission's recent decision to grant the UK an extension to comply with PM10 limits, a clear sign of confidence in the hard work of the Mayor to tackle the legacy of poor air quality he inherited.

We have put and will continue to put in place innovative measures to improve air quality, all part of the Mayor’s vision of putting the “village” back into our great capital city. This is about a better quality of life, improving the look and feel of our city and fundamentally cleaning the air. I believe we have put in place a robust set of measures to help us achieve what the Mayor and every Londoner wants to see, which is a cleaner, greener, leafier city for Londoners both now and for generations to come.

Image supplied by www,bluesky-world.com ©GeoPerspectivesTM ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |123|

Advertising Feature

|124| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Advertising Feature

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |125|

Advertising Feature

|126| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

The automotive industry’s approach to climate change and its focus on low carbon vehicles

By Paul Everitt, chief executive, Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders The UK motor industry is a diverse and dynamic industry committed to helping the UK demonstrate its low carbon credentials as it moves towards an era of sustainable motoring. Over the past decade, the pace of improvements picked up considerably as vehicle manufacturers focused on increasing the fuel efficiency of their vehicles and cutting CO2 emissions. The future will see further technological progress, producing increasingly efficient vehicles and utilising alternative power technologies. This continued effort and the steps taken to improve the whole vehicle lifecycle further, from production to disposal, aims to bring about an even lower carbon future.

Research and Development The automotive sector is Europe’s largest investor in research and development, investing €20 billion a year.

Some of the most notable developments, in terms of fuel efficiency and cutting emissions, go beyond the improvements made to conventional petrol and diesel power trains. Development of electric, hybrid and fuel cell vehicles has never been higher with almost every manufacturer exploring the alternative fuel options. These technologies all have the potential to become viable alternatives to traditional power trains, but significant research and development is required, along with investment in consumer awareness and infrastructure needs.

While technology remains in the development phase, government should adopt a neutral position rewarding emission reductions rather than identifying a single future technology.

Automotive Council and NAIGT The work of the New Automotive Innovation and Growth Team (NAIGT), and the subsequent creation of an Automotive Council aims to ensure the UK motor industry remains a global force, playing a significant role in the development of exciting, low carbon transport solutions.

Working to achieve this, the Automotive Council will promote collaboration between industry, research communities and government. It will encourage the development of an integrated strategy underpinned by a supportive, long-term regulatory, fiscal and planning framework, to make the UK the location of choice for development, demonstration and marketing of low carbon vehicles and fuels.

The Automotive Council has established a strategic partnership between industry and government which will help sustain industrial capability, and place the UK as a leader in the development and exploitation of low carbon vehicle technologies.

The Council will provide active support for Test Bed UK, a large-scale pilot scheme to demonstrate and build the new low-carbon personal transportation system of the future, including its infrastructure. It will also provide strategic support for automotive research and development, through the NAIGT’s technology roadmap.

The roadmap aims to cut emissions from vehicles over the next 30 years, integrating all existing technology.

Future technologies In the near future the traditional combustion engine can still be further improved. Manufacturers are continually employing numerous approaches to aid the reduction in emissions from petrol and diesel engines, such as fitting low rolling resistance tyres, improving aerodynamics and introducing engine stop-start technology.

Recently government announced part-funding for one of the largest trials of ultra-low carbon vehicles in the world and committed to up to £230 million for consumer incentives. In the short to medium-term, the development of the electric engine will continue to make it a viable choice not just for city motoring but, when working in tandem with the next generation internal combustion engines, an option for longer journeys as well.

Finally, looking further to the future, it is expected that mass-market electric vehicles, plug-in hybrids and fuel cell vehicles will play an increasingly large part in the automotive mix. These developments, subject to infrastructure and technology keeping pace with requirements, present significant opportunities for the UK, both in terms of overseas investment and further environmental advances.

One factor that we can be sure of is the consistently high levels of environmental demands made by government and motorists and the equally high levels of development, improvement and ambition that the UK automotive industry consistently demonstrates.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |127|

Achieving Culture Change through Technology

By John Lennox European Fleet Manager, G4S

With over 20 years experience in Transport and Logistics, ranging from Transport Policy Management and International Standards Development, to managing one of the UK’s largest fleets, John Lennox, Head of Fleet Management for G4S, reflects on some of the environmental challenges facing operators.

Throughout my career I’ve always been focused in improving efficiency and reducing the carbon footprint for businesses I have been involved with. It’s not just a company goal; it’s very much a personal one. Over my 20+ year career I’ve researched and helped to implement innovations for some big consumer brands and I’m proud to look back and see the difference it’s made to those businesses. The challenge at G4S, with one of the largest operational fleets in the UK, was to investigate how we could drive fuel efficiencies while at the same time influencing the drivers’ mindset with regard to road safety and CSR. Over the past few years the business has invested in a number of niche solutions. Each of these does an excellent job in addressing specific issues. The introduction of photovoltaic panels, stop start technology, engine management controls and our first ever fully electric cash in transit (CIT) vehicle are just a few examples. But if your real objective is to change learned behaviours, you can’t assume that simply introducing technology will bring about some sort of miraculous change. There are no quick and easy fixes when it comes to finding solutions within a fleet environment – you are, after all, dealing with both the physical fleet assets and the human beings behind the wheel. Realising that changing driver and management behaviour was likely to be the most effective way to tackle fuel consumption led G4S to investigate Telematics.

The beauty of the Telematics system, and one of the reasons it has worked so well for us, is that the sensitivity of the technology can be scaled up over time. The positive feedback provided by the system has acted as a motivator for the crew behind the wheel. It is important |128| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

to remember that Telematics only provides you with the information; managers have to understand and use that information positively to help affect change.

Essentially the data allows us to do three key things: monitor, manage and adjust, but with the driver fully engaged in the process. The system is set up to provide the driver with audiovisual indicators of how their driving is measuring up and the direct improvements they are making to their impact on the environment. So, while they may start off with several audible alarms in the vehicle and red and amber indicators, it’s amazing how soon we start to see a change for the better.

We’re seeing a distinct change in how our drivers think and act while behind the wheel. There is clear evidence that our drivers are becoming increasingly aware of how crucial their role is in enhancing the reputation of the business through their behaviour on the road. The data we can obtain now helps us with positive reinforcement techniques and we’re seeing the results on a weekly basis.

Interestingly, we’ve found that this new mindset extends to how drivers treat their vehicle and other road users. As a business we’ve worked hard to successfully introduce a 5S approach within our branch network and now we’re looking to build on that success and introduce this to our vehicles – slowly at first, but all of this just goes to reinforce the right mindset of efficiency, awareness and respect.

Key to the success of the Telematics programme has been a reliable baseline measurement of our carbon output. As a business G4S has a solid track record of collecting environmental data and this, combined with our CSR activities, has enabled us to become the only business of our type to achieve bronze status on the CR Index this year, as published in the Financial Times. We are also members of the Freight Transport Association’s

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |129|

(FTA) Logistics Carbon Reduction Scheme, and Silver status members of the Transport for London Freight Operator’s Recognition Scheme (FORS), all of which reinforces our commitment to minimising our impact on the environment in which we operate.

With Branch Management trained on how to interpret the data and compare it against their baseline, we’ve been able to encourage drivers to strive for further improvements. Daily updates have been integrated into existing communication channels, allowing branches to engage with the driver to check how they’re doing that day and, in the process, discuss the latest data on their driving and the impact it’s having. This activity has promoted a cultural mind-shift in relation to safe and fuel efficient driving, something that ultimately we anticipate will be automatically adopted by the driver without having to consciously think about it.

Of course it’s been vital to engage with our staff and their representatives, the GMB, from the very start with this project, and they have been very supportive throughout. We’re talking about something that will directly affect each and every driver, so their support and understanding of our objectives is essential. We are lucky enough to have a very positive working relationship with the GMB and this has had a vital part to play in the success of the project You’d think that with an international fleet there would be regional differences that were thrown up during the implementation process but surprisingly this hasn’t been the case and the countries outside of the UK who have implemented so far have also seen success and reaped the benefits. The real challenge has been the sheer scale of the operation itself and the physical logistics of fitting the technology to our existing fleet. Planning is the key and when you have over 2,000 vehicles and multiple vehicle types in the UK alone you can see why this kind of project can be a complex beast. We insisted that each vehicle type had a template for fitting, cleared by our Vehicle Design Manager and careful calibration of the variants to ensure we could standardise the measurements across the fleet. There’s no point

|130| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

providing a baseline and weekly measurements of improvement if we don’t start with a level playing field and consistent method of measurement.

Another challenge has been the volume of employees requiring training for this project. So far some 2,000 drivers and managers have completed the necessary training and our goal is to complete this process

by August this year. In total that will be over 3,000 employees trained on the use and interpretation of the data that Telematics provides.

So what’s the future for Fleet Management? The mantra within this discipline will always be to tightly ‘control the controllables’. Simple good housekeeping can in itself make a big difference and this makes sense in an environment of ever escalating fuel costs in a very volatile marketplace. By its very nature fleet management runs a very lean ship and, as a consequence, is very unforgiving of anything that impacts on costs or efficiency rates. I’m constantly looking to drive efficiency through securing best price, best value and best service – not an easy juggling act on occasion.

Of course in this mix is the complexity of the Legislative requirements on emissions. The absence of one standard environmental measurement in the UK means that any company with a significant reliance on logistics has to concentrate its efforts on regional zones with the strictest legislative requirements.

The ‘big ticket’ solutions for future fuels are really still in their infancy in terms of R&D. We’re looking at a good 5-10 years before new fuel alternatives like hydrogen and fuel cell technology become viable, if that.

There really isn’t one single solution for a mixed operational fleet, especially when you consider costs and weight impact of the available solutions, all of which need to be bourn by the operator in a difficult economic climate without impacting competitiveness. So the pressing question is, what can we do that’s

going to have an impact now, whilst at the same time working on medium to longterm strategic solutions.

Telematics is helping us here and now to achieve a real step change for the business but we need to continue to encourage constructive dialogue between the Government, vehicle manufacturers and operators if we want success in the longterm.

It’s vital, when a company is looking to invest in an environmental solution, that there is clarity from the government on their direction on environmental developments in order to ensure their future support.

It’s the only way to dispel the uncertainty that vehicle manufacturers and fleet managers face when deciding how best to invest for the future.

just for show, it has to work for the business and be about more than positive PR; you have to be serious about this, it’s an investment in the future. Of course it’s not easy and there are rarely any quick-fix solutions. The kind of investment in time and money we’re talking about here takes careful consideration. Every new solution introduced has its own inherent penalties, whether that’s in additional weight on the vehicle or reduced cargo space. Thankfully Telematics doesn’t pose any of these issues and as a business we’ve been able to achieve some truly impressive behavioural and cultural changes as well making a significant impact on our carbon footprint.

An additional area requiring clarity is the environmental agenda, as it is key to us making positive progress.

It’s become clear over time that there are a number of agendas running side by side in the UK and at times they can be in conflict with one another, or at best don’t compliment each other. On top of this there’s the international agenda to take into account. The challenge for Operators here will be the arrival of Euro 6 standards, which are likely to drive significant additional costs and weight into the operation; a bit of a dichotomy, as these two negatives don’t always encourage the right kind of investment in environmental innovation and improvement.

What we really need are some agreed national standards that, while challenging, are achievable, and that will allow a business to effectively, efficiently and responsibly manage an operation and improve environmental impact.

With so many uncertainties on environmental issues, you might well ask what drives me to continue to invest so much time on environmental issues. For me, CSR isn’t ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |131|

WASTE MANAGEMENT Page 134 - 136 - RWM Show Preview Page 137 - 138 - The Future Of Waste Management - Ian Wakelin, CEO, Biffa Page 139 - 141 - An Honourable History - Mark Anthony, Editor, Demolition News Page 142 - 143 - Source Segregation to Recycling - Charlotte Morton, Chief Executive, ADBA

|132| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |133|

13th -15th SEPTEMBER 2011

NEC BIRMINGHAM

www.rwmexhibition.com RWM in partnership with CIWM (The Chartered Institution of Wastes Management GETTING THE MOST OUT OF WASTE AT RWM IN PARTNERSHIP WITH CIWM We all know that organisations of all types are increasingly under pressure to address the environmental impact of their operations. In recent years many have shifted their focus from waste to recycling, resource efficiency and more sustainable business practices. Also there’s a growing recognition that this doesn’t just make sound environmental sense – it makes good business sense too.

Called RWM in partnership with CIWM, the event is the perfect opportunity for environmental and sustainability industry professionals to get the lowdown on emerging industry trends and innovations. The event takes place at Birmingham’s NEC from Tuesday, September 13 to Thursday, September 15 and is the UK’s largest event for the waste, recycling and resource efficiency industry.

Single event Merging the two shows is a direct response to industry calls for a single event covering the whole recycling, resource efficiency and waste management sector.

It provides an ideal platform for visitors and exhibitors to build on the success of its forerunners: a survey of last year’s visitors to the RWM event, for example, found 87% ‘loved’ or ‘liked’ the show with 96% saying they would visit again in 2011.

Seminars and discussions at this year’s event will cover the latest policy and advice from industry bodies including the Environment Agency and the Environmental Services Authority (ESA). Under the same roof there’s a chance to see the very latest technology and service innovations from more than 600 exhibitors covering a broad range of sectors. On show will be products and services from the industry’s top companies: from vehicles and bins to shredders and construction waste services. All aspects of the environmental and sustainability arena are covered including recycling and waste; plant machinery and equipment; vehicles; street scene; professional services and solutions and energy.

It’s all about changing the way we view waste. In the past waste was largely seen as a problem. Now, with landfill tax, energy and raw material costs rising, there are more and more reasons to view things differently. Be it Government or industry, the switch to seeing waste as a resource is well underway and it has the potential to deliver real bottom line benefits.

This September the waste and recycling industry’s two biggest exhibitions, the Recycling and Waste Management Exhibition and CIWM’s Futuresource, will combine to create a single flagship event aimed at achieving just such a change of focus across industry. |134| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Both public and private sector organsations can use the show to find out about the latest ways to improve sustainability and reduce environmental impact. And for companies producing the technologies and services to help industry achieve these sustainability improvements, RWM in partnership with CIWM presents excellent opportunities to drive new business leads.

Top exhibitors Suppliers and producers will be demonstrating the latest equipment and service innovations on stands in the NEC’s halls 17-20 and in the outdoor area at the show.

These include Riverside Waste Machinery, the UK’s largest independent waste baler supplier, and materials handler Recresco, which uses cutting edge technology to

increase recycling levels and reduce the amount of glass, plastic and cans sent to landfill.

RWM in partnership with CIWM also features major brands from the sector including Dennis Eagle and Mercedes Benz vehicles, and E.ON Energy. In addition, businesses can speak to some of the UK’s leading waste management companies including PHS Group for clinical and healthcare waste, Smurfit Kappa Recycling for paper and card, Biffa Polymers for plastics and Sita UK and Valpak for general business waste solutions.

The leading waste and recycling industry bodies will also be on hand to offer independent advice on how businesses can help reduce their environmental impact and long-term costs. The Chartered Institution of Wastes Management (CIWM) will be at the event with the latest advice on waste management along with WRAP’s team of recycling experts advising on how businesses from across all sectors can help reduce the amount of waste sent to landfill.

The best advice A full three-day programme of free-to-attend seminars is fully accredited by the Chartered Institution of Wastes Management and contributes towards continuing professional development (CPD) hours. Many leading industry experts will be presenting on topics including waste prevention and reuse, materials collection and sorting technology.

In addition, a series of case studies on how to make recycling and sustainability pay will highlight environmental best practice in the industry.

At the Sauce Consultancy Communications Hub in partnership with the CIWM and APSRG, a series of interactive talks, debates, one-to-ones and seminars will be presented by the industry’s leading authorities on positive communications in the recycling and waste management industry. Sauce Consultancy, in partnership with CIWM and the Associate Parliamentary Sustainable Resource Group (APSRG), will be providing guidance on how to deliver successful communication management.

Leading industry figures from both the public and private sector will also be speaking about the big issues in waste and recycling. All issues around policy, legislation, regulation and compliance will be aired and discussed.

Highlights at the event’s four dedicated seminar theatres include: •

Tuesday 13 September, 10am, Commerce & Industry Theatre: Neil Davies, head of site based regulation at the Environment Agency on future approaches to regulating waste and supporting the development of new technologies.

•

Tuesday 13 September, 11am, Technology & Innovation Theatre: Dr Dominic Hogg, director of the waste management and environmental consultancy Eunomia demonstrates the costs and benefits of anaerobic digestion both financially and environmentally.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |135|

Ideal networking opportunities RWM in partnership with CIWM offers plenty of opportunities to network with recycling and waste management professionals, industry leaders and key decision makers. Back for 2011 is Café Viridor, a popular area at last year’s Recycling and Waste Management Exhibition and the ideal spot for visitors and exhibitors to meet, chat and share tips and ideas on reducing waste over a coffee. This year, a second networking hub, sponsored by Stobart Biomass, has also been added to meet the demands of larger visitor numbers.

In response to requests from previous visitors, RWM in partnership with CIWM has also developed a new ‘Innovation Trail’ which takes in all the latest products and services launching into the waste, recycling and resource efficiency sector. With 68% of visitors to last year’s Recycling and Waste Management Exhibition attending to source new products, the Innovation Trail will highlight the best of the new products and services which have not been exhibited previously.

• Tuesday 13 September, 1pm, Technology & Innovation Theatre: Chris Deed, programme manager, on the Environment Agency’s European Commission funded projects, including the iGreen project which is delivering a range of innovative internet and mobile phone based tools to help businesses improve environmental performance.

• Wednesday 14 September, 11am, Commerce & Industry Theatre: the agency’s European Pathway to Zero Waste (EPOW) programme manager Martyn Cheesbrough on how the EPOW can help businesses benefit from increased recycling.

• Wednesday 14 September, 11am Technology & Innovation Theatre: Simon Merriweather, chief executive at Advanced Plasma Power, will be presenting the case for gasplasma technology in generating renewable power with virtually no waste residues.

• Thursday 15 September, 1pm, Technology & Innovation Theatre: Krysteline managing director Steve Whettingsteel on the glass reprocessor’s experience of using Rotex’s new technology for separating dry materials in recycling.

|136| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

RWM in partnership with CIWM is the largest event for the recycling, waste management and resource efficiency sectors and takes place at the Birmingham NEC from Tuesday 13 to Thursday 15 September 2011. You can register to visit the show for free at www.rwmexhibition. com/pr. Keep up to date with the latest news and opinions by using the Twitter hashtag #RWMwithCIWM and following @RWM_with_CIWM.

The future of waste management: there is no waste

By Ian Wakelin, CEO, Biffa Increased legislation and increased landfill costs have led to more people recognising the value of waste and rapid development of markets for recycled material. What’s needed now is speedy development of the infrastructure and technology to realise the value of that waste, says Biffa’s chief executive Ian Wakelin.

With increasing legislation and rising costs it’s perhaps not surprising that businesses are thinking more and more about what happens to their waste. If nothing else, they want to protect themselves from long-term cost increases as landfill tax continues to escalate by £8 a tonne per year.

But there is more to it than simply meeting obligations and safeguarding against rising landfill costs: there is a huge opportunity out there to realise the true value of waste. The term ‘waste’ itself is becoming redundant as new uses for our materials – from new materials to renewable energy – develop.

Gone are the days when people did very little in the way of recycling, both at home and work. Most waste materials can be recycled – it’s just a matter of markets developing to the point where it is commercially viable. And the drive amongst businesses of varying sizes towards achieving the elusive ‘zero waste to landfill’ is more prominent than ever before. Big businesses are already showing their customers they are committed to sustainable practices.

Consumers are demanding it, customers are demanding it, and there is an overall desire to ‘do the right thing’. But how do they ‘do the right thing’?

Traditional recycling For some time now, ‘Dry Mixed Recyclables’ (DMR) – cardboard, paper, metal cans and plastic bottles –have become mainstream. Whether it’s separated at source or co-mingled, the same materials are being collected at the kerbside or offered at bring banks. Now the focus is changing towards businesses. People are used to recycling at home now, so they want to be able to recycle at work as well.

And its not just big businesses that can divert large amounts of waste from landfill. Small businesses can do it too. Biffa prides itself on offering tailored solutions for its customers which truly meet their needs. Waste is complex after all: there is no one size fits all solution for all businesses.

Co-mingled vs source segregated Collecting these items co-mingled or source segregated is a much debated issue. At the end of the day the most important thing is to separate these dry recyclables from the rest of the residual waste, and make it as easy as possible for people to do so. Research has shown time and time again that making it easy for people drives increased recycling rates. For example, Biffa’s ‘big Red bin’ service for schools and offices makes it straightforward for staff and children to recycle a whole range of materials including cardboard, paper, magazines, metal cans and plastic bottles.

Some claim that co-mingling reduces the final quality of recyclables as processed at materials recycling facilities (MRFs). Biffa is devoted to creating a high quality recyclate and to achieve this has invested many millions of pounds in state-of-the-art MRFs. Our ‘super’ MRFs across the country are highly sophisticated and use a variety of technologies to separate the waste into single material streams which are of a very high quality.

In terms of plastic we are taking it to the next level. We don’t just separate it out from other materials. We are able to separate the mixed plastics into different types and colours at our dedicated Biffa Polymers facility too, creating a high quality and high value secondary material.

We offer co-mingled collections to all of our customers because it works. Our customers like it because of its ease of use and it saves space. We like it because it lifts recycling tonnage. And in terms of quality our MRFsorted comingled recyclates sell for the same price as source segregated material. So it’s clear that either way produces high quality standards.

New markets Recycling DMR has been mainstream for some time, and even though there is still more to do in terms of increasing collection and recycling rates, there are new markets which until recently were relatively vacant.

The push towards 100% landfill diversion is driving the development of technology to recycle or recover as much value as possible from other types of waste which traditionally have not been recycled.

Big on the agenda at the moment is the matter of food waste. And with an estimated 15 million tonnes of food waste thrown away by the UK each year – half of which ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |137|

comes from businesses through food production, food preparation waste or left-overs – it’s not hard to see why.

Currently much of that food waste ends up in landfill and as it decomposes it gives off methane, a greenhouse gas more than 30 times more harmful than carbon dioxide.

However it’s no secret that methane burns very well as a fuel. So wouldn’t it make sense to capture it and use it to create green energy? That’s exactly what our rapidly growing anaerobic digestion (AD) infrastructure is all about: turning waste food into green energy, fertiliser and water.

Currently there is a lack of large scale facilities to recycle food and create energy from it but the Government’s Anaerobic Digestion strategy is a step forward and shows their commitment to increasing energy from waste through AD. But the financial support being offered will do little to put the necessary infrastructure in place to deal with the 6.5 million tonnes of food waste per annum which could feasibly be collected according to Eunomia’s report on AD. And currently just 300,000 tonnes are being collected across the UK. Biffa is at the forefront of building a national network of AD facilities and earlier this year opened the UK’s first ‘super’ AD plant at Cannock, Staffordshire. It will take up to 120,000 tonnes of food waste every year, much of it waste from the food industry which would traditionally have ended up in landfill. And there’s more in the pipeline. Biffa already has an existing AD plant in Leicestershire, and is in the process of building a Mechanical Biological Treatment (MBT) plant in West Sussex which will incorporate a larger AD plant (140,000 tonnes). And technology is developing all the time. Biffa’s plant in Poplars can take packaged food and separate it which makes it even easier for businesses to recycle, and

|138| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

where possible the packaging materials are recycled too.

Dedicated mixed plastics recycling One of the materials that is separated from food waste at our AD facilities is plastic packaging – which is processed at our dedicated plastics recycling facility Biffa Polymers.

It’s another relatively new market which Biffa has heavily invested in which produces new plastics for a variety of uses – including food grade packaging. In fact Biffa Polymers was the first to produce food grade recycled high density polyethylene (rHDPE) plastic from milk bottles. Currently 80% of the UK’s milk bottles have been made with plastic from Biffa Polymers.

Earlier this year, the facility launched its mixed plastics recycling facility which has the capacity to process up to 20,000 tonnes of non-food grade plastic waste every year. It can sort a variety of different plastics by type and colour before being processed into high quality material for use in consumer products such as paint trays, plant pots, storage boxes, pallets, bottles, car parts and office furniture.

These are great examples of how advances in technology are really making a difference. Being able to sort materials in this way means our collection services are simple for our customers, which drives up recycling tonnage and reduces costly landfill charges.

Biffa is absolutely leading the development of further technology and infrastructure that the country both needs and demands. Legislation and consumer demand means that businesses and households want to recycle more.

And it makes sense. Where is the logic in putting material in landfill when they can be recycled into new products, or used to generate green energy?

An Honourable History Mark Anthony, Editor, Demolition News In advance of a new book due out later this year, Demolition & Dismantling editor Mark Anthony has been researching the History of the National Federation of Demolition Contractors.

And it provides a fascinating insight into the Federation and the industry it serves.

There can be very few historic studies that combine condolences at the passing of a king, planning for the deconstruction of the Festival of Britain, and the design of a primitive site toilet. But the History of the National Federation of Demolition Contractors is far more than a look back at a trade association that emerged from the rubble of Blitz-torn London and which today represents an elite group of demolition contractors that are responsible for around 90 percent of all the demolition that takes place on UK shores. In fact, the book is as much a social history as it is the reminisces of a rough, tough industry, charting the rebirth of a nation beaten but unbowed by war and united in recovery.

Major Achievement Of course, no book on the NFDC can fail to mention the fact that it was started to address the need to clear and make safe houses damaged by the Luftwaffe onslaught aimed at bringing London and, ultimately, Great Britain to its knees. But while legends speak of Winston Churchill himself having given the order to assemble the demolition professionals of the day as part of the war effort, the facts are even more impressive. At one time, Charles Willment (who would go on to become the newlyborn Federation's first and longest-standing President) had at his disposal a 10,000-man strong workforce that could be mobilized at a moment's notice.

Such was the relationship between the Federation and the Armed Forces that Willment and his fellow founding father Samuel Allison were temporarily granted the honorary rank of Major in the Army when they took part in a British mission to report on the problems of clearing up the bomb damage in Germany and, in particular, Berlin.

At the same time as they were mobilising men and machines to keep the Home Front safe from unstable buildings, the founding fathers of the Federation were already turning their attention to the challenges of the post-war future.

But for all the far-sightedness of the original NFDC

Image: The new book will be out later this year.

committee, demolition in the 1940s was certainly no bed of roses. With an ongoing shortage of steel and iron due to the war effort, operatives were often expected to provide their own tools and personal protective equipment generally meant a cloth cap.

A Dirty Job According to the minutes of a 13 March 1945 meeting of the Demolition Industry Wages Board, an organisation established in conjunction with the National Federation of Building Trades Operatives in 1943 to regulate and standardise wages across the combined industries, “foul money” was payable to operatives required to work in exceptionally dirty or unpleasant surroundings.

The archives sadly do not record what constituted “exceptionally dirty or unpleasant”; but the agreed payment for those required in what must have been horrendous conditions was a paltry 3d/hour over and above their normal wage rate. Even those operatives working on “non-foul” sites faced site conditions that would make the demolition professional of today shudder and down tools.

Notes from a Demolition Industry Wages Board meeting on 1 June 1948 even offered detailed guidance on the specification and construction of Trench-Type on-site sanitary conveniences. That need to safeguard its workers was evident some six and a half decades ago, ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |139|

Top Man, so called because they were often required to work at height; and Mattock Man, a role named after the pick-axe-style tool favoured by demolition workers of that era.

Image: Friends in high places - A young Michael Heseltine with senior NFDC officers

and continues to guide the Federation to this day.

Looking back through the archives of the NFDC, it is notable just how much the industry has changed and yet just how much remains the same. In one entry from a Federation meeting in 1949, a committee is tasked with addressing the need to facilitate a faster, more efficient electricity and gas utility service disconnections.

Despite the best efforts of those founder members, the rationalisation of the utility sector, and the advent of advanced communications, that problem remains one of the few industry challenges that the NFDC has failed to conquer. In fact, through no fault of the Federation, it clings stubbornly to the to-do list almost 70 years later.

Other themes to have similarly echoed down through the ages of the Federation include safety, training, wages and codes of practice; all of which remain taxing and everpresent items on the agenda of most NFDC meetings to this day.

Bridging the Gap The male population of the UK had been decimated by death and injury during the war and able-bodied workers were in such short supply that, in line with many other industry sectors, the demolition business harked back to the workhouse days of old, employing juvenile workers to bridge the human resources gap.

However, despite having to call upon young and experienced workers to meet the workload demands, the fledgling National Federation of Demolition Contractors and the Demolition Industry Wages Board had already started to grade its employees. Designed primarily to recognise and reward the experience levels of the key demolition workers, this grading was to cement in demolition history two job roles that endure to this day: |140| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

According to notes from a meeting of the Demolition Industry Wages Board dated 26 February 1946: “...The general labourer is the ordinary demolition operative.

He is technically unskilled but he confined himself to demolition work and becomes of value by reason of his experience in it. The normal process of promotion is for an operative to start as a general labourer. He then finds whether he has an aptitude for working at heights and, if not, he becomes a Demolition Worker or Cleaner but does not progress further.

The operative who considers he has a personal ability for heights usually approaches his Foreman. Under supervision, he is allowed to “go up” and his efforts are watched. If he is found to be suitable, he is gradually given more difficult work and, should he prove satisfactory, he is graded a Mattock Man. The fact that an operative uses a mattock or works above ground level does not, in itself, constitute him a Mattock Man. A Top Man is more fully experienced, and is expected to be able to carry out ALL operations in connection with demolition work...”

It is notable that, sixty-five years on - long after working at height has been all but outlawed and the mattock has been replaced by high reach excavators and demolition robots - the terms Top Man and Mattock Man remain in use to describe two of the highest grades achievable under the National Demolition Training Group card scheme.

The British Elite By the time its 10th anniversary Annual General Meeting rolled around, the Federation had clearly established itself as a major force within the UK building and construction industry. The principal guest at the AGM luncheon was Lord Morrison, parliamentary private secretary to the Minister of Works, and one of an elite band of ministers and politicians tasked with rebuilding war-torn Britain.

Indeed, such was the Federation's place in post war British society that the minutes from a London & Southern Counties regional meeting from 20 February 1952 records that the secretary had written a letter to the Queen “expressing the humble duty and sympathy of the

Federation” and the passing of King George VI. A reply to this letter was apparently received but, sadly, this has apparently been lost in one of the Federation's numerous relocations over the ensuing years.

Just a few months later, the Federation was again in direct contact with the Ministry of Works, this time to discuss tendering arrangements for the demolition of the numerous structures, including the Dome of Discovery, erected on London's South Bank as part of the Festival of Britain.

International Influence Perhaps the most interesting aspect of the NFDC's growth is the way in which its influence has spread first nationally and then internationally. The US's National Association of Demolition Contractors (which would later become the National Demolition Association that operates today) worked with the NFDC, effectively borrowing the latter's constitution and modes of operation.

Rather more of a challenge was the NFDC's first forays into Europe, coming as it did a quarter of a century since the Continent had been at war and when Britain remained sceptical of the benefits of membership of the “common market”.

Image: NFDC members pioneered the use of mechanical demolition equipment

However, working in conjunction with its fellow national associations in Germany, France and the Netherlands, the NFDC put its considerable weight and influence behind the formation of what would become the European Demolition Association (EDA).

The NFDC influence in the global demolition industry remains undiminished. The Federation retains a place on the governing board of both the NDA and the EDA and NFDC-developed guidance on subjects including the safe use of high reach demolition excavators have been borrowed, evolved and badged by the NDA and EDA in recent years. And former NFDC and EDA president David Sinclair was recently recruited by the United Nations to create a demolition master-plan in earthquake-ravaged Haiti.

It is 70 years, almost to the day, since the founding fathers gathered in war torn London to sow the seeds of a fledgling organization that would one day become the guiding light for a global industry.

Whether founding president Charles (Charley) Willment ever envisaged his legacy growing and spreading to such an extent is not known. But his achievements and those of his successors - presidents, officers and members helped fashion the British demolition industry into one of the very few sectors in which the UK can still justifiably claim world leadership.

Image: The good old days ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |141|

The Importance of Source Segregation to Recycling Charlotte Morton, Chief Executive, ADBA

The Government’s Waste Review recognised anaerobic digestion (AD) as the treatment which realises the greatest environmental benefit from food waste. This recognition is welcome for an industry with unrealised – and still unrecognised - potential in the UK. It comes at a time when interest in the industry has already been growing strongly, and new plants are opening all the time.

However, despite the Government’s recognition that “where food waste is collected separately, this can act as a feedstock for anaerobic digestion”, they also suggested that “some consumers do not like separating out their food waste”. It refused to direct Local Authorities to follow the best practice identified, namely to source segregate organic waste and prioritise it for anaerobic digestion.

Source segregation is vital to create quality products from AD. To date, much of the focus around the technology has been on the benefits biogas can bring as a renewable energy. There is now increasing recognition of the value of digestate as a fertiliser replacement, owing to its high Nitrogen, Phosphorus and Potassium content. Phosphorus, in particular, is important to recycle into fertilisers, as it is a finite resource with no alternative which is already in limited supply around the world – and vital to life on earth. For digestate to be spread to farmland, though, the regulations (PAS110) require source segregation of food waste as a feedstock for AD. Even under PAS110, there are currently market barriers to recycling digestate to land. Principal among these is their acceptance by food producers. Some supermarkets and farm assurance schemes want to see more evidence about digestate before allowing it to be spread to land. |142| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

This is despite the Government’s Waste Resources Action Programme (WRAP) describing it as “safe” and saying that it can “substantially reduce bagged fertiliser use providing financial benefits for growers”.

WRAP’s work – and that of other groups – is helping to break down these barriers and spread acceptance of digestate. The Scottish Government and Zero Waste Scotland have been working with Quality Meat Scotland on this, and WRAP and ADBA have been working with the major supermarkets. Defra recently approved digestate for use on organic-certified land, a move which the Soil Association had already taken, where the waste has been source segregated. Langage Farm, a luxury dairy in Devon, opened an AD facility designed to produce quality digestate for their land last month, to address poor grass quality.

Colin Rank of Kemble Farms, who has been operating an Anaerobic Digestion plant since 2008, wrote last year that they are “seeing the benefit of being able to use digestate in place of bought in artificial fertiliser which is made from fossil fuel. The organic content of the digestate dramatically improves soil condition, holding in moisture and encouraging worm activity. We are improving the crop quality and durability, reducing costs and, because we supplement the diet of our cows with trace elements and minerals, these vital ingredients are being returned to the land. It’s a win/win situation on a massive scale.”

Government at all levels should, therefore, be preparing for a world where digestate is a valued and important part of food production, and source segregating waste as part of this. Taking a longer term view, there is also a strong financial reason for them to do so. Artificial

fertiliser prices are directly linked to the spot price of oil, which will only continue to increase – and, therefore, cause food prices to rise as well. This means that local authorities will be able to generate revenue (or at least save on gate fees) from the sale of digestate, and that there is a strong moral case for ensuring that there are renewable fertilisers which will help keep food affordable.

Source segregation also brings wider benefits to resource management. By taking the organic fraction out of waste streams, other materials such as cardboard, plastic and glass are left cleaner and less contaminated, which makes it easier for them to be recycled. Source segregation is an important part of ensuring that we extract maximum value from all resources, not just organics.

The Campaign for Real Recycling, involving leading materials re-processors, Friends of the Earth and others, has also been working in this area. They warn that comingled collections “could permanently undermine the environmental and financial benefits of recycling”, but that “source separated collection systems... produce materials that can be reprocessed, usually in the UK, creating value and benefits for everyone”. They also emphasise that the “improved price for materials collected can be used to offset collection costs.”

Where introduced, source segregation has clearly had a positive effect on attitudes to, and levels of, recycling. For example, in 2008 the London Borough of Bexley switched from weekly refuse and fortnightly recycling collections to weekly recycling with comingled food and garden waste and mixed recyclables collected separately. They saw a 20% drop – 18,000t – in residual waste for disposal in the first year, with 5,000t more organic waste and 5,000t

more recyclables collected. Their collection costs were unchanged, but they saved £820,000 on disposal costs in the first year alone and over £1m in the second year.

From their 220,000 residents there were only around 20 complaints.

The Government is hesitant about even suggesting that Local Authorities should follow examples such as this, much less dictating that they should do. However, the need for higher recycling rates and quality digestate products, as well as for renewable sources of gas, mean that source segregating our waste should be seen as a matter of strategic importance to the UK. This view is shared by many of the major businesses in the waste management sector. Tom Drury, Chief Executive of Shanks Group, said following the publication of the Waste Review that they want to see Government take action to bring in “separate collections of specific waste types, particularly food, to increase opportunities to recycle rather than landfill, and contribute to renewable energy targets. We support the comments made by the Anaerobic Digestion and Biogas Association (ADBA) highlighting the lack of recognition in the Review of the importance of source-segregating food waste, allowing easier recycling of products from other materials such as plastics and creating a quality fertiliser from AD which will help decarbonise food production.”

The momentum behind arguments for making the most of our resources is growing. The Government needs to stop worrying about pictures of ‘slop buckets’ on the front page of tabloid newspapers, and ensure that the UK can maximise value from recyclable materials by segregating them at source.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |143|

CONSERVATION Page 146 - 147 - Natural Environment White Paper - Richard Benyon Page 148-149 - Crisis For Vultures - Jemima Parry-Jones Mbe, Director, International Centre For Birds Of Prey Page 150 - 153 - Japanese Knotweed: Problem or Knot? - Mike Clough, Chief Executive, Japanese Knotweed Solutions

|144| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |145|

Natural Environment White Paper

By Richard Benyon

Our priority is economic growth. But if we are to create lasting economic prosperity, we must work with nature rather than against it.

Nature provides the raw materials for pretty much all our goods and services. But she doesn’t bill us, and this has led us to ignore nature’s economic value. We have taken from nature without giving back, thereby undermining the natural systems we rely on for our security and prosperity.

Our Natural Environment White Paper sets out how to halt and reverse this decline:by mending the broken link between our economy and nature.

We need to factor in the value of the benefits nature provides, even though we don’t get charged for them. If we look after nature, we will be in credit, and can enjoy the interest. If we spend, spend, spend then our stock of “natural capital” will run out.

To embed an understanding of nature’s value in our economy we need clear analysis and accurate measurements.

A key commitment in our White Paper is to work with the Office of National Statistics to develop a way of measuring our natural capital: of showing how much in the red we are, and monitoring our progress into the black. We will also establish an independent Natural Capital Committee, reporting to the Chancellor, to put the value of nature at the heart of our economic planning.

We want create the conditions to make the UK a more flexible, |146| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

forward-thinking place to do green business, and enable businesses to play their part.

So the Government will set up a business-led Ecosystem Markets Task Force to review the opportunities for UK business from expanding green goods, services, products, investment vehicles and markets which value and protect nature’s services. It will encourage businesses to use natural capital sustainably, protecting and improving it through their day-to-day operations and the management of their supply chains.

We will also promote dialogue with business about the role of both Government and companies to protect natural capital, through the Green Economy Council and Products Research Forum.

We will provide more information on BusinessLink about managing natural capital impacts.

And we’ll be publishing a Roadmap to a Green Economy, giving businesses more long-term certainty about the direction of future policy.

We will publish a new practical guide to help businesses report on their natural resource impacts, to give greater assurance to customers, investors and shareholders. We’ll also improve the data available to companies about their natural resource impacts – such as the use of ‘embedded’ water in products.

We’ll be supporting local action by businesses to promote a green economy and capture the value of nature – through Local Enterprise Partnerships and new Local Nature Partnerships.

To fulfill our pledge to be the greenest government ever, we need to instil nature’s value in our institutions, our business activity and our decision-making. We need to put nature in its rightful place: at the heart of everything we do.

In the last 12 months the UK Government has invested hundreds of millions in carbon capture and storage pilots and off shore wind; and introduced a new green deal to help insulate millions of homes in Britain. We’ve created the first bank dedicated to the greening of our economy. We’ve set an ambitious target of reducing our greenhouse gas emissions by 50% before 2027. And we’ve played a key role in getting the world back on track towards a binding deal on cutting carbon emissions.

But to fulfill our pledge to be the greenest government ever we must look beyond carbon and energy, and to the natural environment as a whole. We need to instil nature’s value in our institutions, our business activity and our decision-making.

That is what our White Paper on the natural environment sets out to do.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |147|

Crisis for Vultures

By Jemima Parry-Jones MBE, Director, International Centre for Birds of Prey During my life I have had some interesting requests for help, some have been tedious, some impossible and some fascinating, but somewhat out of the norm. In 1999 I was approached by a good friend of mine, a scientist in Glasgow who is known for his vulture work; he had been approached by the Parsis, a religious group of people with a large part of their following based in Mumbai, who had for 2,000 years had their dead consumed by vultures.

However the problem was that their dead were no longer being consumed by the vultures because apparently there were no vultures to do the task.

That year I had a number of trips to do, Japan: the Philippines and now India, and I am not a great one for travel! However, off I went to Mumbai (that trip is a story in itself) and saw the problem, and without realising what the real problem was, because no one did at that stage, put forward a few suggestions as to what could be done.

In 2000 I was invited to a conference in Delhi on the now beginning to be recognised, staggering decline of the three species of Gyps vultures in SE Asia, and in particular in India, Nepal and Pakistan. This international conference with vulture experts and enthusiasts from around the world were told of the disastrous decline. It had been highlighted by Dr Vibhu Prakash from Bombay Natural History Society (BNHS), the Parsis had been

|148| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

right, there was a huge problem with vultures, but not just the population that had regularly visited the Towers of Silence, this was a range wide catastrophe.

After the conference two groups started serious research on what was happening to the birds and, at the same time, surveys were initiated to see what the real numbers were. Sadly as is so often the case, because the birds had been enormously high in numbers and very common, no serious monitoring had been done before the decline.

As the surveys came in, the proportion of the decline became apparent and very worrying. 95% of the birds appeared to have gone: over time this increased to 99.9%.

All three species, the Oriental White-backed Vulture, the Long-billed Vulture and the Slender Billed Vulture were all in very serious trouble.

One group was researching a possible virus or infection to be responsible and the other group was looking into toxins and secondary poisoning, as was the case with DDT and dieldrin in Europe and North America in the past.

The results were staggering; in 2003, a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory (NSAID) drug called Diclofenac was found to be the cause. It had been invented by Ciba-Geigy (now Novartis) in 1973, an American company, for treating humans, had reached the end of its patent and had been licensed in SE Asia, Africa and South America for use as a veterinary drug. It was this drug that had killed vultures by the millions and is still killing them today in SE Asia.

An Action Plan was put forward by the International group; this consisted of monitoring the remaining birds, monitoring the use of Diclofenac, removing Diclofenac as a veterinary drug, finding a suitable replacement drug for cattle that was safe for vultures, and starting a captive breeding programme within the three main countries to keep a population of birds safe during the period of removing Diclofenac, and to then be able to repopulate

still being used. The RSPB needs to be congratulated for their incredible support of the project, without which there would not be a vulture conservation programme. ZLS has sent their vet Andrew Routh over, who has been crucial to the welfare of the birds. BNHS needs to be congratulated in taking on what is a huge conservation programme.

In Nepal they are doing great things with Diclofenac-free zones. Dr Ian Newton has accepted the Chair of a new group called SAVE - Save Asian Vultures from Extinction, which was launched in India and Nepal in February this year, and we slowly but surely move forward to save the vultures from extinction.

their original ranges once they were Diclofenac free. The plan was five centres over the three main countries involved.

The centre at Pinjore, which had been the research centre for one of the groups working together on finding out the cause of the decline ( RSPB, ZSL, NBPT and Bombay Natural History Society), was rapidly turned into a breeding centre and the surviving birds there were the start of the breeding programme. Over time two more Centres were built within India, one in Pakistan and one in Nepal. There are a total number of approximately 260 birds now in captivity, all three species have now been bred in the first Indian facility, and one in the second, the other facilities still have quite young birds, so there will be a wait for them to get to breeding age.

I would guess that if I had a beef at all, it would be that although the States in India (some of them) have done fantastic work and generally helped the projects as much as they can, Indian Central Government still need to come up with more than they have managed so far; if they put a tiny percentage of what they put into Tiger conservation, the vulture programme would be safe and guaranteed.

Come to think of it, I have an even more serious beef: Novartis, who invented the drug in the first place, and no doubt made a fortune with it, have not supported the programme in any serious form, which I think is disgraceful. Drug companies canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t be expected to test for every eventuality and this was a truly unusual one, however when a huge conservation issue like this comes to light, they should absolutely put up substantial funds to rectify their mistake, and accept their responsibility, because it is undoubtedly theirs.

Our (ICBP) continuing involvement with the Centres has been in training of husbandry techniques with the vultures, design of the enclosures, training in incubation and rearing techniques, design of the incubator and brooder rooms and the providing, through the National Birds of Prey Trust, of some of the breeding aviaries and the incubators.

The Trust send out Brinsea Incubators and I am delighted to say that they have worked as well as expected. Simon Brough my Curator has been over twice to India and spent many hours on the phone at 4.00am helping to solve incubation and hatching queries. The team in India have done fantastically with their first attempts at artificial incubation last year. One member of the team came to an incubation course held at ICBP in November 2010, and the first eggs are already hatching in the incubators in Pinjore in January 2011. Diclofenac has been banned from being made in the area and banned as a veterinary drug. The RSPB along with BNHS are monitoring dead cattle to research the amount of Diclofenac ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |149|

Japanese Knotweed: Problem or Knot?

By Mike Clough, Chief Executive, Japanese Knotweed Solutions

If you were to believe everything that you read - then currently you may be under the impression that your property is under attack by an alien plant that can grow through anything and smashes concrete for fun..? There are many horror stories around but should you be in a panic and be unable to sleep… or is this all down to ‘scaremongering’ by unscrupulous contractors trying to make a quick buck?

If a detailed programme of works has been commissioned and careful track kept relating to areas of growth – then there is no reason for a lender to withhold money on a mortgage. The Council for Mortgage Lenders is currently preparing an advisory document which should clarify all of the points relating to Japanese Knotweed and should be available later this year.

From its introduction to its rapid accidental spread, Japanese Knotweed has gone from being a prized ornamental plant to an object of complete paranoia.

Recent statements by mortgage lenders have fuelled this panic by stating that they … ‘will not provide a mortgage on a property with Japanese Knotweed within 30 metres of a boundary’.

I believe that I am uniquely placed to try and clarify some of these issues having been involved with Japanese Knotweed eradication from the ‘birth’ of the industry.

The situation has been further confused by a lender that would provide a mortgage on a property with Japanese Knotweed but would not lend on a property with knotweed just outside of the ownership. Whilst this may sound a little confusing if you actually think it through then it does make sense – knotweed within a boundary can be managed and treated, knotweed outside of the boundary is ‘outside’ of your control.

The hard facts of issues relating to mortgages are that in these harsh economic times – if a lender has any reason to withhold money – then it will. The careful homeowner should have answers for the surveyor who spots knotweed on your property. Employing a trained specialist will alleviate most problems from picky lenders but a detailed report prepared using advice and information available on the internet should also be sufficient to push a sale through. Well documented photographs and details of precautions taken should be kept as well as marked and fenced areas where treatment has been undertaken.

|150| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

I qualified as a Landscape Architect in the early 80’s at a time when ‘wildlife’ gardens were all the rage.

Everyone was reducing the time spent on eradicating ‘weeds’ and deciding to abandon mowing regimes on their grassed areas in favour of ‘wild flower’ meadows.

Swathes of uncut grass abounded with reduced areas of short mown high maintenance sward.

Japanese Knotweed was often planted as a screen or a green alternative for embankment stabilisation, and Buddleja was actively encouraged to grow and planted by the hundreds to encourage butterflies.

These two species are now the bane of the rail track

MONSANTO - ROUND UP

maintenance companies and a nightmare on poorly managed sites.

This new found interest in ‘natural’ landscapes was seized upon by landowners as a perfect excuse to reduce their weed control budgets and save money on grass cutting costs….with serious consequences.

What most ‘natural landscape lovers’ didn’t realise was that if you stop maintaining your landscaped areas – it isn’t the wildflowers that thrive – it’s those plants designed to out compete our native species that will take over.

Many areas away from the watchful eye of the maintenance teams were abandoned to what were deemed ‘wild’ or ‘natural’ – the reality was more ‘unnatural’ with a massive boom in the spread of invasive species. Huge swathes of Japanese Knotweed and Himalayan balsam have spread and established to such an extent that many believe that these plants are actually ‘native’.

My personal theory is that it is down to landowners simply not looking at what has been happening. Most people are inexperienced in identifying plants, and take a very simplistic view – if it’s green or has flowers – then its ‘natural’. Japanese knotweed and Himalayan balsam are not unattractive plants during their growing period between April and October – both have attractive flowers and lush foliage – but both will grow to the preclusion of all of our native species.

So if we can understand why these plants have spread and why they have been allowed to gain a foothold in our landscape – should we be as fearful as the scaremongers suggest? Well to a certain extent the answer has to be a resounding ‘YES’.

We ignore these species at our peril. Negligence is these plants’ greatest ally, they rely on the fact that we aren’t looking , they rely on sneaking up on our bits of open ground that nobody cares about – then they take over!

Open your eyes, learn to know what plants are a problem, learn to understand how these plants spread and how they expand and learn that their only ambition is… total domination! I believe that most people walk around with their eyes closed, oblivious to the insidious spread of the non-native species. From a practical home owner point of view, you need to be vocal.

If you are aware that Japanese Knotweed is in your local area, don’t wait till it’s on your doorstep….ring the local authority, ring |152| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

the landowner – make yourself a nuisance! It’s only by constant vigilance and repeated phone calls that anything will get sorted with Invasive Non-Native Species – you need to be the eyes and voice of the local community, our native species can’t speak for themselves – THEY NEED YOU TO BE AWARE. These plants will spread rapidly and can quickly dominate any area in which they get a foothold.

If Japanese Knotweed has already established itself in your vicinity then find out who is the landowner.

Knotweed has the ability to grow at a rate of roughly 7 meters in all directions and will continue to expand and spread exponentially until stopped - either by some form of physical containment or by intervention from man.

Arguments will often ensue as to where the plant has originated from - thus one of the most effective precautions you can take as a home owner is to plot where the plant has been spotted. Get some professional advice or simply take a tape measure and plot the position and distance the plant is from your property. The following year carry out the same exercise and you will quickly get an idea of how rapidly the plant is heading in your direction.

Whilst carrying out your survey you should also be trying to find the owner of the land and advise them that if Japanese Knotweed breaches the boundary of your property you will be taking legal action and using the measurements taken over previous seasons as proof of the origin of the infestation.

With a few simple measurements and photographs all the arguing can be sidestepped – it’s a slam dunk and a legal victory – costs would be awarded for restoring your property and removing the infestation.

If you already have Japanese Knotweed within your property boundary then the sooner you start your eradication programme the better. If you can afford to get some professional help then this will save you a great deal of trouble – but even if you can’t, then there are some simple steps that you can take.

•

•

•

•

• •

•

Fence off the infestation – if you have the space allow a minimum of 3 metres from surface growth to fence line (7 metres recommended) Allow for repeated treatment with a glyphosate based herbicide such as Roundup Repeat treatment until no new surface growth appears Leave the surface undisturbed for a minimum of 12 months Check for new growth Ideally leave root system in place and plant other species around the rhizome Check and monitor every year thereafter.

One of the main requirements for a potential buyer will be to see a planned and detailed Knotweed eradication strategy – and providing you follow the points set out above and photograph your works then there should be no reason for there to be problems.

The advantage of having a professional involved is that they can bring insurance backed warranties in to play – and give the lenders the back up of a qualified team.

However there should be no need to panic and no need to be scared.

At the end of the day the issues surrounding Japanese Knotweed relate more to using your common sense than getting into a flap about alien invaders.

Yes these plants can be a problem – but they can be dealt with – without losing sleep!

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |153|

MISCELLANY Page 155 - Environment Prosecutions Page 156 - 157 - Finance, Neil Ackroyd, Group Chairman, Precision Corporate Finance Page 158 - 160 - Mapping - Mike Williams, Principal Data Scientist, and Guy Collins, Business Analyst, Landmark Promap Page 161 - 162 - Education - Keith Marshall OBE, chief executive at SummitSkills Page 164 - 165 - “achieving zero carbon target” - Terry Nash, Director, UK Sustainable Development Association “ Page 166 - Product Guide Page 167 - 186 - Case Studies Page 187 - 188 - Famous Last Words - Sarah Butler-Sloss, Founder Director of the Ashden Awards for Sustainable Energy

|154| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

ENVIRONMENTAL PROSECUTIONS £10,500 fine for sewage in Wakefield stream Yorkshire Water was fined £10,500 for letting sewage get into the stream that leads to the lake at Pugneys Country Park.

It was also ordered to pay full costs of £2,324.67 to the Environment Agency, which brought the case.

Wakefield Council contacted environment officers to report sewage in a drain running close to Denby Dale Road in the town.

Composting firm fined for breaching site permit A Somerset company has been ordered to pay £16,000 in fines and costs for failing to run a waste composting site properly and causing offensive odours.

Hinton Organics (Wessex) Ltd is licensed to accept up to 25,000 tonnes of green waste a year at its composting facility on the outskirts of Keynsham near Bristol. The material is processed and turned into compost.

The company is only permitted to take green waste including sawdust and wood shavings, cardboard, vegetable fibres, bark, soil, cardboard and vegetable waste. It is not allowed to accept food waste.

Businesses are encouraged to learn from United Utilities’ mistakes The Environment Agency has urged companies to ensure they have the correct monitoring and processes in place to minimise their environmental impact. The call comes as United Utilities were fined £145,000 at Liverpool Magistrates’ Court for illegally discharging partially treated sewage into the River Mersey.

Water from the River Mersey and the sea dilutes the partially treated sewage and while there is no evidence of actual harm to the environment and wildlife, there is potential for localised impact in the area of the river near the outfall pipe.

Vegetable oil spill costs Evesham bakery company over £31,500 On Thursday 7 July 2011, at Worcester Magistrates Court, Dawn Foods Limited pleaded guilty to two charges that resulted in the pollution of the River Avon in June 2010.

Dawn Foods Limited, the manufacturers of baked goods, based in Worcestershire, were fined £23,500 and ordered to pay £7,950 in costs.

Fined for illegal waste site Kidderminster company fined for illegal operations Kidderminster Property Investments Limited pleaded guilty to an offence of knowingly permitting illegal waste operations to take place on land that they owned at Churchfields Business Park, Kidderminster in March 2009.

The charge was brought by the Environment Agency under the Environmental Permitting (England & Wales) Regulations 2007. The company was fined £25,000 and ordered to pay costs of £10,313.45 along with a victim surcharge.

Two members of the same family have been fined by magistrates for running an illegal waste site at Leighton Buzzard.

Alex and Stewart Pettigrew are registered to transport waste but are not permitted to keep it at Wing Caravan Site, Cublington Road, Wing where Environment Agency officers found waste on site.

Aylesbury Magistrates’ Court fined each man £2,000 after hearing that in 2009 Oxfordshire and Buckinghamshire Gypsy and Traveller Services told and wrote to Stewart Pettigrew stating that no white goods such as fridges were allowed to be taken to and stored on site. They were each also ordered to pay £3,000 towards costs.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |155|

BANKING ON GREEN

By Neil Ackroyd, Group chairman, Precision Corporate Finance Stand first As the green technology industry continues to grow, will we see a fresh round of consolidation in the green technology market? Neil Ackroyd, group chairman of award-winning corporate finance boutique Precision Corporate Finance explains what will drive the market.

Whilst many sectors are experiencing falling profits and increased unemployment, the green technology market is looking decisively more positive. Confidence is growing in this maturing market by the day. For evidence look no

further than the Stobart group’s recent £50 million commitment to its biomass business.

With the coalition Government’s commitment to climate change, public sector support for the green technology industry has continued at a time when many industries are suffering from public sector cuts. This year has already seen the launch of the Green Economy Council in February to advise the Government on how to introduce green growth policies which can only be seen as a positive step for the industry.

Internationally, the opportunities are plentiful for companies in the green technology industry to make the most of a worldwide shift towards sustainable practices with significant investment in green technology in many of the world’s major economies.

However, with this optimism comes a health warning: the onus is now very much on UK-based green technology industry to take advantage of these improving conditions and capitalise on growth when it arrives. Businesses cannot simply rely on Government support for growth.

Given these unusual economic conditions, is the UK industry set for a round of consolidation with a series of mergers and acquisitions (M&A)?

In my view the answer is ‘it depends’, by which I mean it depends on the ongoing health of the

Wind tu

rbines

|156| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

economy. As the UK recovers from recession there is little doubt there will be a growth in M&A across all markets as confidence returns. However, the one factor that remains unknown is the long-term effect of the Governmentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s austerity programme and how this will impact on the effectiveness of schemes like the Green Economy Council in encouraging growth. Will the cuts severely dent confidence or is business strong enough to ride it out?

In the green technology market I predict that, by the end of 2011, conditions will continue to see improvement as in 2010. However, outside of the industry, pressure to reduce or at least limit, spending will continue in the UK. This may limit the growth of many businesses in the sector and margins will be squeezed as companies focus budgets elsewhere. In these conditions there will need to be some consolidation, whether that is done by organic growth or acquisition.

I believe these conditions will also create opportunities for businesses that are bold and prepared to invest in the future. Business owners should be looking to spend their money on improving staff training, technology and marketing so that they are able to capitalise on the recovery as it accelerates.

Green r oofs

In these conditions there will clearly be some businesses that cope with the pressure better than others. Those who are prepared to be bold will look for deals that will generate long-term value in 2012 and beyond.

Equally there will be opportunities for businesses looking for a sale. Making your business an attractive takeover candidate requires careful planning. But with the right advice and preparation business owners will be able to make a profitable sale.

I believe that the current combination of conditions will lead to a small but significant growth in M&A activity during the next 12 months. This will increase in 2012 when other businesses, encouraged by the economic recovery, will seek deals but by then the best opportunities may well have been snapped-up.

So if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re serious about growing your business, the next six months are critical if you are going to get your company in poll position to make the most of the recovery as it continues.

wer Solar po

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |157|

How mapping and environmental data has become accessible to all Mike Williams, Principal Data Scientist, and Guy Collins, Business Analyst as well as active OpenStreetMap contributor, look at the evolution of digital mapping and how, as a result, environmental data has become more accessible than ever before.

notably from ESRI Inc. in California. The same period also saw the emergence of Computer Aided Design (‘CAD’) packages such as AutoCAD. Although developed primarily for industrial or architectural design, CAD systems could also consume geographical data. The main limitation of both GIS and CAD in those days was not only the available computing power but also the fact that data could only be stored in proprietary formats, creating many data silos and preventing easy data access.

Who would have thought 20 years ago that you could access the UK’s entire road network – all 245,000 miles of it – on a device small enough to hold in the palm of your hand? And that you could ask this device to take you from Eagle Way to Acacia Avenue? And how many of you have tracked Santa on Google Earth on Christmas Eve? The technological changes over the last few decades have obviously been enormous. As a result, it has made mapping and environmental data accessible like never before, at the touch of a button.

The UK in particular has been a world leader in making data available, and this article will review the evolution of over 40 years of digital mapping and information, and where this leads the environmental data user in the future.

In the past decades there have been many developments that have revolutionised how people use maps, gain access to them and ultimately interact with them. In 1995 the UK became the first country in the world to be fully mapped electronically at large scale as Ordnance Survey introduced Land-Line™.

Geographical Information Systems (‘GIS’) can actually be traced as far back as the 1960s. At its most basic level, GIS attaches location to data, whether it is a borehole or a pizza joint. One could argue that it is this particular combination of data and location that turns it into usable information (a process known in the industry as ‘geocoding’).

However it wasn’t until the 1980s that the first commercial GIS computer package became available, |158| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Image: Promap screen shot Accessibility of reliable location information broke new ground with the advent of the Global Positioning Systems (‘GPS’) in the early 1990s. This was greatly accelerated when President Clinton switched off military encryption for civilian users in 2000, resulting in a significant gain in positional accuracy. The early 2000s also saw greater interoperability between CAD and GIS packages, not least helped by specialist data translation tools such as Safe Software’s FME, allowing a free flow of data at least within the professional data community.

Then of course came the popularisation of satnavs, driven by companies such as Navteq and TeleAtlas who initially focused on the creation of streetmapping databases to make mobile navigation possible. By then the Internet had also made great strides forward and so we saw the first web-based mapping and data applications emerge, eventually evolving into the super-powered handheld

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |159|

devices that we are accustomed to today.

None of this has been a sudden change. Yes, there are certain milestone events such as the release of Google Maps in 2005 but, looking back, it has been a gradual and steady evolution from niche professional services to a mass market. As a result, however, the way in which we interact with data has changed radically.

Twenty years ago interaction with data barely had the luxury of a graphical interface. At this time, before OS Land-Line™ was fully available it may have been necessary to digitise your base map from large-scale paper maps. Now, entire archives of historical maps are widely available in electronic format, digitised by organisations such as Landmark who, in collaboration with Ordnance Survey, scanned the entire national archives of historic maps. This was subsequently extended to historical building plans, town maps and even Russian KGB mapping of over 100 UK cities collected during the Cold War. As a result the UK is probably the best mapped country in the world, both historically and currently.

This plethora of mapping and data is now widely available through portals such as Promap, which in the 1990s started out as a Data CD delivery service. Now of course all this has moved online and Promap offers immediate and flexible access to over 70 data sets and map layers, including the highly detailed OS MasterMap™.

Importantly, the portal also deals with all data licensing, which can be a tricky issue and is often overlooked by the casual user. Portals such as Promap deal directly with the supplier so users only have to agree to one set of licence terms even when purchasing data from multiple sources. This saves a lot of time and money.

Today there is also an increasing amount of data available for free. This is driven by a number of independent data collection initiatives such as OpenStreetMap and, more recently, also by central government. Thousands of datasets are now available for download at http://data. gov.uk. Besides, central government has also opened up OS mapping and many other datasets to all public bodies via one central agreement, the so-called PSMA (Public Sector Mapping Agreement).

It should be noted however that, whatever the source, it takes skill, time and money to create good quality data. This remains the case also where data is free at the point of use – “free” in this context means that someone else has already paid for it. Google and Microsoft, for example, have paid significant sums of money for content that is free to use on their websites, such as street mapping or aerial imagery. It is therefore important to read their small print, as usually the data on offer is only for private use and cannot be used commercially. Indeed, Google have recently released a permission wizard on their website to |160| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

provide guidelines on this. OpenStreetMap, on the other hand, is free to use and re-use but, because it has been collected by volunteers, you need to understand the pros and cons of this dataset before deciding on its suitability.

Having said that, coverage is growing all the time and most of the UK and Western Europe is now mapped at mid-scale.

What is interesting to see is that, despite the availability of free data, commercial data suppliers are seeing increasing demand for professional, high-quality, paid-for mapping data. This is illustrated by the Geo Information Group who famously created UKMap™ in 2009. This is an integrated product suite including a highly detailed 1:1000 topographic map layer bundled with custom aerial imagery, points of interest, a terrain model and an addressing database. This offering is a direct competitor to OS MasterMap™ as it provides a credible alternative where there is coverage (currently all of Greater London within the M25). As we have seen significant uptake of this type of product by our customers, it goes to show that professionals understand, and are still willing to pay for, quality data where this makes sense.

As we move into the future, the ubiquity and accessibility of data will only accelerate. Driven by technological advances such as mobile cloud computing as well as legislative drivers behind data transparency and accessibility, we can all look forward to smart data ‘apps’.

These will be available on your device of choice (desktop, tablet or mobile), wherever you are (in the field or in the office).

As a result you will also be able to take advantage of custom workflows specifically tailored to your needs. We are already seeing early examples of this, e.g. through the introduction of Envirocheck Analysis, an easy-touse map tool that allows environmental professionals to easily overlay and analyse historical and environmental mapping during their Phase 1 desktop study.

In terms of data quality and accessibility, environmental professionals have a lot to look forward to. All you have to do is make sure you take advantage of it and are not left behind.

Image: UKMap 3D city view

Training Challenges That May Hamper The Uk’s Renewables Targets.

Training It seems that in recent months, the barriers to companies, households and new builds investing in environmental technologies are coming down. With Government announcements such as the Green Deal and increased funding opportunities through new initiatives, incorporating green technologies is now a realistic prospect for many people.

Support is strengthening in the UK from both the Government and the public to meet our national carbon reduction targets. But those good intentions can only be made reality if there is a strong supply of correctly trained tradespeople to advise on, install and maintain these new technologies.

As the Sector Skills Council for the BSE sector, which includes the plumbing, electrical engineering, heating and ventilation, air conditioning and refrigeration workforces, we know there is a gap between supply and demand for qualified technicians to cope with the influx of more accessible environmental technologies.

The demand is only going to increase, particularly in the domestic markets. The Government’s Green Deal papers outlined in June open up funding opportunities for homeowners to install energy efficiency measures and green technologies such as solar panels and biomass boilers. With up to 14 million householders eligible for a renewable energy overhaul, the need for trained installers is huge.

Employer needs Only householders using approved installers will qualify for Green Deal loans, to ensure the technologies are effectively and safely installed, however our research shows that much of current environmental technology training is not up to the required standards to cope with the growing interest from householders and larger builds alike.

SummitSkills carried out a series of interviews with employers in the sector to gain an understanding of the level of demand and engagement in environmental

By Keith Marshall OBE, chief executive at SummitSkills the Sector Skills Council for Building Services Engineering (BSE) technologies in the building services engineering (BSE) sector.

The resulting Stage 3 LMI (Labour Market Intelligence) research, the last of three reports into employers and training providers’ views of the sector, identifies a number of training courses which do not match employers’ requirements. It also found a number of smaller training providers don’t require those attending their training courses to be experienced or qualified in relevant trades.

We found that many companies indicated they are engaged in or wish to engage in environmental technologies, but that they do not have the expected core competencies to do so. This could be in part due to these companies being coded for one particular BSE industry while being fully competent in others as well.

What was clear from this report was that overall, the industries in the sector are eager to progress their environmental offering, but lack the skills necessary to do so.

Trainers in the sector will be under increased pressure to provide not only government and employer recognised courses, but also clear advice as to the employment opportunities following individual courses.

Rogue trainers As interest in new energy efficient and renewable technologies increases and qualified tradespeople enjoy higher demand for their skills, we anticipate a surge in the number of rogue trainers in the sector, trying to offer below-standard training to cash in on the extra interest generated by new incentives.

The future of the BSE sector relies on high quality work from a trusted, qualified workforce and homeowners and owners of larger builds need to feel comfortable that their steps into energy saving and generating technologies are being undertaken by professionals, in a safe and efficient way.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |161|

I would urge Government, employers and learners alike to be aware of the dangers of jumping into environmental training without the proper planning and quality assurance.

To ensure training colleges and employers are aware of what qualifies as approved training in new renewable technologies SummitSkills have been working with the industry to provide guidance to the sector.

Leading the way We have led the development of a National Skills Academy for Environmental Technologies, which will play a major role in transforming the opportunity for businesses in the sector to access key training and skills.

The Skills Academy is being designed to provide training in the design, installation and maintenance of technologies such as solar thermal, photovoltaics, heat pumps and water harvesting and recycling. It is being supported by employers across the building services engineering sector.

We think this is a unique opportunity for employers to help shape, influence and drive training in environmental technologies, and ensure the future success of high quality and competence in the renewables sector.

The Academy will be supported by regional hub members, who will be responsible for leading a cluster of training providers in their region to deliver accredited qualifications.

Working in partnership with these new hub and cluster members SummitSkills will ensure that employers have access to and can share and extend best practice technology training to become advocates for environmental technologies.

It is vital that employers approach training in the right way, and do not see environmental technologies as a skill set which can be singled out on its own. In our experience, employers are asking for existing trades people to be â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;up-skilledâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; rather than introducing new, purely environmentally trained apprentices.

We strongly believe green skills are an extension of the BSE sectorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s skills and should be treated as such from the entry level learning stage right through to current operator retraining.

There is no need for a whole new environmental technologies workforce to be introduced, but instead to build on the skills of the existing workforce and incorporate new technology skills into apprenticeship training and at all levels. Employers have a responsibility to ensure that entry level learners have an industry recognised apprenticeship or equivalent qualifications before they move into learning these new skills. |162| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Future challenges Undoubtedly the rise in environmental technologies is one of the biggest challenges in the BSE industries we have seen in recent times. It is going to be an immensely demanding time while the sector breaks new ground in training its operatives in designing, maintaining and installing environmental technologies to the high standard that is demanded.

There is a wealth of opportunities for employers to take providing they have enough appropriately trained tradespeople to keep up with the increased workload.

At SummitSkills, we welcome the initiatives put forward by the Government to encourage more people to take up new products and equipment to help generate their own energy, or reduce their carbon emissions. At the same time, as a voice for the sector, we need to ensure that the Government, employers and bodies like ourselves are doing all we can to help equip our workforces for the future, through schemes like the National Skills Academy for Environmental Technologies.

Whilst most in our industries were disappointed with the announcement that small scale domestic installations will benefit from feed-in tariffs over large projects, we welcomed this announcement by DECC as an increase in smaller domestic opportunities will provide the industry with more chances to compete for and showcase environmental technology installation.

It is the engineers in our industry who have the highest levels of interaction with consumers and as such will be the advocates of everyday energy technologies in households and workplaces.

We believe the BSE industries have a big part to play to ensure success in cutting our carbon emissions, and using more renewable technologies across the UK and making sure the right people with the right skills do the jobs is paramount.

Training is the key to our plumbers, electricians, heating and ventilating engineers, air conditioning and refrigeration experts becoming the champions of the energy efficiency measures the UK is waiting for.

SummitSkills is the Sector Skills Council for the Building Services Engineering Sector. For more information and to download the LMI reports, visit www.summitskills.org.uk

… achieving zero carbon targets …

By Terry Nash, Director, UK Sustainable Development Association Terry Nash is a director of the UK Sustainable Development Association; he is also the managing director of the Gusto Group which specialises in the design and construction of sustainable homes, and associated specialist technologies such as rainwater harvesting, SUDS and energy monitoring and management systems. … zero carbon by 2016 ..

With Government confirming its commitment to achieving zero carbon for regulated emissions for new homes by 2016, and for non-domestic buildings by 2019, timescales are shortening on identifying how practically this can be achieved. Tools at the disposal of developers include the setting of minimum standards for the fabric of buildings, incorporation into schemes of on-site or connected low/ zero carbon technologies (LZC) to meet specific carbon compliance limits, with the remainder potentially being achieved through off-site allowable solutions. … building fabric measures …

Using the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) as a yardstick for the transition, new homes being built today by the social housing sector are already required to achieve level 3 or 4 of the Code, with all new homes being built to this standard by 2012. This will rise to levels 5 or 6 for all new homes being built by 2016. Amended Building Regulations are playing a key role in this transition, particularly in relation to the fabric of buildings, throwing into stark relief the importance of the review currently getting underway for an update due to be issued in 2013.

Not surprisingly, in the current economic cycle for the house-building sector, the consensus in the building industry is that any further tightening of Building Regulations should be “limited”, which can effectively be decoded as “no changes at all”. This is a practical view with which the British Government may be inclined to have some sympathy; however, EC regulations require the harmonisation of national Building Regulations, making the outcome of the 2013 review less certain. Assuming they change very little, if at all, in relation to the fabric of buildings, then this will be tantamount to relying upon LZC technologies and off-site allowable solutions to complete the necessary transition to CSH levels 5/6. … on-site LZC …

The various LZC technologies available to developers (solar thermal, solar-PV, ground and air-source heat pumps et-al) are already well understood, and are becoming more cost-effective as the expanding market brings down prices, and Government subsidies (FITs & RHIs) are introduced; for end-user commissioned homes and buildings, the options are pretty straightforward as investment in the technologies result in an associated compensating and guaranteed income stream through FITS/RHIs. For the speculative housing developers, however, the equation is much less straightforward as whilst they make |164| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

the investment, the home-buyer reaps the associated income stream. This would not be an issue if the selling price for the property reflected both the investment and the income stream, but for the foreseeable future houseprices are much more likely to be driven by location and local amenities – attributes which new houses share with existing pre-built homes just round the corner. Or in other words, the developer’s building costs are likely to be substantially increased to meet the higher levels of the Code, without compensating rises in selling prices; that, for sure, is not sustainable by the house-building industry unless land values fall dramatically – in some areas possibly to zero!

To overcome this barrier to achieving zero carbon new homes over the next five years, developers are needing to become more innovative in their approach to LZC. Put simply, as they are making the investment, they need to retain ownership of the associated FITs and RHIs subsidies to repay the investment over time. But they are builders, not investment companies or energy suppliers.

The most straightforward way of overcoming this dilemma is for developers to contract with a new breed of energy management companies (“Emcos”) who specialise in funding the investment in LZC; the Emco retains ownership of the technology, and benefits from associated FITs and RHIs. The Emco also provides an ongoing call-out and maintenance service to the home-owners, and sellson the heat and energy being produced by the installed technologies to the home-owners at a price below the market rate; this arrangement would be guaranteed over the FIT/RHI timescale.

This model, which is already appearing in the market place, produces three winners, namely: the developer, who can meet CSH requirement without investing in LZC; the homeowner, who gets cheaper heat/power and a free service contract; and the energy management company who make their commercial profit through FITs and RHIs. Looking ahead, therefore, it is not too fanciful for developers to start looking at LZC as an additional income, rather than a costcentre, as the prices of renewables technologies continues to fall, and the purchasing power of the Emcos increases. … allowable solutions …

The third strand of achieving zero carbon, namely use of other allowable solutions, is much less straightforward, with the Zero Carbon Hub organisation being charged by Government with taking the lead in identifying an approach acceptable and practical to all.

The concept of off-site allowable solutions arises from the reality that not all sites will be capable of totally mitigating carbon emissions on-site. The concept of “allowable solutions” has therefore been introduced to enable some portion of the overall emissions to be compensated for offsite.

The principle behind the concept is that housing developers will make a payment to an Allowable Solutions provider who will take the responsibility and liability for ensuring that the required emission reduction requirement is met via a small, medium or large carbon-saving project. Attached to this arrangement, is the Government’s over-riding objective for zero carbon to be affordable, leading to the requirement for off-site allowable solutions to be cheaper than on-site measures, per unit of carbon saved.

Alongside this runs the aim of Local Authorities to maximise the benefits to local communities of developments in their area. Bearing in mind that any particular development will result in finite financial outcomes, practical ways need to be found to bring together the competing financial requirements of providing community benefits and achieving carbon zero.

completed. The Governmentbacked report “Integrated Sustainable Design Solutions for Modular Neighbourhoods” is, despite its snappy title, a recent good example.

Under one handy cover, thought-provoking holistic developer guidance is given covering all aspects of sustainability including energy/carbon considerations, surface water management, water consumption, waste management and local amenity.

In short, the 2016 carbon zero challenge and the requirements of the Code for Sustainable Homes sets a very high bar for housing developers – but one which, with the support available, presents new opportunities for a currently beleaguered sector.

The reports acknowledged above, together with a CSH technical guide are available as downloads at www.uk-sda.org

This results in a “choices model” along the lines depicted, giving Local Authorities the opportunity to develop an allowable solutions policy within their local plans; this in turn allows the developer to seek out a best-value outcome from their perspective by either making a contribution to a local Community Energy Fund, or by contracting privately with a third-party provider. Where the Local Authority does not have an allowable solutions policy, then the developer is able to purchase an allowable solution from a private energy fund.

Running alongside these arrangements are the need for a verification and certification scheme able to show that the investment will achieve the required carbon emissions reduction. The scheme will be designed to monitor delivery, and provide timely delivery of the credits needed to meet the requirements of Building Regulations. … better by design …

Achieving zero carbon by 2016, when set alongside the broader sustainability principles covered by the Code for Sustainable Homes, places an increasing premium on thoughtful and careful design for which useful background work has already been ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |165|

PRODUCT GUIDE Save £145 on your energy bills every year With the recent warm weather it’s easy to forget the chill of winter; but with increasing energy prices there has never been a better time to insulate your home.

Loft insulation could save you around £145 every year, and through the Affordable Energy Scheme it could cost as little as £148 or FREE if you are on qualifying benefits and/or over the age of 70*.

To find out more call free on 0800 096 6356 to speak with an advisor, email info@affordableenergy.co.uk or visit the website www.affordableenergy.co.uk

Toyota committed to the waste & recycling sector at RWM 2011 Toyota Material Handling UK is to showcase its latest range of forklifts and pallet trucks to the waste and recycling at the RWM 2011 The Tonero forklift has been developed to address key industry concerns of safety and durability. Featuring Toyota's unique System of Active Stability, the Tonero helps operators to manoeuvre the truck confidently and safely. The chassis of the truck is designed in rugged steel for maximum durability, combined with enclosed connectors to resist water and dust, allowing the Tonero to thrive in tough environments.

For more information visit www.toyota-forklifts.co.uk or call 0870 850 1409.

Enhanced environmental performance for next generation packaging PILLOW PAK air cushion film from leading European packaging solutions manufacturer FP International has been upgraded to significantly boost its performance and offer sustainable benefits for protective packaging.

PILLOW PAK film now achieves ‘Green Family’ standards, which means its sustainability is enhanced.

The air cushion material is free from any toxics, hazardous or heavy metals and from manufacturing through usage to disposal, Green Family products are designed with the smallest possible carbon footprint in mind. For more information, visit the company’s website – www.fpintl.eu

A new low cost fixed infrared gas detector for halocarbon refrigerants an alternative to aspirated systems The new fixed infrared gas detector for halocarbon refrigerants manufactured by Murco now offers an alternative to aspirated IR systems.

Our new infrared detector has been specifically designed to offer better performance at a fraction of the cost of many competing products. The halocarbon IR gas detector offers reliable, real-time and continuous monitoring of potentially hazardous leaks. This eliminates the problems that may occur with aspirated systems due to blocked filters, damaged tubes and delayed air sample analysis

Launch of New Energy Saving Flourish Lighting Collection Now days more people are eco-friendly. This usually means unattractive lighting. So do you opt for looks or do you sacrifice on style? The long anticipated launch of the new energy saving Flourish lighting collection is finally here.

The entire Flourish collection comprises of suspended pendant, table lamp and floor lamp. This new and exciting lighting collection is available in three colours, red, black and silver.

This fabulous lighting collection will transform both domestic and commercial interiors and will bring the style of a trendy West End bar or restaurant to you whilst maintaining an industrial and retro feel. www.alexanderandpearl.co.uk/

Microlease, the leading test equipment rental and asset management organisation, has today announced that it has added the Agilent U8903A 10Hz – 100kHz Audio Analyser to its expanding inventory..

The Agilent 10Hz – 100kHz Audio Analyser combines the functionality of a distortion meter, SINAD meter, frequency counter, AC voltmeter and FFT analyser with a low-distortion audio source. It is the next-generation replacement for the widely-used HP 8903B audio analyser. To ease the transition between the two, the U8903A audio analyser features a built-in code emulator which allows the U8903A to read the old R2D2 programming codes of the 8903B. For more information, call 0208 4200200 or visit www. microlease.com

|166| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

CASE STUDY Transition Together, Transition Town Totnes, Devon, UK Transition Town Totnes has won a 2011 Ashden Awards for its achievement in enabling behaviour change to save energy in Totnes, through the Transition Together programme.

Background Since the oil shocks of the 1970s, and more recently the growing awareness of the risks of climate change, there has been significant progress in using technology for improving energy efficiency and generating energy from renewable sources. But despite this progress the UK’s energy use and CO2 emissions have not fallen significantly, and have actually increased once the energy ‘embodied’ in imported goods is taken into account.

Policymakers and campaigners have come to the realisation that behaviour change is needed to achieve the reduction in energy use that is required over the next few decades.

Behaviour change can include many things, from turning off lights and walking to the shops to installing insulation and avoiding long-distance travel, but actually making it happen is challenging – as long as people don’t see the need to change behaviour, they are unlikely to do it. At Transition Town Totnes (TTT), the Transition Together (T-Tog) project was set up to tackle this, by engaging households and motivating them to take action.

The organisation The idea of a ‘Transition Town’ was originally developed

by Rob Hopkins in Kinsale, Ireland. A Transition Town is a community-led initiative to prepare for a future with less oil, a changing climate and increasing economic uncertainty. Hopkins moved from Kinsale to Totnes and, with Naresh Giangrande, developed the concept further in 2005, launching TTT in 2006. TTT shares an office with the Transition Network, which supports the growing number of Transition Towns across the world.

TTT has four FTE paid posts at present, over 100 active volunteers and last year had an income of £723,000 (including a one-off grant of £625,000 from DECC). To achieve the goal of preparing the town for the future impacts of climate change and reducing supplies of oil, a wide range of projects are in progress, covering everything from local energy generation and building sustainable housing to local food production and transport.

The programme How does it work?

T-Tog brings together small groups of neighbours, typically six to eight households, to meet and discuss sustainability issues and decide what steps they can take to make their lifestyles more sustainable. Each group meets seven times, with a few weeks between meetings, and tend to take turns hosting meetings in the members’ homes. TTT has marketed the course to residents in the town and surrounding area, but groups are often formed when one interested person gets in touch and sets about recruiting their neighbours. An added incentive to sign up during 2010 was that participants could qualify for entry into the Transition Streets project, through which they could get a grant towards solar PV installation if their house was suitable (funded by the DECC Low Carbon Communities Challenge). However, what motivated most people to sign up was to get to know their neighbours and to reduce their carbon footprint.

Once a group has formed, T-Tog sends a facilitator to their first meeting to explain the process, give members a copy of the workbook and help them agree any rules the group will keep to. During the first meeting the group also completes a survey to review what actions they are already taking to make their lives more sustainable. In subsequent meetings, the group studies the chapters of the workbook, including: – Spend less on energy (monitoring energy use and ways to reduce it) – Spend less on water (monitoring water use and ways to reduce it) – Spend less, eat well (buying local, seasonal foods, growing your own, etc.)

– Wasting away (reducing waste, recycling and composting) – Getting around (efficient transport, car clubs, cycling and walking) – Wrapping up (final evaluation of actions being taken, and follow-up information) Each chapter in the workbook starts with background information on the environmental and financial cost of the subject, and then looks at the different ways these impacts can be reduced. The majority of actions are no cost, low-cost or grant-supported to help ensure that money is not a barrier.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |167|

CASE STUDY

A strong emphasis on financial savings helps group members to see the positive side of taking the actions that are suggested. At the end of each meeting, the group decide on any individual or group actions they are going to try and start taking. In the final meeting, the group members fill in an evaluation of the actions they are now taking, which can be compared to the survey they completed at the start of the programme to find out whether behaviour has changed or not.

How much does it cost and how do users pay?

T-Tog participants pay nothing to join the programme, but are invited to make a voluntary donation of £10 to cover the cost of the workbook, allowing future groups to be set up without any initial charge for joining. Participants do have to pay for any technology that they decide to use, although partial grant-funding for insulation was available through Cosy Devon. Allowing for the cost of developing the T-Tog programme, the cost per household to TTT to date is about £72. The incremental cost for new groups is under £25 per household, allowing for support from a facilitator and administration overheads.

What are the outcomes?

Because T-Tog groups are run by the members, with the facilitator only present for the first meeting, they are a friendly and non-threatening environment in which to learn. The group members are free to decide which of the suggested actions they try, leading to a positive attitude towards changing behaviour. Learning from other group members is also an important feature, as most people have some experience or information that will be helpful to others. The groups foster a sense of ‘doing this together’, rather than each member having to find out the information on their own and motivate themselves to take action – peer support is important in the behaviour change process. |168| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

The energy-saving changes people made include the following, in order of decreasing carbon impact: – Installed cavity wall insulation – Installed loft insulation – Learnt how to use heating system and thermostat efficiently – Monitoring energy usage in the home – Lagging pipes and hot water tank – Installed draught proofing – Installed low- energy light bulbs – Not leaving electrical appliances on standby Environmental benefits In a follow-up survey of the T-Tog groups, to which 63 households responded, over 80% had made new energy saving or generating improvements to their home as a result of the programme, and over 85% had changed their behaviour to save energy (some were already doing everything they could). By reviewing the surveys completed at the start and end of each T-Tog group’s series of meetings, TTT estimates that the programme so far has resulted in a reduction in CO2 emissions of 1.27 tonnes/year per household, equivalent to almost 600 tonnes/year in total over all participating households.

About half the reduction is due to reduced energy use in the home, and about a quarter due to changes in transport use, with the remainder coming from changes with regard to food, water and waste. This does not include savings from the solar PV installations. There have also been environmental benefits from reductions in water use and increases in organic and home-grown food.

Future plans T-Tog is looking to engage more groups of households in Totnes, and the programme is already being rolled out to other Transition Towns across the UK.

CASE STUDY

Severn Wye Energy Agency, Gloucestershire, UK SWEA won a 2011 Ashden Award for its innovative programme that enables secondary pupils to survey energy use and cut carbon emissions in their schools.

Background A typical secondary school in the UK is responsible for 540 tonnes of CO2 emissions per year, equivalent to about 90 average homes. All county councils in the UK are included in the Carbon Reduction Commitment (CRC), and have to buy allowances for their CO2 emissions.

Secondary schools account for 15 - 25% of these emissions, so represent an important opportunity to make reductions, but it has proved challenging to achieve this.

Many secondary school buildings are not very energy efficient, and even those that are may have high energy consumption because of the way they are used. The UK government has tried to encourage carbon saving by requiring all schools to have a Display Energy Certificate (DEC) which assesses energy performance and includes advice on how to improve this. However, this advice is often generic and does not provide the specific guidance that an individual school needs, so many schools do not take action.

In Gloucestershire, the Severn Wye Energy Agency (SWEA) has taken a different approach with its Young Energy People (YEP!) programme. YEP! trains secondary school pupils to carry out a detailed energy survey of their own school, present the results to the school management, engage other pupils and staff to reduce energy use through both technical and behavioural means, and monitor the progress of their school.

The organisation SWEA is a not-for-profit company and an educational charity, established in 1999, under the direction of Catrin Maby, with the support of the European Commission SAVE programme initiative to establish local and regional energy agencies. It offers a range of services focused on energy use, climate change and education, including the development and management of projects for third parties, delivering training and advice, running educational programmes and carrying out research.

Through a range of projects SWEA supports communities, businesses, schools and other public sector organisations in improving energy efficiency and raising awareness on energy use and climate change. SWEA currently employs 43 people, and has an annual income of £2m.

The programme How does it work?

SWEA first makes an agreement with the local authority to engage a school through YEP!. It then holds an assembly at the school, so the pupils and staff can hear about the programme. A key part of the programme is to set up a School Energy Management Team (SEMT), with defined roles for its members (such as Marketing Manager and Energy Team Manager), for which YEP! provides job descriptions. Schools choose which year groups to involve in the programme, usually prioritising Year 9 to Year 11 (age 13 to 16). Students are invited to apply for the different SEMT positions by completing an application form and attending an interview. The SEMT usually includes 25 pupils at the outset. All of the team, along with a staff member, attend a training day to learn how to carry out an energy survey of the school.

The first task for the SEMT after training is to survey all the school buildings to identify areas where energy use could be reduced. The survey outline provided by YEP! includes: – Reviewing energy bills and comparing usage to typical and best practice.

– Boiler rooms, including age, efficiency, heating system controls and pipe lagging.

– Temperatures and heating controls in all classrooms and corridors.

– Double glazing, insulation of walls and lofts, and draughtproofing.

– Number and types of lights.

– Number of electrical appliances, their consumption and whether they are switched off when not in use.

Based on the results of the survey, the SEMT produces a report, using a template provided by YEP!. The report includes detailed recommendations on how the school could make changes to save energy and save money. It is presented to the school’s senior management team. As a result of the report, many schools have taken action such as increasing insulation, installing thermostats and new meters, and leaving thermometers in every room to allow ongoing monitoring of temperatures.

Following on from the survey, the SEMT uses a template provided by YEP! to set up an ‘energy diary’, in which readings from all electricity and gas meters are logged on a monthly basis. A copy of the energy diary is sent to the School Business Manager and SWEA once a month, so they can monitor the progress of the school and the effectiveness of the programme. The SEMT also starts a ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |169|

CASE STUDY

campaign to encourage energy-saving behaviour change by pupils and teachers, using assemblies, posters and other strategies to make everyone aware of what they can do. In some schools, pupils from younger year groups have been recruited to carry out daily surveys of lighting, electrical appliances and heating to see how well the behaviour change work is progressing.

As SEMT members move up to higher year groups, new pupils are recruited to the team. The team may reduce in size, as only the survey stage requires a large number of members, but it is an important part of the YEP! approach that the SEMT becomes a long-term feature of the school. Staff from SWEA help the SEMT throughout the schools.

How much does it cost and how do users pay?

By March 2011, YEP! had completed three phases of work, working with up to 15 schools in each phase.

Phase 1 cost about £10,000 per school, including both development of the programme and delivery, and the delivery of phases 2 and 3 cost about £6,000 per school.

In these first three phases the cost of YEP! was covered

by Gloucestershire county council and EU funds from the ‘Intelligent Energy Europe’ programme, and schools did not pay. The council was able to justify its contribution because the carbon savings made will reduce its liability for CRC payments.

In the upcoming phase 4 the council is looking to split the cost with the school, in line with changes to the CRC that now allow councils to pass costs on through the central schools budget. From the experience to date, and at current energy costs, the savings in energy bills achieved by a school will cover its share of the cost in less than two years. |170| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Environmental benefits Phase 1 YEP! schools achieved an average 32 tonnes/ year CO2, or 12%, reduction per school in their first year, partly through changes to their buildings but also due to behaviour change of staff and pupils. Because the energy use of the school is tracked in the YEP! energy diary, progress in reducing energy consumption at the schools is closely monitored, and any anomalies can be quickly identified and investigated. In addition to the reductions in CO2 emissions at the schools, there have also been reductions due to pupils taking the energy saving message home, though these have not been quantified.

The level of detail in the school energy survey, and the professional quality of its production, means that the school retains a useful long-term resource to guide future reductions in energy use.

Economic and employment benefits YEP! schools have saved an average £5,500/year per school on energy bills so far, freeing up money to be used for other purposes. During phase 1 of YEP!, some of the SEMT pupils also went on work placements in businesses where SWEA staff arranged for them to carry out an energy survey and prepare a similar report for the business to the one they produced for the school.

As a result of this, the businesses have been able to make energy and cost savings through technical and behavioural changes. Within SWEA, the YEP! programme has provided two extra jobs, strengthening their education team and increasing their capacity to work on similar projects in future.

Future plans SWEA is planning to replicate YEP! across the UK, working with other county councils and partner agencies to deliver the programme.

Radian, Southeast England Radian won a 2011 Ashden Award for its achievement in retrofitting hard-to-treat homes to save energy and building new homes to high environmental standards.

Background Reducing energy use and CO2 emissions from homes is a key challenge for the UK in the coming decade – in 2008, about 30% of all UK energy use was in the domestic sector. Of the UK’s 27 million homes, over eight million were built before 1945, and over four million before 1919; unless they have been retrofitted, these homes have very low levels of energy efficiency. Although new build homes are much more energy efficient than the average for the UK housing stock, they are still some way off from being ‘zero carbon’.

Of the UK’s total housing stock, over 4.8 million are in the social housing sector, with just over half being managed by housing associations and the rest by local authorities.

All social housing has to meet the Decent Homes standard, but this can be achieved while still having relatively poor energy efficiency. The majority of homes owned by social landlords were not built recently, and require significant retrofitting to bring them up to a good standard of energy efficiency. Radian is leading the way in demonstrating how this retrofitting can be achieved within the budget of housing associations and other social housing providers, even though rents are set nationally.

The organisation Radian is a housing association operating in Southeast England. It was formed in 2006, from the merger of similarly sized Swaythling Housing, Parkside Housing and Drum Housing as equal partners. Radian owns around 16,000 homes, providing accommodation for over 43,000 residents, and has some responsibility for the upkeep of a further 1,500 leasehold flats within blocks that it owns. It has 650 staff and in 2010 had an income of £105 million.

Radian’s primary focus is to provide its residents with good homes and service, and it sees sustainability as a core feature of this. Improving the sustainability of its housing stock can improve the quality of life for residents by reducing fuel bills, improving thermal comfort and enabling them to choose more environmentally friendly lifestyles.

CASE STUDY UK

GO WI LD AW NN ER ARD S

The programme The constituent housing associations that joined to form Radian had been working to improve energy efficiency since 1996, but the pace has increased in recent years with the pressure of rising fuel prices and concern over climate change. By efficiently managing its housing stock and operations, Radian is able to allocate sufficient resources to continually upgrade the energy efficiency of its older housing, and ensure that new housing is built to high environmental standards.

Radian uses contractors to construct new homes, but carries out most of the retrofit and maintenance work using its own direct labour organisation, Radian Services, and brings in contractors where necessary. Two different methods of retrofitting to improve energy efficiency are used by Radian. The first is to include the retrofit within the planned maintenance programme, replacing windows, boilers, etc. with more efficient versions as they reach the end of their lives. The second method is to carry out an intensive ‘whole house’ retrofit, where all the work needed to bring a home up to a high standard of energy efficiency is done over the course of a couple of months.

The latter approach clearly requires a larger one-off expenditure, and the residents must also be relocated while the work is carried out, but the advantage is that the home will then need no further work for many years.

Radian selects which approach to use according to the current state of the housing, available finances and the wishes of the residents.

The technology How does it work?

For older homes that need retrofitting, Radian plans projects to use the most cost-effective measures, progressively adding the less cost-effective ones until the desired energy efficiency is achieved. Homes with solid walls are classed as ‘hard-to-treat’, and these are surveyed with a thermal imaging camera before and after retrofitting, to ensure the best measures are not just selected but also correctly installed. Radian also undertakes pre- and post-retrofit air tightness testing ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |171|

CASE STUDY and in certain cases intermediate stage air and smoke pressure testing.

Loft and wall insulation are always used when possible, as these deal with the most significant heat losses from any home. Double-glazed windows are also installed whenever possible, dealing with draughts and external noise as well as reducing heat loss. Any remaining draughts are then sealed, and mechanical ventilation with heat recovery is routinely added to kitchens and bathrooms. Radian has typically achieved a doubling in the improvement of air tightness post-retrofit. Having installed passive measures, installing a condensing boiler and low energy lighting throughout the house bring further savings, and by this point a hard-to-treat property has been brought up from a SAP energy rating of mid 40s to low 80s, or just below Code for Sustainable Homes Level 3. Adding solar water heating and solar PV can then bring the home up to high 80s, or even into the 90s in some cases – these are equivalent to Code Level 4. The typical CO2 emission reduction for a hard-to-treat retrofitted home including a solar PV installation is 80%.

For new build homes, meeting at least Code Level 3 of the Code for Sustainable Homes is compulsory for housing associations receiving funding from the Homes and Communities Agency (HCA), but a proportion of Radian’s new build goes beyond this, meeting levels 4 to 6. The technology Radian uses for new build is similar to that for retrofit, except that the walls are often built using various types of prefabricated (modern methods of construction) systems such as sustainably sourced closed panel timber frame. The mechanical ventilation with heat recovery used in new build is usually a whole-house system, rather than individual units in the bathroom and kitchen.

Solar water heating and solar PV technology is also required to achieve the higher code levels.

In both retrofit and new build homes, Radian has trialled a range of innovative technologies, often in partnership with other organisations, such as the Building Research Establishment (BRE), The Energy Saving Trust (EST), The Environment Agency (EA) and the Technology Strategy Board (TSB). The technologies trialled include: – Aerogel to insulate floors using very thin layers, avoiding expensive work to stairs and doors that would have been required with thicker insulation.

– Rainwater harvesting, using buried storage tanks and pumps, and also using small-scale systems with tanks in lofts, along with metering to measure the impact.

– Ground source heat pumps and hybrid systems combining a solar thermal collector and an air source heat pump to provide space and water heating.

– Waste water heat recovery systems. |172| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Benefits Of the 16,000 homes Radian owns, about 1,600 have been built since 2008, all of which meet or exceed Code for Sustainable Homes Level 3 (the minimum legally required). About 85, or 5.3%, of these homes met Code Level 4, 5 or 6.

For the older housing stock a range of measures have been used, according to the age and design of the house.

Since 1996, the numbers of measures installed are: – 11,624 cavity walls insulated – 12,172 lofts insulated or topped up – 198 solid wall homes fitted with external wall insulation – 11,800 homes given replacement double glazing – 12,000 efficient boilers installed or upgraded – 435 kWp of solar photovoltaics installed – 115 solar water heating systems installed – 232 air or ground source heat pumps installed Environmental benefits Between 1996 and March 2011, the annual CO2 emissions of Radian’s properties have fallen by an estimated 34%, or 34,000 tonnes/year, or from 6.3 to 4.1 tonnes/year per property. In addition to this, there have been reductions in the amount of water used by households due to the installation of efficient taps and appliances, and rainwater harvesting. Radian also takes great care of the environment during new build projects, enhancing biodiversity and ecological features wherever possible, for example installing bird and bat boxes, planting trees and improving streams. Whenever protected species are present on a site, the development is planned to ensure their safety, or they are relocated by qualified personnel.

Future plans Radian is aiming to ensure that new build homes meet or exceed Code for Sustainable Homes Level 4 whenever affordable, and is also continuing with its monitoring programme, feeding the results into decisions on new build and retrofit projects. It also continues to publish its findings and hold annual conferences on sustainability issues.

Midlands Wood Fuel, Shrewsbury, England

CASE STUDY

Midlands Wood Fuel won a 2011 Ashden Award for its achievement in reliably supplying high-quality wood-fuel.

Background The West Midlands and Wales have had a long history of forestry and related industries, with one of the highest densities of sawmills found anywhere in the UK. The history of wood use in the area goes back many years, to when it was used to produce charcoal for the smelting of iron. This started to decline with the invention of a blast furnace that burned coke instead of charcoal, at Ironbridge in 1709.

The demand for space and water heating in the UK is about 640,000 GWh, representing about 33% of CO2 emissions. Making better use of the UK’s national wood resource could reduce imports of fossil fuels for heating, and reduce CO2 emissions as well. An estimated additional 4.2 million dry tonnes of wood for fuel use could be extracted from UK forests, which would produce 17,500 GWh, or 2.7% of UK demand for space and water heating, on top of the 2% already supplied by wood and energy crops.

Just a few miles from Ironbridge is Midlands Wood Fuel, a thriving small business that is turning back the tide and increasing the use of wood again, this time to supply heating for homes, businesses and public buildings.

The organisation Midlands Wood Fuel (MWF) was founded in 2004 by Ewan Bent, who had for a time been promoting wood-fuel while working for Marches Energy Agency. Ewan set up the business in order to promote the use of wood-fuel in the region and make sure people installing boilers could be sure of a reliable fuel supply. In 2010, he moved to the post of Commercial Director, with Mark Appleton joining the business as Managing Director, bringing the total number of staff to nine. Most of MWF’s customers are in the West Midlands, and the business is also expanding into neighbouring Gloucestershire and Northwest England. In 2010/11 MWF had an income of over £700,000, mostly from the sale of wood chips, with the rest coming from the sale of wood pellets and consultancy.

The business MWF is built around core values of customer service and the supply of high quality fuel, combined with thorough financial control to improve sustainability. The business buys in seasoned logs to be chipped, and delivers the

fuel produced to customers local to each depot. Wood pellets are also delivered, but are bought in from two UK pellet mills that meet MWF’s quality standards. MWF is currently independent from any particular biomass boiler installer, allowing it to work with all local installers to gain access to new customers. In the past, however, MWF worked closely with an installer, and it is through this that the staff have the expertise to be able to deliver good customer service. MWF has in-depth knowledge of the biomass boilers used by its customers, and tracks their fuel usage relative to their expected demand for heat, so it can warn them if their boiler needs maintenance. This also means it is able to predict when a customer is likely to be running low on fuel, and can check if they would like a delivery. For customers with neighbours who may be disturbed by fuel delivery, MWF delivers at times selected to minimise inconvenience.

How much does it cost and how do users pay?

MWF typically charges about 3.2 p/kWh for wood chips, and 4.5 p/kWh for wood pellets. These prices compare to an average of 3.5 p/kWh for domestic gas supply, or 6.3 p/ kWh for domestic heating oil supply. Domestic customers can therefore save money on fuel bills by switching from heating oil to wood pellets, although the capital cost for the boiler and fuel store would need to be factored in.

Larger commercial or public sector users are able to buy gas below domestic prices, so at present there are no substantial savings to be made on the fuel itself.

However, the Carbon Reduction Commitment requires organisations using over 6,000 MWh/year of electricity, such as local authorities, to buy allowances for CO2 emissions due to all non-transport energy use from 2012.

This will make using wood-fuel financially attractive compared to gas. Many organisations also want to make a contribution to reducing global CO2 emissions, and wood-fuel is often a good option to fulfil this goal.

MWF currently has just over 100 customers, about a quarter of whom are domestic and use wood pellets.

The larger customers tend to use wood chip, and this represents the majority of MWF’s business. About half of MWF’s wood chip customers buy heat, rather than tonnes of fuel. This makes it simple for the customer to predict costs, without concern about fuel quality. It also gives MWF an incentive to supply high quality and thoroughly dried fuel, to maximise the heat produced and minimise delivery costs. However, it also allows for ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |173|

CASE STUDY flexibility in times of high demand.

How is wood-fuel produced and supplied?

MWF has recently transferred its wood purchasing and seasoning operations to Nationwide Wood Fuel Ltd, a company set up by some of the MWF directors and investors. This has allowed MWF to avoid tying up capital in wood stocks, and let it focus on growing the business of delivering wood-fuel to customers. Although Nationwide Wood Fuel is financially responsible for the wood while it is seasoning, MWF continues to supervise the day-to-day operations of purchasing and storing the wood. This structure makes it easier to find finance for timber stocks, as it separates the commercial risks of timber purchase and supply operations.

Wood is bought in from landowners, forestry contractors and the Forestry Commission. All trees felled will have been covered by felling licences, which require replanting or management for natural regeneration. Much of the wood felled is from thinning operations, so is only suitable for fuel, pulp or fibreboard manufacture.

Slab-wood, which is a byproduct of sawmills, is also bought in when available. After purchase, the wood is stored for a year to ‘season’, during which time the moisture content falls from over 50% to around 30%.

Rapid seasoning is encouraged by storing logs off the ground on dry, windy sites and by encouraging forestry contractors to damage the bark on the trees while handling them, as this promotes the loss of moisture.

After the wood has been seasoned, it is chipped using MWF’s Musmax drum chipper, which has a throughput of 15 tonnes/hour, and stored in barns on a concrete floor to prevent contamination with soil, stones or other materials. The wood-chip is ready for delivery straight away. MWF has three delivery vehicles, one which can tip fuel into stores or deliver hook-lift bins for customers that use them, and two which are able to blow wood chips or pellets down a delivery hose into a fuel store. Blowing the fuel in is important for many customers, as it allows them to site their fuel store where it is most convenient for them, rather than where a delivery vehicle can get direct access to it. Each delivery vehicle can carry up to 30 cubic metres of wood-fuel, equivalent to around 7 tonnes of wood chip or 14 tonnes of wood pellets.

|174| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Environmental benefits In the financial year 2010/11, MWF delivered 5,253 tonnes of wood-fuel to its customers. About 75% of this replaced gas use, and the rest replaced heating oil. Replacing fossil fuels with sustainable wood-fuel cuts greenhouse gas emissions, because the forests where the wood is sourced from are replanted or naturally regenerating, so that the CO2 emitted when the wood is burned is reabsorbed over time. The total reduction in greenhouse gas emissions is about 3,700 tonnes/year of CO2.

Better management of forests can also be beneficial for biodiversity.

Economic and employment benefits MWF provides employment for nine people, five full-time and four part-time or seasonal. In addition to this, the business also supports jobs at 17 forestry contractors and a vehicle maintenance contractor, as well as casual work at the depots to carry out wood chipping. MWF has also been helping other organisations improve their employees’ skills, for example delivering CPD lectures on the use of wood-fuel to some of its corporate customers.

For landowners and the Forestry Commission, having an additional market for forestry thinnings and other low-grade timber provides an additional income stream, and makes management of forests more economically viable.

Future plans Midlands Wood Fuel is currently expanding into neighbouring areas of Northwest England and Wales, where the fuel supply infrastructure is currently inadequate. There is potential for significant growth within the region when the Renewable Heat Incentive starts, as this should encourage more boiler installations.

Centre for Alternative Technology, Machynlleth, Wales The Centre for Alternative Technology won a 2011 Ashden Award for its achievement in training people through a range of postgraduate and professional courses to work in sustainable energy.

Background With pressure to reduce CO2 emissions and rising fossil fuel prices, there is a strong need for the UK to reduce demand for energy, to improve energy efficiency, particularly in heating and lighting buildings, and to generate more energy from renewable sources. Several key ingredients are required for this to happen, such as finance, legislation on planning and CO2 emissions and increased carbon prices. However, even with all of that in place, nothing can happen without a skilled workforce to turn the UK’s sustainability aspirations into reality.

They are needed in all sectors, including installers to help retrofit homes and businesses, engineers to work on larger scale renewable energy projects, architects to design sustainable buildings and urban planners to redesign our towns and cities to steadily reduce the use of oil-fuelled transport. For several years the skills shortage in the renewable energy sector has been highlighted; the Centre for Alternative Technology (CAT) has developed a programme of postgraduate and professional training courses to help fill this gap.

The organisation CAT was founded in 1973 by Gerard Morgan-Grenville as a community built around environmentally friendly practices and, in his own words, as “a project to show the nature of the problem and show ways of going forward”.

From its early days, working to turn a disused Welsh slate quarry into a sustainable and habitable community, CAT has made significant progress, and now hosts a visitor centre through which about 65,000 people pass every year, learning about the importance of building a sustainable society and how they can help make it happen.

CAT realised however, that just visiting for a few hours was not enough for everyone, and since 1981 has been running training courses of various types and levels.

CAT currently employs about 120 people, and through its training and outreach work has become well known across the UK as a leader in the sustainability and renewable energy sector. CAT’s annual income in the last year was about £5.3m.

CASE STUDY

The programme What courses are offered?

CAT offers a range of training to fulfil different needs and levels of qualification. At the academic end of the spectrum are the postgraduate and professional diploma courses: – MSc Architecture: Advanced Environmental and Energy Studies (also available by distance learning).

– MSc Renewable Energy and the Built Environment.

– Professional Diploma Architecture: Advanced Environmental and Energy Studies.

– MSc Environmental Change and Practice: Buildings.

– Professional Doctorate: Ecological Building Practices.

CAT started running MSc courses in 1994 in partnership with the University of East London (UEL). Initially the courses were based at UEL but they moved to CAT in 2000. In 2007 CAT formed the Graduate School for the Environment (GSE) and took over the responsibility for the courses, including taking on staff from UEL. UEL still provides validation for some of the academic courses.

CAT also offers a professional doctorate in ecological building practices at GSE, validated by the Cardiff Metropolitan University (UWIC).

Alongside the GSE, CAT also offers over 80 short courses, varying in length from one to six days. Topics covered include: – ‘Taster days’ in renewable heating, renewable electricity, solar PV, wind power.

– More in-depth courses on solar PV, solar water heating, biomass heating, wind power, hydro power and sustainable building.

– Installer training for solar PV, solar thermal, biomass and ground source heat pumps.

– Other courses focused on sustainable economics, environmentally friendly water supply and sanitation, ecology, organic food production and woodland management.

The ‘taster day’ courses are aimed at the interested public, and can be taken further by attending the in-depth courses, some of which involve attending one of the MSc course modules. The courses for installers result in accreditation with relevant institutions, and are aimed at professional electricians, plumbers and heating engineers.

How much does it cost?

The cost of the MSc courses for UK and EU students in ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |175|

CASE STUDY 2011 ranges from £6,000 to £6,500, while the Professional Diploma is £9,250 and the Professional Doctorate £2,650/ year. Although costs are higher than the typical £4,500 being charged in 2011 by other universities for MSc courses, the fee at CAT includes eight weeks of full board accommodation, and gives access to the unique learning environment at their site. Short courses cost from £50 for the ‘taster days’ to £950 for the longer installer courses.

While some courses are fixed price, many of them offer a 40% discount for concessions, and all courses longer than a single day include all food and accommodation.

How are the courses delivered?

Short courses run over up to six consecutive days, while the postgraduate courses take up to two years, with students taking eight modules from a wider choice of different subjects. The modules are delivered for one week each month, and the students are also required to write a dissertation based on their own research in their final semester. The MSc courses can be studied part-time, and the architecture course by distance learning, although this means missing out on the practical elements of the course.

Each module on the MSc courses lasts one week, and one day of the week is set aside for practical work to build upon the theoretical learning already completed.

All courses at CAT are intensive in nature, with students living on site for the duration of the teaching sections of the course, allowing them to share ideas and discuss what they’ve learned with each other. This immersion in the subject being studied is one of the characteristics that helps CAT students come away with an infectious enthusiasm for the subject and sustainability in general, and the ability to put their ideas into practice.

The recently completed WISE (Wales Institute for Sustainable Education) building at CAT is crucial to the (MSc) postgraduate courses. Not only does it house a 200-seat lecture theatre, laboratories, offices and a dining area, it also provides accommodation for students, and is an example of what can be achieved by putting into practice the subjects that are being studied within it.

The building is designed to require minimal heating and lighting, using passive ventilation, solar gain, daylighting, thermal mass and high levels of insulation. Solar water heating and a biomass boiler supply heat, and both heat and electricity are individually metered in all rooms in the building, creating a valuable dataset that students can use to evaluate the building’s performance.

|176| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Environmental benefits The direct environmental benefits of CAT’s education work are related to the sustainable buildings in which students live and study, but the indirect benefits are much more significant. CAT is training and educating people to work in the many roles required to put the UK on a sustainable energy footing, and doing so in increasing numbers. It is also receiving groups of students from other universities for short visits so that their expertise can be shared more widely. Students and trainees do not just leave CAT with knowledge and experience though – they also tend to acquire an enthusiasm for sustainability that prompts them to take action and encourage others to do the same, further multiplying the benefits CAT’s work has. Other indirect benefits to come out of CAT’s educational work have resulted from student research projects. The bulk of the Zero Carbon Britain report was based on the work of students, and the recently updated version, Zero Carbon Britain 2030, has already been influential in the UK, with government ministers taking an interest in it.

Future plans In 2011 CAT launched a new MSc course, MSc Environmental Change and Practice: Buildings, and is working to increase student numbers on all of its courses.

Toyola Energy Limited Ghana Toyola Energy won a 2011 Ashden Award in recognition of its success in producing and selling efficient charcoal stoves throughout Ghana and beyond.

Background Most urban households in Ghana cook on charcoal, using traditional charcoal stoves made of sheet metal.

These stoves are polluting and inefficient, and the cost of charcoal is a significant proportion of household income.

Most of the wood used to produce the charcoal comes from unsustainable sources, so charcoal production contributes to both deforestation and greenhouse gas production. Toyola Energy was set up to bring cleaner stoves and other energy products to households in Ghana.

The organisation Toyola Energy Limited was founded in 2006 by Suraj Wahab Ologburo, a former accountant and Ernest Kwasi Kyei, an engineer, both of whom had been trained in stove production under the Ghana Household Energy programme (GHEP). They obtained a loan from E+Co to start commercial production and sales, providing work to 77 other artisans including some trained under GHEP. Further loans and carbon finance have enabled the growth of the business, which by April 2011 had five production centres in different parts of Ghana and one in the neighbouring Republic of Togo.

In 2009/10 Toyola Energy had an income of US$550,000, 72% from stove sales and 28% from carbon finance.

It employs five people directly and provides work to a large number of self-employed artisans. It has a 90% shareholding in KT ceramics that makes the stove liners, and also has a wholly-owned subsidiary, Toyola Solar, that sells photovoltaic systems.

The programme Toyola Energy produces and sells efficient charcoal burning stoves. Independent selfemployed artisans make the metal stove bodies and the ceramic liners to Toyola specifications, and assemble and finish the stoves. Toyola sells stoves directly, via dealers and also through local marketing agents.

The technology How does it work?

The Toyola Coalpot stove has an hour-glass-shaped metal body. The charcoal is burned in a heat-retaining ceramic liner, which has holes to supply air, and let

CASE STUDY AL N TIO RD A RN AWA E S INT OLD NER G N WI the ash fall down. An adjustable door in the metal body controls the air flow and therefore the rate of burning.

The stove top is designed for the round-bottomed pots that are popular in Ghana, using robust metal pot-rests that give a narrow gap round the pot base and good heat transfer. The Coalpot was developed from the GHEP three-legged Gyapa stove, to be more durable, more stable (particularly with food that requires stirring), and also more efficient.

How much does it cost and how do users pay?

US$1 = GHC 1.51 (Ghana Cedi) [April 2011] Coalpots are made in five different sizes. The domestic sizes range from 270 to 360 mm top diameter and retail for GHC 10 to 12 (US$ 6.60 to US$8.00). The commercial sizes are 460 and 510 mm top diameter and retail for GHC 40 and 50 (US$ 26 and US$33). All retail prices are subsidised by carbon finance. Toyola gives up to two months credit to its direct customers, and also to its dealers and sales agents who can pass the credit on to their customers. 75% of customers use credit, 20% pay cash, and a few pay by bartering produce such as cassava. About one third of credit customers use a â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;Toyola money boxâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; to reserve their savings on charcoal, and use this money to make their credit payments.

Environmental benefits Charcoal savings have been assessed using kitchen performance tests with the same households using their original stove and a medium-sized domestic Coalpot.

The Coalpot was found to save one third of charcoal, an average of 0.5 kg per day. Thus the stoves currently in use are saving about 26,000 tonnes of charcoal each year, and so cutting the use of wood to make charcoal.

Perhaps surprisingly, Coalpots also cut fuelwood use directly. Surveys found that 30% of households used some fuelwood as well as charcoal for cooking. When they switched to using a Coalpot, their use of both charcoal and fuelwood decreased.

Currently, about 73% of the wood used in Ghana to make charcoal and directly as fuelwood is non-renewable ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |177|

CASE STUDY (ie: not replaced by new trees). This means that saving charcoal and fuelwood by using Coalpot stoves helps to reduce deforestation.

Charcoal and fuelwood savings also cuts greenhouse gas emissions. Detailed assessments show that a Coalpot in use for one year in Ghana saves the equivalent of 1.03 tonnes of CO2. 84% of this is actual CO2, produced because of the use of non-renewable wood. Most of the remainder is methane emitted during charcoal production. Thus the stoves currently in use are saving about 150,000 tonnes/year CO2e.

Social benefits Coalpots are popular with cooks. User surveys show that food cooks more quickly: women save about 30 minutes per day, which they use mainly for family time and relaxation. The heat retention of the liner means that food keeps warm for longer, and the insulated stove base can be used like an oven for roasting vegetables while a pot cooks on the top. The insulation that helps cut fuel use also reduces the temperature of the outside of the stove. Burns are reduced by over 90% and the person cooking does not get so hot. Health surveys show reduced incidence of eye irritation, shortage of breath and coughing.

|178| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

Economic and employment benefits User surveys in 2010 showed that households with Coalpots spent about GHC 160/year on charcoal compared with their pre-Coalpot expense of GHC 200/ year. This saving of GHC 40 (US$27) per year is significant for households with cash incomes that are typically about GHC 1,200 (US$800) per year. It means that the cost of buying a Coalpot can be recovered from savings in charcoal within three to four months. Note that the savings do not take into account the fact that charcoal prices have approximately doubled from 2008 to 2011, so that the real saving is higher.

Five Toyola Energy production centres are operating in different parts of the Ghana, and one has recently opened (April 2011) in Togo. This means that training, employment and income have been brought to different parts of the country and beyond. In 2010 about 172 people were involved in production and assembly of stoves.

Further income is generated within the supply chain, with traders and agents earning about 10% of the retail price on each sale.

Future plans â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Toyola plans to open new production centres in other parts of Ghana, and also start production in Benin, Sierra Leone and Nigeria. â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Target of 140,000 additional stoves sold by 2013.

ToughStuff International UK and Africa ToughStuff won a 2011 Ashden Award in recognition of its success in making small, reliable, solar-powered products available and affordable for off-grid users in Africa.

Background Despite continuing efforts, an estimated 1.4 billion people - nearly one fifth of the world’s population - lack access to electricity. Even in a country like Kenya where cities and towns are grid-connected and thriving, about 96% of people in rural areas are off-grid, as are many in poorer areas around towns and cities. Some live close to power supplies, but cannot afford the cost of connection.

The founders of ToughStuff recognised that a very small solar photovoltaic (PV) module could power a range of useful products including LED lamps and mobile phones, and that by selling modules and products as individual items, they could be made more affordable for off-grid households, both rural and urban.

The organisation ToughStuff International is a commercial enterprise driven by a social purpose, which was founded by Andrew Tanswell and Adriaan Mol in 2008. Combined, they have over 20 years experience working in the humanitarian sector, which led them to realise how lack of electrical services in developing countries traps people in a cycle of poverty and creates environmental damage. The ToughStuff mission is ‘to bring affordable energy products to low income people thereby helping to increase living standards, improve health, enhance the environment, and build enterprise and employment’. Market research, product development and piloting started in Madagascar in 2008, and the commercial products were launched there in 2009. ToughStuff has 50 full time employees, and teams of local sales agents. Initial growth was supported by seed finance, and recent equity investment will enable future expansion.

The programme The PV modules and other products are produced in attractive display packages, and sold as both single items and as kits. In each country where it works, ToughStuff sets up a traditional sales structure, with distributors and wholesalers providing stock to retailers that range from supermarkets to small rural stores. Currently the main countries of operation are Madagascar and

CASE STUDY

Kenya – the latter is also the regional headquarters for the rest of East Africa. ToughStuff also has regional headquarters in Lagos and Johannesburg. Once the traditional distribution system is in place, the company starts to build its own ‘alternative’ distribution networks to extend the reach of products into more remote areas, often partnering with NGOs and microfinance institutions (MFIs). This may involve working with savings and credit groups, or providing the working capital to establish rural entrepreneurs. The entrepreneur can choose to sell products, rent products, or provide services such as phone charging. ToughStuff also works actively with NGO partners in the humanitarian relief field. It has sold products to humanitarian agencies working in Haiti, Pakistan and elsewhere. Sometimes a kit of products is tailored to specific needs for these partners.

The technology How does it work?

The PV module uses a thin film of amorphous silicon to generate electricity from sunlight. ToughStuff devices that can be powered by the PV are: – An LED lamp with a rechargeable battery. It can be used on four different brightness settings.

– Eight different phone-charging connectors and a radio connector. These allow the PV module to directly charge most popular types of phone, or a radio.

– An independent rechargeable battery that can provide power to any of the other devices: it can be charged directly from the PV module or else from the mains via a standard USB connector.

ToughStuff gives a six-month warranty on all products, but expect a lifetime of at least two years.

How much does it cost and how do users pay?

US$1 = KSh 85 [March 2011] Prices vary between countries because of different duties and distribution costs. For Kenya, current retail prices are: PV module KSh 790 (US$9.3) Lamp KSh 650 (US$7.6) Phone connector KSh 100 (US$1.2) Radio connector KSh 240 (US$2.8) Power Pack KSh 680 (US$8.0) Traditional retail outlets sell for cash, and some MFIs offer loans to their customers. Rural entrepreneurs who have received support in the form of working capital are able to pass this on to their customers by offering instalment payments. In Kenya, other types of customer ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |179|

CASE STUDY finance are being piloted, including a ‘rent-to-buy’ scheme, and a ‘layaway’ scheme. In the latter, customers gradually build up savings through the mobile-phone based money-transfer system, and when they have saved enough receive a code to collect the equipment from any retailer.

valuable time and money. Young people and families keep in touch. Elderly people who might otherwise switch off their phone to save the battery can keep it charged.

Enabling people to listen to radios for free is another valuable way to help rural people keep in contact with the world.

Environmental benefits The main environmental benefit of ToughStuff lamps is cutting greenhouse gas emissions by reducing the use of kerosene for lighting. Assuming that each ToughStuff lamp replaces one kerosene lamp, it saves about 24 litres of kerosene per year. As a result, lamps in use at the end of March 2011 are avoiding the emission of about 8,800 tonnes/year of CO2. Dry cells used in radios and other equipment are frequently disposed of in landfill and pollute groundwater. ToughStuff surveys in Kenya and Madagascar suggest that using a set of radio connectors can avoid the use and improper disposal of up to 96 D-cells in a year.

Economic and employment benefits Kerosene and phone charging use a significant proportion of household income, particularly in rural areas and in off-grid areas round towns and cities where cash incomes are usually low. In rural Kenya the wage for a labourer is about KSh 100 (US$1.2) per day, so the savings from using ToughStuff products – typically KSh 120 per week on kerosene and KSh 60 on phone charging - are very important. Further savings can be made if radio connectors are used to replace D-cells.

Social benefits By avoiding the use of kerosene for lighting, ToughStuff lamps reduce the risk of house fires, and cut air pollution with its associated health impacts. They also reduce the incidence of kerosene poisoning, which is notably high among women and children.

The quality and versatility of the LED lamp brings other social benefits. The lamp can be used as a room light or task light for up to five hours per evening, giving children who live in off-grid households the chance to keep up with their school work. Using the ToughStuff lamp as a torch outdoors or low-intensity light indoors increases safety and security. In Haiti, 74% of ToughStuff users said that they felt safer at night.

Mobile phones and similar devices have changed urban life, but their really transformational impact is off-grid. In Kenya and an increasing number of other countries they provide not just communications, but also access to mobile banking and other vital services such as healthcare. For an off-grid user who has to travel to a battery charging shop and pay for phone charging, a ToughStuff PV panel and phone connector saves |180| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

ToughStuff has directly provided employment to 50 full time staff and 53 local sales agents. It has also helped about 250 rural entrepreneurs to start businesses, selling products, renting lights, or charging phones.

Entrepreneurs earn around 25% of the retail price of products.

Improved light provides extended hours for home-based work, and the opportunity to increase income. Informal provision of phone-charging also increases income and keeps money in the rural economy Future plans – Through expanding its geographical range and ongoing product development, ToughStuff aims to reach 33 million poor consumers, mainly in Africa, by 2015.

Husk Power Systems India

CASE STUDY

Husk Power Systems (HPS) won a 2011 Ashden Award because of its success in providing electricity to villages using gasified rice-husk as the fuel.

Background India has a serious shortage of electricity, and people living in villages suffer the most. 125,000 villages lack grid power altogether, and even where the grid extends the supply is unreliable and does not reach all households. When grid rationing takes place, villages often receive power only after midnight when ‘priority’ demand from cities and industry is low. This is of little use to rural households and businesses. The state of Bihar in North-East India has a very low rate of grid electrification and acute power shortages. It is estimated that the grid can meet only 10% of demand. The founders of Husk Power looked for affordable ways to address this shortage of electricity, and identified the potential for making producer gas from rice husk.

The organisation The first power plant that ran on 100% producer gas was commissioned in 2007. In 2008 Husk Power Systems (HPS) was registered as a for-profit company with a mission to provide renewable and affordable electricity to the rural population around the world in a financially sustainable way. Three of its founders (Gyanesh Pandey, Ratnesh Yadav and Manoj Sinha) come from Bihar, and Charles Ransler comes from the USA. Most have had education and professional careers in the USA. The growth of HPS has been helped by substantial grant funding from the Shell Foundation, which has supported R&D, strategy and training. US$1.65 million investment from six social investors (Acumen Fund, Bamboo Finance, International Finance Corp, Draper Fisher Jurvetson, LGT Philanthropy and CISCO) was secured in December 2009. In 2010/11 HPS had 270 employees. About 80% of its income comes from sales (mostly electricity, but also char products) and 20% from Government subsidies to new power plants.

The programme Power plants are installed in places where there is a reliable source of rice husk and other biomass residues within a distance of 10 km. HPS staff visit a village, at the invitation of village representatives, to assess its suitability for a plant and explain how the scheme works. If 400 or more households commit to paying a monthly fee for electricity, HPS will install a plant (rice

husk gasifier, gas engine, generator and 240 V electricity distribution system) and connect the homes and small businesses that have signed up. A village operating team maintains and runs the system, which supplies electricity each evening for up to eight hours.

The technology How does it work?

Sackloads of rice husk or other biomass residues are poured into the gasifier hopper every 30 to 45 minutes.

The biomass burns in a restricted supply of air to give energy-rich producer gas. The gas passes through a series of filters which clean it, and it is then used as the fuel for an engine that drives the electricity generator.

Electricity is distributed to customers via insulated overhead cables. The basic connection provides a household with two 15 W compact fluorescent lights and mobile phone charging throughout the period each day that the plant runs (up to eight hours in the evening).

Sometimes poorer households share a basic connection and get one light each. If a household or business wants to pay more for a higher power connection, then this can be provided. A fuse blows if the customer attempts to use more than their agreed power. Each plant serves about 500 customers, and has sufficient capacity to allow for demand to increase. About 70% of homes within the distribution area get connected.

How much does it cost and how do users pay?

US$1 = INR 45 (Indian Rupees) [April 2011] Electricity fees start at INR100 (US$2.2) per month for a basic connection. One month’s deposit is required when a customer signs the supply contract with HPS. The local HPS collector goes from house to house to collect the fee each month in advance, and checks that everything is working well. All complaints are logged and followed up.

Under the terms of the contract, HPS agrees to provide service for at least 27 days every month, and pro-rates the fees if this level is not met. However, average provision is now over 28 days per month (93% availability).

The total landed cost of a 35 kW plant, including distribution system, is less than US$1,000 per kW. HPS is paid a subsidy of up to INR 320,000 (US$7,100) for each plant, by the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy. The remainder of the capital comes from ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |181|

CASE STUDY investment and sales revenue. HPS loses only about 4% of revenue through default on payment or electricity theft, considerably lower than most power suppliers in India, who often lose 30%.

Environmental benefits Surveys show that households stop using kerosene lamps when they get HPS electricity, and save 6 - 7 litres/month of kerosene on average. The total kerosene saving for the 32,500 households supplied at the end of March 2011 is therefore about 2.7 million litres per year. Kerosene savings cut greenhouse gas emissions by an estimated 125 tonnes/year CO2 equivalent per plant (assessed as part of CDM certification). Thus the total saving for the 65 plants in operation at the end of March 2011 is about 8,100 tonnes/year of CO2e. Further CO2 savings come from the reduced use of diesel generators to supply small businesses: these savings vary from plant to plant because they depend on the type of customers served.

Note that some CO2 is produced from the fossil fuels used in the transport of rice husk, but the amount is small (less than 1 tonne/year CO2 per plant) since HPS plants are sited within 10 km of the rice mill, and some transport is done by bullock cart.

Social benefits Having a reliable electricity supply makes families feel more settled and connected to the wider world. Even in villages with grid power, households and businesses choose to connect to the HPS supply because of its greater reliability and lower cost. HPS makes sure that customers understand how to use electricity safely, and that every member of the household agrees to abide by safety rules. Good-quality lighting throughout the evening is a huge benefit to households. Children can study properly, housework is easier, and families can relax and socialise. Better lighting deters petty crime, and reduces the frequency of snake-bites and dog-bites, a common reason for emergency hospital admission in Bihar. Removing kerosene lamps reduces exposure to smoke and fumes, and the risk of fire: many village homes are built from woven bamboo, and house fires are common in rural Bihar. Mobile phones are important for keeping in touch with the many family members who work elsewhere in India or abroad. In one village mobile phone ownership increased from 10% to 80% of households after the HPS supply was installed, because previously people had to go out of the village to have their phones charged.

Economic and employment benefits Households with HPS power save typically INR 200 per month on kerosene, so their net monthly saving (after paying for their CFLs) is about INR 100 (US$2.2). With household earnings of typically US$75 to 100 per month, this frees up a significant amount of cash. Businesses |182| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

benefit from better quality light and electric fans, and some new businesses have started because of the HPS supply, including photocopying shops and mini cinemas.

Rice mills are paid about US$25 per tonne of rice husk, so earn an extra US$3,000 per year by supplying an HPS plant, as well as solving a disposal problem. Some mills have shared this benefit with their customers by cutting the charges that they make for milling. HPS provides good employment at a local level. Plant assembly provides temporary employment for about 10 local labourers. Each plant then employs four people (plant operator, electrician, fuel handler and fee collector) who have training, income and safe working conditions.

The collector is encouraged to earn extra as â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;travelling salesmanâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;, selling goods that are not usually available in the village at the same time as collecting fees.

Further skilled and professional employment is provided in the cluster-level, regional and central operations.

HPS provides full medical benefits and retirement contributions for its full time employees, who number about 270. Rice husk char is produced as a by-product of the gasification process. HPS is investigating ways of using this that will add value and create employment. At five plants, groups of about 15 women work part-time making incense sticks from char, and can earn about INR 80 (US$1.8) per day.

Future plans HPS has a target of over 2,000 plants in operation by the end of 2014.

Husk Power Systems is a for-profit company, registered in 2008. It has a mission to provide renewable and affordable electricity to rural people in a financially sustainable way. Most of its income comes from electricity sales.

Aga Khan Planning and Building Service, Pakistan

CASE STUDY

AKPBS,P won a 2011 Ashden Award for its achievement in improving homes and cutting fuelwood use in the mountains of Northern Pakistan.

Background The Hindu Kush and Karakoram mountains lie in Northern Pakistan. Lack of gas supply pushes almost all rural households in the region to use wood as their primary fuel. Homes are cold and smoky in the harsh winters, when open fires or simple wood-burning stoves are used indoors for cooking and heating. Deforestation is a serious issue in Northern Pakistan. The recent improvements in roads and bridges that have made the area less isolated have at the same time led to increased deforestation. Many families own small wood lots, but still have to buy some of the wood that they need for building and fuel, which adds to deforestation.

Deforestation increases wood prices, and has serious environmental impacts. Locally it leads to soil erosion and increased damage from flooding. Nationally it reduces water availability, since the area acts as the watershed for much of the country. The Building and Construction Improvement Programme (BACIP) was set up in 1997 by the Aga Khan Planning and Building Service, Pakistan (AKPBS,P) to improve the quality of rural buildings and the home.

The programme The BACIP programme works mainly in the Gilgit Baltistan and Chitral (GBC) region of Northern Pakistan.

The programme develops energy-efficient products and other improvements for homes, in collaboration with users. Local entrepreneurs are trained to make the products to these designs. Resource people, identified and trained in the villages, work on commission to promote the products, coordinate purchase and delivery, help with installation and check that customers are satisfied.

The technologies The products developed improve thermal comfort, cut the use of wood, and reduce indoor air pollution in homes.

The most popular are energy efficient stoves, water warming facilities, roof hatch windows, floor insulation and wall insulation.

How do they work?

Stove designs vary in detail from region to region, to suit local cooking requirements, but all have the same basic features. The stove is made from sheet metal and can be

used for two cooking pots at the same time, while seated on the floor. Wood is added to the combustion chamber through a side door, which is then closed to limit air flow.

A chimney takes the smoke out of the room. Insulated tiles are sometimes used around the stove body to cut heat loss and improve cooking efficiency during the summer, then removed for the four to seven winter months when room heating is needed. The stove was tested by Aprovecho Research Centre in 2008, and meets the Shell Foundation benchmarks for an â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;improvedâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; stove.

A number of changes that would improve its energy efficiency have been tried, but do not suit stove users or else add too much to the cost.

Water-warming facilities use a metal pipe that runs around the inside rim at the top of the stove. Water in the pipe is heated by the burning wood, and circulates by natural convection to a 150-litre plastic storage barrel.

Water is heated while cooking takes place, so additional wood is not needed. A tap in the barrel provides water at a suitable temperature for washing clothes or dishes, or to fill pots for boiling on the stove. The storage barrel is generally not insulated, because the water does not need to reach a very high temperature. Roof hatch windows are made from toughened glass mounted in a wooden frame. The window fits into the hole in the roof that was previously needed to take smoke out of the house. A cord is used to open and close the window, to provide ventilation particularly in the short, hot summer. The roof hatch windows play a very important role in retaining heat inside the house during cold winters. Floor insulation is made from a simple layer of 6mm thick foam, placed between the concrete floor and the carpet. The material comes from suppliers in Islamabad. Wall insulation is made from wood shavings, wheat stalks, hay and PE foam, which are held between a layer of plastic in a frame and the walls. It is usually fitted when building or extending a home.

How much does it cost and how do users pay?

US$1 = PKR 84.7 (Pakistan rupees) [April 2011] Typical installed prices for the products are: Efficient stove PKR 2,200 (US$26) Efficient stove + water-warming facility PKR 4,200 (US$50) Roof hatch window PKR 4,000 (US$47) ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |183|

CASE STUDY Floor insulation PKR 110 (US$1.3) per square metre Wall insulation PKR 650 (US$7.6) per square metre AKPBS,P places bulk orders for products with entrepreneurs, which ensures a good price and enables quality checking. Users order the product through AKPBS,P and usually pay the full price. A 50% down payment is required to place an order, and the remaining 50% on delivery. To increase wood savings and other benefits, there is currently a subsidy of PKR 2,500 for households who buy a package of four products together.

Thus the most common package of stove, water-warmer, roof window and about 10m2 of floor insulation costs PKR 6,800 (US$80) rather than PKR 9,300 (US$110). It is possible to include other products in the package, such as earthquake-resistant wire bindings for a house. About 60% of products sold in the past three years have been in these subsidised packages. First Micro Finance Bank, the microfinance institution of AKDN, has recently started a joint scheme with AKPBS,P to provide loans for buying the products. The loan is made to a group.

Environmental benefits AKPBS,P regularly monitors wood savings by training the demonstration households to weigh and record their wood use, with the help of the local resource people. In the 2009 study, wood consumption initially averaged 7.7 tonnes/year per household: this value is high because homes need to be heated for up to seven months in the year. After the energy saving products were installed, wood consumption fell by 3.9 tonnes/year (51%). For all 27,000 households, the saving is therefore about 100,000 tonnes/year of wood. This is very significant in an area with high rates of deforestation. Cutting the use of unsustainable wood and improving stove combustion reduces greenhouse gas emissions. AKPBS,P estimates a saving of 1.5 tonnes of CO2 per tonne of wood. On this basis, emissions are cut by about 5.85 tonnes/year CO2 per household or a total of 160,000 tonnes/year CO2.

Social benefits A detailed study of the health and social impacts of using the energy-efficient stoves and water-warming facilities was undertaken by the Aga Khan University Hospital during the winters of 2008 and 2009. The study included 24-hour monitoring of carbon monoxide (CO) and small particulates (PM2.5) - the major pollutants that damage health – in homes. Median CO concentrations were reduced by 44% in homes that used the AKPBS,P products, while PM2.5 concentrations were reduced by 70%. The impact of these reductions was confirmed by reporting of reduced cough and eye irritations (controlled for other variables such as house type). Women using the products noticed that there was less smoke in their homes, and that the house and cooking utensils stayed cleaner. They also found that food cooked in less time, and the house warmed up more quickly. Other benefits |184| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

were reported to the Ashden judge who visited households. Insulated floors were found to be much more comfortable to sit on, and being able to close up the roof vent greatly reduced heat loss and draughts. Having a supply of hot water ‘on tap’ was particularly appreciated.

It saves time – for instance, not having to heat water first thing in the morning before prayers – and improves hygiene.

Economic and employment benefits A 2001 survey of the GBC region found that 55% of households purchase some or all of their fuelwood.

These households make substantial financial savings using AKPBS,P products. Fuelwood in the GBC region currently costs about PKR 15 per kg, so a household that cuts wood use by 3.9 tonnes/year saves up to PKR 57,000 (US$680) per year, or eight times the cost of a four product package. This is a significant benefit in a region where household incomes average PKR 260,000 (US$3,000) per year. The BACIP programme has increased employment and income, both in the towns and in remote villages. The programme employs about 60 people directly, and provides indirect employment to 35 entrepreneurs and 170 artisans, working in both towns and villages. Over 100 village resource people earn a small commission on each enquiry they follow up and PKR 200 (US$2.40) for each four-product package that they arrange to have installed.

Abellon CleanEnergy India

CASE STUDY

Abellon won a 2011 Ashden Award for its achievement in replacing coal with pellets made from locally-sourced biomass residues.

Background The state of Gujarat in North West India is the richest and one of the most industrialised in the country, producing about 16% of India’s industrial output. Major industrial products include cement, petroleum products, chemicals and pharmaceuticals. This industry is heavily dependent on lignite and coal, the most polluting fossil fuel. The land is relatively flat and fertile, so the state has a strong agricultural base with over half of its land area under crops. Major agricultural products include cotton, groundnuts, dates, sugar cane and milk products. However the use of groundwater irrigation has contributed to a significant fall in the water table, leading to saltwater intrusion and increased salinity of soils. This, along with erratic rainfall patterns widely attributed to climate change, makes production and therefore incomes less reliable for small farms.The founders of Abellon CleanEnergy owned a thriving pharmaceutical business and were keen to diversify into clean energy. They saw the potential of using local agricultural residues from small farms to substitute for lignite and coal in local industries.

They also wanted to help farmers use more sustainable techniques, in order to adapt to the changing pressures on agriculture and improve yields, thus helping to ensure a long term supply base of crop residues.

The programme Poornakumbha provides agricultural advice and training to more than 8,500 farmers in about 100 panchayats (village committees) within a 50 km radius of the pellet plants. It negotiates agreements for the supply of crop residues, and sets up contracts with the panchayats.

Farmers gather the raw material (including cotton stalks, cumin waste, castor bean husks, mustard stalks and sugar cane bagasse: the mix varies with season) and take it to a Poornakumba collection centre. Here it is shredded and transported in trucks to the pellet plants. Abellon currently has two pellet plants that convert loose biomass into small, dense pellets. The plant in Changodar started operation in 2009 and uses mainly crop waste.

The plant in Gandhidam started in 2010 and uses 80% sawmill waste from a nearby sawmill, and 20% crop waste. Abellon sells the pellets under the brand name ‘Pellexo Green’, principally to factories in Ahmedabad and neighbouring industrial areas. They are used as a boiler

fuel to replace lignite and sometimes black coal, or else used in combination with them. No boiler modification is required to burn pellets.

The technology How does it work?

In the pellet plant the loose biomass is sieved to remove debris, and then dried. The dry biomass is compressed between rollers to a temperature that melts the lignin in the woody material. The pressure extrudes the hot material through dies at a controlled rate. As the pressure decreases, the lignin cools and re-solidifies, binding the biomass powder into solid rods, 8mm in diameter. These rods are cut into pellets between 10 and 40mm long. The pellets are cooled and air-dried, then put into bags and sealed. The process yields about 500 kg pellets per tonne of raw material, mainly because of moisture removal. About 80 kWh of grid electricity is used in the plant per tonne of pellets produced. The ash residue from the pellet plant is reclaimed and used for various purposes, including in brick manufacturing and soil improvers.

How much does it cost and how do users pay?

US$1 = INR 45 (Indian Rupees) [April 2011] Abellon pays farmers INR 500 (US$11) per tonne for the raw material. It sells pellets at around INR 4,100 (US$90) per tonne to its industrial customers, under standard commercial supply contracts. Pellets cost slightly more than the fuel they replace, but for many users the price difference is offset by their advantages in operation: they are ready-to-use, don’t retain moisture and burn more cleanly and efficiently.

Training and support Abellon technical advisers talk to boiler operators; check how pellets are being used; and advise on maintenance routines and operational details such as reducing stack temperature to improve efficiency. They can also link users up with potential customers for pellet ash.

Poornakumba starts work with a group of villages about one year before crop waste collection begins. Its advisers give farmers one-to-one or communal advice on topics such as improving soil fertility; introducing ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |185|

CASE STUDY cheap and efficient natural pest control; intercropping (e.g wheat and cotton); and some agroforestry (including planting bamboo and drumstick tree, both of which are drought and salt-resistant). Farmers are also supplied with seedlings. Emphasis is placed on developing a relationship of trust with farmers, listening to their concerns and trying to meet their needs in the most appropriate way. Poornakumbha has a contract with Anand Agricultural University to train its advisers, who in turn advise and train farmers. Experts from the University also provide direct over-the-phone advice to farmers, and receive three or four calls a day.

Benefits 100 panchayats representing about 8,500 farmers have signed long-term agreements to supply Abellon with crop residues, and one sawmill supplies sawdust. The two pellet plants currently in operation have a combined output capacity of 240 tonnes/day. A third plant using crop residue is due to open in 2011, with a capacity of 200 tonnes/day, and a fourth is at the planning stage.

Pellets are sold to 14 industrial customers. By the end of February 2011, a total of over 88,000 tonnes of pellets had been produced, including 65,000 tonnes in 2010.

Environmental and social benefits Pellets replace lignite and coal which are high carbon fuels. A Clean Development Mechanism (CDM) assessment of greenhouse gas emissions found a net saving of 1.70 tonnes CO2e per tonne of pellets used.

Thus the 65,000 tonnes of pellets sold in 2010 cut greenhouse gas emissions by 110,000 tonnes/year of CO2e. There are other environmental and health benefits associated with pellet use.

The baseline for calculating savings is the emission of greenhouse gases from burning lignite, which is estimated as 1.78 tonnes of CO2e per tonne of pellets.

This net saving takes into account the greenhouse gas emissions from electricity used in the pelleting plant (4% of baseline) and from transport of the residues to the plant (0.2%). The raw residues are regarded as ‘zero carbon’, because they would have been burned or left to decompose if not used for pellets. Pellets are much easier to handle than lignite. They are stored cleanly and kept dry in bags, and fed straight into the furnace with no crushing required. This saves time, reduces dust and cuts electricity use. Pellets have a more uniform calorific value and they burn more cleanly, producing less smoke and dust. This results in less nuisance to neighbours and fewer breathing problems for workers. It also helps factories to meet their obligations to control air pollution.

The crop residues used to make pellets are mostly woody and were often previously |186| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE

burned in the field, so pelleting reduces air pollution in agricultural areas as well.

Economic and employment benefits Selling crop waste helps clear the fields and provides farmers with a small increase in income (around 2%).

However, the more significant benefit from working with Abellon is the agricultural advice provided by Poornakumbha. With the increasing salinity and changing weather patterns in Gujarat, farmers cannot rely on their traditional knowledge for what to plant and when, so expert advice is particularly valued. Abellon has created jobs for 215 people, and Poornakumbha has 20 employees and about 200 part time extension workers.

Potential for growth and replication The future potential for biomass pellet production in Gujarat is substantial: the raw material is widely available and cheap, and industrial demand for pellets is strong and growing. At present Abellon does not have sufficient capacity to meet the demand, but this will change when the two additional pellet plants come on stream.

Abellon’s target is to treble sales in India over the next five years. The company is also keen to expand into international markets, both by exporting pellets and setting up operations overseas. It is currently in discussion with companies in Ghana, Italy, Canada and the USA. Abellon is in the process of applying for carbon finance via the Clean Development Mechanism, as an additional income stream for both the company itself and its customers.

Future plans – Within the next five years, Abellon plans to open two additional pellet plants in Gujarat and treble its production in India.

– It also plans to expand into international markets through sales and setting up production in other countries.

FAMOUS LAST WORDS

Green travel

By Sarah Butler-Sloss, Founder Director of the Ashden Awards for Sustainable Energy

When we talk about the transition to a Low Carbon Britain, it’s not just about how much energy we use in our homes and workplaces but also about how we travel.

Over the last few decades we’ve travelled more and more by car and shifted more and more goods by lorry. We’ve flown more and travelled further than we ever have before, lured by discount flights and exotic holidays. As we’ve moved away from travel on foot, bike and public transport we have travelled faster but we have also become fatter and less fit, and more stressed – and have created a transport infrastructure which is predicated on the assumption that everyone has access to a car.

Car mileage grew exponentially as a result of people having more disposable incomes, booming car ownership and the demand for longer trips. These days the convenience factor means many journeys that could be made by bus, train, on foot or by bike are taken by car.

In the UK, we each travel on average around 140 miles a week and seven out of ten of these journeys are made in either a car or a van.

So why does all this matter?

The climate change impact of our travel choices is clear: EU transport emissions account for a staggering 3.5% of total global CO2 emissions. More than half of this is passenger travel . In the UK, car use alone accounts

for 13% of our total CO2 emissions. Short trips are a big proportion of this - car journeys of five miles or less account for around 20% of all surface transport CO2 emissions. Worldwide transport emissions are expected to continue increasing. These are worrying trends if we want to keep greenhouse gases below critical levels and avoid the worse consequences of climate change.

While cutting CO2 emissions is a prime reason for opting for sustainable travel, it can also bring us a better and healthier quality of life. According to the Healthy Air Campaign, every year 29,000 premature deaths are attributable to poor air quality in the UK – nearly 5% of all annual UK deaths – with an average loss of life expectancy of eleven years. By moving to cleaner transport options we will immediately improve respiratory health and reduce the nation’s NHS bill too.

Sustainable travel can make our towns and cities more ‘liveable’. When we travel by bus, train and on foot we connect to the people around us, our neighbours and our communities. And we give people a sense of connection to ‘place’ and a pride in where they live.

ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE |187|

Many of our communities are being ruined by traffic and speeding cars. Home Office surveys show that, when asked, residents frequently cite speeding cars and nuisance parking as key issues that reduce the quality of their daily lives. Similarly, evidence from surveys in the English Sustainable Travel Demonstration Towns shows widespread dissatisfaction with levels of traffic growth, and strong public support for policies that favour walking, cycling and public transport over car travel.

A famous piece of research by Donald Appleyard compared three residential streets in San Francisco with different levels of traffic. He showed that residents living in areas of light traffic had more friends and twice as many acquaintances as those on streets with heavy traffic. As traffic volume increased, the space people considered to be their territory shrank. Appleyard suggested that these results were related, indicating that residents on traffic busy streets had less friends and acquaintances precisely because there was less home territory in which to interact socially.

There are some encouraging signs that the benefits of sustainable transport are being recognised in the UK. The Government has just announced that it will fund 39 proposals from local authorities in the first round of the Local Sustainable Transport Fund.

The Ashden Awards for Sustainable Energy reward and support clean energy initiatives around the world and we are now partnering with Eurostar to launch the Sustainable Travel Award. The aim of the award is to showcase the most innovative and replicable examples of local sustainable travel projects across the UK, France and Belgium. It seeks entries from projects that are making significant reductions in carbon emissions and also helping people live more fulfilled and healthy lives.

Find out more at www.ashdenawards.org

|188| ENVIRONMENT INDUSTRY MAGAZINE